GTN7XX安装手册 - 复件

GTN 725/750
TSO Installation Manual
190-01007-02 December 2015 Revision N

© 2011 - 2015
Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
SkyWatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications.
© 2015 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. Connext™, GDU™, GTN™ and Telligence™ are trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
© 2015 SD® is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All rights reserved.
Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications, Inc. All rights reserved.
At Garmin, we value your opinion. For comments about this guide, please e-mail
Techpubs.Salem@garmin.com. For comments about Garmin aviation products, email
Avionics@garmin.com.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Garmin’s website.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: (913) 397-8200
Aviation Dealer Technical Support Line (Toll Free): (888) 606-5482
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9LR, UK
Telephone: 44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: 44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support 44 (0) 37 0850 1243
Garmin AT
2345 Turner Rd., SE
Salem, OR 97302 USA
Telephone: (503) 581-8101
Fax: (503) 364-2138
190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

Rev. N Page A
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Description
Added v5.12 functionality and other minor edits. See Current Revision
L 10/28/14
Description.
Added v6.00 functionality and other minor edits. See current
M 7/15/15
revision description.
Added v6.10 functionality and other minor edits. See current revision
N 12/15/15
description.
CURRENT REVISION DESCRIPTION

Section Number Description of Change
TOC Added Mod 5
6.6.1 Added EFIS Format 2, GAMA Format 8, and Fuel Format 3 configuration note
Updated Interfaced Equipment Page figure, added ADS-B In configuration
6.6.4
instructions, and updated GDL 88 configuration instructions
6.6.6.1 Clarified Photocell Transition configuration instructions
6.6.7.2 Clarified Photocell Transition configuration instructions
6.12.17 Clarified TIS Interface Test instructions

Rev. N Page B
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR)
issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, chapter VII, subchapter C) and which may
not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the United States without
first obtaining an export license. The proceeding statement is required to be included on any and all
reproductions in whole or in part of this manual.
SOFTWARE LICENSE NOTIFICATION
AES ENCRYPTION
The product may include AES file encryption software, © 2002 Dr Brian Gladman, subject to the
following license:
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or
without changes) provided:
 Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer
 Distributions in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other associated materials
 The copyright holder's name is not used to endorse products built using this software
without specific written permission
ALTERNATIVELY, provided that this notice is retained in full, this product may be distributed
under the terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL), in which case the provisions of the
GPL apply INSTEAD OF those given above.
Disclaimer
The AES file encryption software is provided “as is” with no explicit or implied warranties in
respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.
DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING
Warnings indicate immediate attention must be given to avoid potential
personal injury or equipment damage should the instructions be disregarded.
CAUTION
Cautions indicate an alert to potential damage to the equipment if the
procedural step is not directly followed.
NOTE
Notes indicate additional information needed.

Rev. N Page i
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any questions or
would like additional information, please refer to our website at 
www.garmin.com/prop65.
WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, refer to
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.
WARNING
This product contains a lithium battery that must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Battery replacement and removal must be performed by professional services.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the GTN, take precautions to prevent Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
when handling the GTN, connectors, fan, and associated wiring. ESD damage can be
prevented by touching an object that is of the same electrical potential as the GTN before
handling the GTN itself.
CAUTION
The GTN 725 and GTN 750 has a display that is coated with a special anti-reflective
coating and is very sensitive to waxes and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING
AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to
clean the display using a microfiber cloth or with a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass
lens cleaner that is safe for anti-reflective coatings.
NOTE
Garmin recommends installation of the GTN 725 and/or GTN 750 by a Garmin-
authorized installer. To the extent allowable by law, Garmin will not be liable for damages
resulting from the improper or negligent installation of the GTN unit by anyone other than
a Garmin-authorized installer. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure the latest
revision of the applicable installation manual is used for any installation of a Garmin
product. For questions, or to request the latest revision of a Garmin installation manual,
please contact Garmin Aviation Product Support at (866) 739-5687.

Rev. N Page ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Equipment Description ..............................................................................................................1-2
1.3 General Specifications ...............................................................................................................1-3
1.4 GPS/SBAS Specifications .........................................................................................................1-4
1.5 COM Specifications (GTN 750 Only) ......................................................................................1-4
1.6 VOR Specifications (GTN 750 Only) .......................................................................................1-5
1.7 LOC Specifications (GTN 750 Only) ........................................................................................1-6
1.8 Glideslope Specifications (GTN 750 Only) ...............................................................................1-7
1.9 Current Draw Specifications ......................................................................................................1-7
1.10 GPS/WAAS Antenna Requirements .........................................................................................1-8
1.11 License Requirements (GTN 750 Only) ....................................................................................1-9
1.12 Certification .............................................................................................................................1-10
1.13 GTN Databases ........................................................................................................................1-27
1.14 Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) ......................................................................................1-29
2 LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Installation .................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Aircraft Radio ............................................................................................................................2-1
2.3 Weather Products .......................................................................................................................2-1
2.4 Operation ...................................................................................................................................2-1
3 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Minimum System Configuration ...............................................................................................3-1
3.3 External Sensors ........................................................................................................................3-2
3.4 GDL 88 Installation Considerations ..........................................................................................3-8
3.5 Antenna Considerations .............................................................................................................3-9
3.6 GTN 725/750 Mounting Considerations .................................................................................3-13
3.7 Cabling and Wiring Considerations .........................................................................................3-13
3.8 Air Circulation and Cooling ....................................................................................................3-14
3.9 Compass Safe Distance ............................................................................................................3-14
3.10 TAWS-A Installation Considerations ......................................................................................3-14
3.11 HTAWS Installation Considerations .......................................................................................3-14
4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Unit and Accessories .................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Optional Accessories .................................................................................................................4-2
4.3 Database Options .......................................................................................................................4-3
4.4 Miscellaneous Options ...............................................................................................................4-3
4.5 Optional Reference Material ......................................................................................................4-4
4.6 Enablement Cards ......................................................................................................................4-4
4.7 Installation Materials Required but not Supplied ......................................................................4-5
4.8 Special Tools Required ..............................................................................................................4-7
4.9 Coaxial Cable Installation ..........................................................................................................4-7
4.10 Equipment Mounting .................................................................................................................4-8
4.11 Antenna Installation and Connections .......................................................................................4-9
4.12 Electrical Installation Procedure ..............................................................................................4-11
5 CONNECTOR PINOUT INFORMATION ...................................................................................5-1
5.1 Pin Function List ........................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Power, Lighting, and Antennas ................................................................................................5-10

Rev. N Page iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED
6 POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURES ................6-1
6.1 System Configuration Overview ...............................................................................................6-1
6.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks .......................................................................................6-1
6.3 Connector Engagement Check ...................................................................................................6-2
6.4 Configuration Mode Operations ................................................................................................6-2
6.5 System Information Page ...........................................................................................................6-3
6.6 GTN Setup Page ........................................................................................................................6-4
6.7 GTN Options Page ...................................................................................................................6-44
6.8 GTN Diagnostics Page .............................................................................................................6-55
6.9 External Systems ......................................................................................................................6-57
6.10 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode) ..................................................................................6-103
6.11 Ground Checks (Normal Mode) ............................................................................................6-113
6.12 Interface Checkout .................................................................................................................6-117
6.13 Flight Checks .........................................................................................................................6-128
6.14 Database Check ......................................................................................................................6-129
6.15 Data Card Replacement .........................................................................................................6-129
6.16 Software Loading ...................................................................................................................6-130
6.17 Documentation Checks ..........................................................................................................6-132
7 CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS .................................................................................................7-1
APPENDIX A ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM .....................................................A-1
APPENDIX B GTN DATA FORMAT ................................................................................................. B-1
B.1 RS-232 Aviation Data Format .................................................................................................. B-1
B.2 GTN RS-232 Fuel/Air Data Input Format ................................................................................ B-5
B.3 RS-232 NMEA Radio Control Format ................................................................................... B-14
APPENDIX C MECHANICAL DRAWINGS .....................................................................................C-1
C.1 Drawing List ............................................................................................................................. C-1
APPENDIX D INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS .................................................................................D-1
D.1 Drawing List .............................................................................................................................D-1

Rev. N Page iv
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1 GPS Antenna Installation Considerations ........................................................................3-11
Figure 4-1 Connector and Backshell Assembly .................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-2 Shielded Cable Preparation ...............................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-3 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly (Preferred Method) .....................................4-15
Figure 4-4 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module) .......................................................4-18
Figure 4-5 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer) ..............................................4-20
Figure 4-6 Fan Wiring Installation .....................................................................................................4-22
Figure 6-1 Configuration Mode Page ...................................................................................................6-2
Figure 6-2 System Information Page ....................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-3 GTN Setup Page .................................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-4 ARINC 429 Configuration Page .........................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-5 RS-232 Configuration Page ................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-6 HSDB Port Utilization Page .............................................................................................6-15
Figure 6-7 Interfaced Equipment Page ...............................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-8 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page ...................................................................6-18
Figure 6-9 Lighting Configuration Page ............................................................................................6-19
Figure 6-10 Photocell Configuration Page ...........................................................................................6-20
Figure 6-11 Lighting Bus Configuration Page .....................................................................................6-22
Figure 6-12 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Page ............................................................................6-23
Figure 6-13 Enhanced Lighting Configuration - Source Settings Page ...............................................6-24
Figure 6-14 Enhanced Lighting Configuration - Day Mode Operation Page ......................................6-25
Figure 6-15 Enhanced Lighting Configuration - Display-Day Mode Page .........................................6-26
Figure 6-16 Enhanced Lighting Configuration - Night Mode Operation Page ....................................6-27
Figure 6-17 Audio Configuration Page ................................................................................................6-28
Figure 6-18 Voice Command Configuration Page ...............................................................................6-29
Figure 6-19 Traffic Configuration Page ...............................................................................................6-30
Figure 6-20 Main System Configuration Page .....................................................................................6-31
Figure 6-21 Measurement of GPS Antenna Vertical Offset ................................................................6-32
Figure 6-22 COM Configuration Page ................................................................................................6-36
Figure 6-23 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page ..................................................................................6-37
Figure 6-24 ARINC 453/708 Configuration Page ................................................................................6-39
Figure 6-25 Discrete Configuration Page .............................................................................................6-40
Figure 6-26 Discrete Configuration Menu ...........................................................................................6-41
Figure 6-27 Navigation Features Configuration Page ..........................................................................6-42
Figure 6-28 Ownship Configuration Page ............................................................................................6-43
Figure 6-29 GTN Options Page ............................................................................................................6-44
Figure 6-30 Terrain Configuration Page (Fixed Wing Installations) ...................................................6-45
Figure 6-31 Terrain Configuration Page (Rotorcraft Installations) ......................................................6-45
Figure 6-32 Audio Clips Page ..............................................................................................................6-46
Figure 6-33 Chart Configuration Page .................................................................................................6-49
Figure 6-34 COM Transmit Power Configuration Page ......................................................................6-50
Figure 6-35 Weather Radar Page .........................................................................................................6-52
Figure 6-36 Search and Rescue Configuration .....................................................................................6-54
Figure 6-37 GTN Diagnostics Page .....................................................................................................6-55
Figure 6-38 External Systems Page ......................................................................................................6-57
Figure 6-39 GDL 69/69A Configuration Page .....................................................................................6-58
Figure 6-40 Stormscope Page ...............................................................................................................6-59
Figure 6-41 Stormscope Configuration Page .......................................................................................6-60

Rev. N Page v
LIST OF FIGURES CONTINUED
Figure 6-42 Stormscope Test Page .......................................................................................................6-61
Figure 6-43 Stormscope Test Menu Page ............................................................................................6-62
Figure 6-44 Traffic Test Page ...............................................................................................................6-63
Figure 6-45 GAD 42 Configuration Page ............................................................................................6-64
Figure 6-46 XPDR1 Configuration Page .............................................................................................6-65
Figure 6-47 XPDR Input/Outputs Page ................................................................................................6-66
Figure 6-48 XPDR1 Installation Settings Page ....................................................................................6-72
Figure 6-49 Microsoft Windows Calculator .........................................................................................6-74
Figure 6-50 XPDR1 Audio Configuration Page ..................................................................................6-77
Figure 6-51 Audio Panel Page ..............................................................................................................6-79
Figure 6-52 Audio Panel Default Configuration Page .........................................................................6-80
Figure 6-53 Audio Panel Configuration Page ......................................................................................6-81
Figure 6-54 Audio Panel Configuration Page ......................................................................................6-83
Figure 6-55 Audio Panel Discrete Configuration Page ........................................................................6-86
Figure 6-56 Audio Panel Connected Radios Page ...............................................................................6-87
Figure 6-57 Audio Panel Page ..............................................................................................................6-88
Figure 6-58 GDL 88 Page ....................................................................................................................6-89
Figure 6-59 GDL 88 Diagnostics Page ................................................................................................6-90
Figure 6-60 GDL 88 Configuration Page .............................................................................................6-92
Figure 6-61 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration Page - Aircraft Information ...........................................6-93
Figure 6-62 GDL 88 Antenna Configuration Page ..............................................................................6-95
Figure 6-63 GDL 88 Audio Configuration Page ..................................................................................6-97
Figure 6-64 GDL 88 Port Configuration Page .....................................................................................6-98
Figure 6-65 GSR 56 Configuration Page .............................................................................................6-99
Figure 6-66 GWX 68/7X Page ...........................................................................................................6-101
Figure 6-67 Main Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics Page ....................................................................6-103
Figure 6-68 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics Page .............................................................6-104
Figure 6-69 Discrete Inputs Page .......................................................................................................6-105
Figure 6-70 Discrete Outputs Page .....................................................................................................6-106
Figure 6-71 HSDB Diagnostics Page .................................................................................................6-107
Figure 6-72 Audio Configuration Page ..............................................................................................6-108
Figure 6-73 GAD 42 Configuration Page ..........................................................................................6-109
Figure 6-74 Lighting Configuration Page ..........................................................................................6-110
Figure 6-75 Main Data Inputs Page ....................................................................................................6-111
Figure 6-76 GWX 68 Weather Radar Page ........................................................................................6-126
Figure 6-77 Updates Page ..................................................................................................................6-131
Figure C-1 Dimensions and Center of Gravity .................................................................................... C-2
Figure C-2 Mounting Rack Installation ............................................................................................... C-3
Figure C-3 Panel Cutout Detail ............................................................................................................ C-4
Figure C-4 Mounting Rack Tab Alignment Detail .............................................................................. C-5
Figure C-5 Connector Layout Detail .................................................................................................... C-6
Figure D-1 System Interface Diagram .................................................................................................D-2
Figure D-2 GTN 750 Typical Installation ............................................................................................D-3
Figure D-3 GTN 725 Typical Installation ............................................................................................D-5
Figure D-4 Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect ......................................................................D-7
Figure D-5 Antenna Interconnect .........................................................................................................D-9
Figure D-6 Main Indicator Interconnect ............................................................................................D-12
Figure D-7 Autopilot Interconnect .....................................................................................................D-13

Rev. N Page vi
LIST OF FIGURES CONTINUED
Figure D-8 Traffic Interconnect .........................................................................................................D-14
Figure D-9 Transponder Interconnect ................................................................................................D-16
Figure D-10 Dual GTN to Single GDU Interconnect ..........................................................................D-20
Figure D-11 ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect ........................................................................................D-22
Figure D-12 GDL 69/69A Interconnect ...............................................................................................D-24
Figure D-13 GTN - Audio Panel Interconnect .....................................................................................D-25
Figure D-14 Air Data/IRU/AHRS RS-232 Interconnect .....................................................................D-28
Figure D-15 Air Data/IRU/AHRS ARINC 429 Interconnect ..............................................................D-30
Figure D-16 GAD 42 Interconnect .......................................................................................................D-31
Figure D-17 VOR/ILS Indicator Interconnect .....................................................................................D-32
Figure D-18 RMI OBI Interconnect .....................................................................................................D-33
Figure D-19 WX-500 Interconnect ......................................................................................................D-34
Figure D-20 GTN 750 - DME Interconnect .........................................................................................D-36
Figure D-21 GTN 750 - Remote DME Interconnect ...........................................................................D-37
Figure D-22 GTN 750 - Parallel 2 of 5 DME Tuning Interconnect .....................................................D-38
Figure D-23 GTN 750 - Parallel Slip Code DME Tuning Interconnect ..............................................D-39
Figure D-24 Heading Synchro Interconnect ........................................................................................D-40
Figure D-25 GPS Annunciator Interconnect ........................................................................................D-41
Figure D-26 NAV Source Select Annunciator Interconnect ................................................................D-42
Figure D-27 TAWS/HTAWS Interconnect ..........................................................................................D-43
Figure D-28 Switches Interconnect ......................................................................................................D-45
Figure D-29 GDL 88/88D Interconnect - Single GTN ........................................................................D-47
Figure D-30 GDL 88/88D Interconnect - Dual GTNs .........................................................................D-48
Figure D-31 GSR 56 Interconnect ........................................................................................................D-50
Figure D-32 Weather Radar Interconnect ............................................................................................D-51
Figure D-33 Radar Altimeter Interconnect ..........................................................................................D-54
Figure D-34 Flight Stream 210 Interconnect .......................................................................................D-55

Rev. N Page vii
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 GTN Units ..............................................................................................................................1-2
Table 1-2 Physical Specifications .......................................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-3 Display Specifications ............................................................................................................1-3
Table 1-4 GPS/SBAS Specifications ......................................................................................................1-4
Table 1-5 COM Transmitter Specifications ...........................................................................................1-4
Table 1-6 COM Receiver Specifications ................................................................................................1-5
Table 1-7 VOR Specifications ...............................................................................................................1-5
Table 1-8 LOC Specifications ................................................................................................................1-6
Table 1-9 Glideslope Specifications .......................................................................................................1-7
Table 1-10 GTN Current Draw Specifications .........................................................................................1-7
Table 1-11 Approved GPS/WAAS Antennas ..........................................................................................1-8
Table 1-12 Hardware Part Numbers .......................................................................................................1-11
Table 1-13 GTN 7XX Hardware, CLD, and Software Compliance ......................................................1-11
Table 1-14 TSO and ETSO Description .................................................................................................1-16
Table 1-15 Non-TSO Functions .............................................................................................................1-17
Table 1-16 CLD DO-254 Levels ............................................................................................................1-17
Table 1-17 System Functions .................................................................................................................1-18
Table 1-18 TSO/ETSO Deviations .........................................................................................................1-19
Table 1-19 FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization ..............................................................................1-23
Table 3-1 Multiple Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Sources ...................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 Baro-corrected Altitude Sources ............................................................................................3-3
Table 3-3 Multiple Heading Sources ......................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-4 Multiple Indicated Airspeed Sources .....................................................................................3-5
Table 3-5 Multiple True Airspeed Sources ............................................................................................3-5
Table 3-6 Multiple VOR/LOC Selected Course Sources .......................................................................3-5
Table 3-7 Multiple GPS Selected Course Sources .................................................................................3-6
Table 3-8 Multiple Total Air Temperature Sources ...............................................................................3-6
Table 3-9 Multiple Static Air Temperature Sources ..............................................................................3-7
Table 4-1 Catalog Part Numbers ............................................................................................................4-1
Table 4-2 Standard Kit Accessories .......................................................................................................4-1
Table 4-3 Replacement Fan Parts ...........................................................................................................4-1
Table 4-4 GA 35 Antenna ......................................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-5 GA 36 Antenna ......................................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-6 GA 37 Antenna ......................................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-7 A33W Antenna ......................................................................................................................4-3
Table 4-8 Database Options ...................................................................................................................4-3
Table 4-9 Miscellaneous Options ...........................................................................................................4-3
Table 4-10 Reference Documents ............................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-11 Enablement Cards ..................................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-12 Required Accessories ...........................................................................................................4-5
Table 4-13 Approved Ethernet Cable Manufacturers ..............................................................................4-5
Table 4-14 Optional Annunciator Panels .................................................................................................4-6
Table 4-15 Recommended Crimp Tools (or Equivalent) .........................................................................4-7
Table 4-16 Socket Contact Part Numbers [1] ...........................................................................................4-7
Table 4-17 GTN Backshell Assembly ....................................................................................................4-12
Table 4-18 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart ............................................................4-17
Table 4-19 Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03 (P1001) ..............................................................4-18
Table 4-20 Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-00 (P1001) ..............................................................4-19

Rev. N Page viii
LIST OF TABLES CONTINUED
Table 4-21 Fan Kit (P1001 Only) ...........................................................................................................4-21
Table 4-22 Fan Cable Wire Color Reference Chart ...............................................................................4-21
Table 5-1 P1001 Connector ....................................................................................................................5-1
Table 5-6 Power Pins ............................................................................................................................5-10
Table 5-7 Lighting Bus Pins .................................................................................................................5-10
Table 5-8 Antenna Connectors .............................................................................................................5-11
Table 5-9 ARINC 429 Labels ...............................................................................................................5-12
Table 5-10 ARINC 429 OUT 3 Labels ..................................................................................................5-14
Table 5-11 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT Labels .....................................................................................5-14
Table 5-12 ARINC Output Labels .........................................................................................................5-15
Table 5-13 RS-232 .................................................................................................................................5-16
Table 5-14 ARINC 429 ..........................................................................................................................5-16
Table 5-15 Ethernet ................................................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-16 Main Audio Output .............................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-17 Deviation ..............................................................................................................................5-18
Table 5-18 TO/FROM ............................................................................................................................5-18
Table 5-19 Flag .......................................................................................................................................5-18
Table 5-20 Superflags .............................................................................................................................5-19
Table 5-21 OBS ......................................................................................................................................5-19
Table 5-22 Discrete Input Defaults ........................................................................................................5-20
Table 5-23 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* DISCRETE ..............................................................................5-21
Table 5-24 Discrete Output Defaults ......................................................................................................5-23
Table 5-25 TIME MARK OUT Outputs ................................................................................................5-26
Table 5-26 Heading Synchro XYZ .........................................................................................................5-26
Table 5-27 Heading Synchro Reference Voltage ...................................................................................5-27
Table 5-28 Heading Synchro Valid Input ..............................................................................................5-27
Table 5-29 COM MIC AUDIO ..............................................................................................................5-27
Table 5-30 COM AUDIO .......................................................................................................................5-27
Table 5-31 COM Discrete Inputs ...........................................................................................................5-28
Table 5-32 VOR/ILS Audio ...................................................................................................................5-28
Table 5-33 VOR/ILS Discrete Inputs .....................................................................................................5-29
Table 5-34 Superflags .............................................................................................................................5-29
Table 5-35 Deviation ..............................................................................................................................5-30
Table 5-36 TO/FROM ............................................................................................................................5-30
Table 5-37 Flag .......................................................................................................................................5-30
Table 5-38 OBS ......................................................................................................................................5-30
Table 5-39 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE ....................................................................................................5-30
Table 5-40 GLIDESLOPE COMPOSITE ..............................................................................................5-31
Table 5-41 NAV ILS ENERGIZE .........................................................................................................5-31
Table 5-42 RMI/OBI Electrical Characteristics .....................................................................................5-31
Table 5-43 Parallel DME Tuning ...........................................................................................................5-32
Table 5-44 King Serial DME Tuning .....................................................................................................5-32
Table 6-1 Speed Selections ....................................................................................................................6-5
Table 6-2 Data In Selections ..................................................................................................................6-5

Rev. N Page ix
Table 6-3 Data Out Selections ................................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-4 SDI Selections ........................................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-5 Channel Input Selections .......................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-6 Channel Output Selections ...................................................................................................6-12
Table 6-7 V-Flag State Selections ........................................................................................................6-19
Table 6-8 Source Selections .................................................................................................................6-20
Table 6-9 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Selections ......................................................................6-23
Table 6-10 Voice Command Selections .................................................................................................6-29
Table 6-11 Mute Tone Selections ...........................................................................................................6-29
Table 6-12 Air/Ground Configuration ....................................................................................................6-32
Table 6-13 GPS Select Selections ..........................................................................................................6-33
Table 6-14 Heading Source Input Selections .........................................................................................6-33
Table 6-15 Radio Altimeter Input Selections .........................................................................................6-33
Table 6-16 Altitude Source Input Selections .........................................................................................6-33
Table 6-17 Enhanced Lighting Mode Selections ...................................................................................6-34
Table 6-18 Voice Command Selections .................................................................................................6-34
Table 6-19 Pilot Position Selections .......................................................................................................6-34
Table 6-20 Crossfill Status Alert Selections ..........................................................................................6-34
Table 6-21 Database Sync Selections .....................................................................................................6-35
Table 6-22 Airspace Labels Selections ..................................................................................................6-35
Table 6-23 Checklist Page Title Selections ............................................................................................6-35
Table 6-24 Summary of COM RF Squelch Settings and Auto Squelch Levels .....................................6-37
Table 6-25 ARINC 429 Configuration Speed Selections .......................................................................6-38
Table 6-26 SDI Selections ......................................................................................................................6-38
Table 6-27 DME Mode Selections .........................................................................................................6-38
Table 6-28 DME Channel Mode Selections ...........................................................................................6-38
Table 6-29 External Weather Radar Selections ......................................................................................6-39
Table 6-30 Mark On Target Selections ..................................................................................................6-42
Table 6-31 RF Procedure Leg Selections ...............................................................................................6-42
Table 6-32 Audio Clips Selections .........................................................................................................6-46
Table 6-33 RS-232 Port 1 Input .............................................................................................................6-66
Table 6-34 RS-232 Port 1 Outputs ......................................................................................................... 6-66
Table 6-35 RS-232 Port 2 Inputs ............................................................................................................6-67
Table 6-36 RS-232 Port 2 Outputs .........................................................................................................6-67
Table 6-37 Baud Rate Selections ...........................................................................................................6-67
Table 6-38 Parity Selections ...................................................................................................................6-67
Table 6-39 ARINC 429 Speed Selections ..............................................................................................6-68
Table 6-40 ARINC 429 Input Selections ...............................................................................................6-68
Table 6-41 AHRS Computer Labels ......................................................................................................6-69
Table 6-42 Air Data Computer Labels ...................................................................................................6-69
Table 6-43 EFIS Display System Labels ................................................................................................6-69
Table 6-44 GPS/FMS Navigation System Labels ..................................................................................6-70
Table 6-45 Garmin Display Labels ........................................................................................................6-70
Table 6-46 Garmin TAS Label ...............................................................................................................6-70
Table 6-47 AFCS Labels ........................................................................................................................6-70
Table 6-48 ARINC 429 Output Selections .............................................................................................6-70
Table 6-49 ARINC 429 Labels ...............................................................................................................6-71
Table 6-50 Additional ARINC 429 Labels ............................................................................................6-71

Rev. N Page x
Table 6-51 Aircraft Weight Selections ...................................................................................................6-72
Table 6-52 Air/Ground Logic Selections ...............................................................................................6-73
Table 6-53 Maximum Airspeed Selections ............................................................................................6-73
Table 6-54 Address Type Selections ......................................................................................................6-73
Table 6-55 Flight ID Type Selections ....................................................................................................6-74
Table 6-56 Audio Terminology ..............................................................................................................6-78
Table 6-57 Connected Radio Selections .................................................................................................6-88
Table 6-58 Self-Test Data ....................................................................................................................6-113
Table B-1 Type 1 Output Sentence Format ........................................................................................... B-2
Table B-2 Type 2 Output Sentence Format ........................................................................................... B-4
Table B-3 Input Message Summary ..................................................................................................... B-25
Table B-4 Output Message Summary .................................................................................................. B-25

Rev. N Page xi
GTN 725/750 HARDWARE MOD LEVEL HISTORY
The following table identifies hardware modification (Mod) Levels for the GTN 725 and GTN 750. Mod
Levels are listed with the associated service bulletin number, service bulletin date, and the purpose of the
modification. The table is current at the time of publication of this manual (see date on front cover) and is
subject to change without notice. Authorized Garmin Sales and Service Centers are encouraged to access
the most up-to-date bulletin and advisory information at the Dealer Resource Center at Garmin’s website.
A Garmin-provided user name and password is required.
SERVICE SERVICE
MOD
BULLETIN BULLETIN PURPOSE OF MODIFICATION
LEVEL
NUMBER DATE
Some GTN 650 and GTN 750 units require upgrade or
March 8,
1 SB 1203 MOD 1 marking of previous upgrade to improve the
2012
reliability of the VHF navigation receiver.
In installations with insufficient antenna isolation, some
GTN 635/650 and GTN 750 units require upgrade to
March 20,
2 SB 1311 MOD 2 to prevent squelch from breaking when the COM
2013
receiver is overloaded, or to keep the transmitting COM
from causing the GTN's VOR receiver from flagging.
Modification for installations that need to meet RTCA/
March 20,
3 SB 1313 DO-160F, Section 8, Category U, Curve G vibration
2013
(typically helicopter).
Some GTN 650 and GTN 750 units may require upgrade
February 7,
4 SB 1404 to MOD 4 to prevent incorrect VOR or Localizer deviation
2014
indication in certain limited conditions.
Some GTN 650 and GTN 750 units require upgrade to
November 11,
5 SB 1559 improve the reliability of the VHF navigation receiver, or
2015
optional MOD 5 marking to indicate the unit is unaffected.

Rev. N Page xii
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
Physical, mechanical and electrical information for use in the planning and design of an installation of the
GTN units into an aircraft is provided in this manual. It is not a substitute for an approved airframe-specific
maintenance manual, installation design drawing, or complete installation data package. Attempting to
install equipment by reference to this manual alone and without first planning or designing an installation
specific to your aircraft is not recommended. The content of this manual assumes use by competent and
qualified avionics engineering personnel and/or avionics installation specialists using standard aviation
maintenance practices in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations and other relevant
accepted practices. See section 2 for additional information and other considerations.
NOTE
Except where specifically noted, references made to GTN will equally apply to the 
GTN 725 and GTN 750. All screen shots used in this document are current at the time of
publication. Screen shots are intended to provide visual reference only. All information
depicted in screen shots, including software file names, versions, and part numbers, is
subject to change and may not be up to date.

Rev. N Page 1-1
1.2 Equipment Description
Table 1-1 GTN Units
Model P/N Color Notes
GTN 725 011-02281-00 BLACK
011-02282-00 BLACK
GTN 750 011-02282-50 GRAY
011-02282-A0 BLACK NVIS-B compatible
The GTN 7XX Series units are a family of 6.25" wide, 6.00" tall panel-mounted navigators, which use a
color display and touchscreen to provide an intuitive user interface.
The GTN 725 is a GPS/SBAS unit which may be approved for IFR en route, terminal, non-precision, and
precision approach operations. The GTN 725 meets the requirements of the TSOs specified in table 1-13.
A summary of system functions is located in table 1-17 and operating instructions are found in 
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide.
The GTN 750 includes all the features of the GTN 725 and includes an airborne VHF communications
transceiver and airborne VOR/LOC and glideslope receivers. The GTN 750 meets the requirements of the
TSOs specified in table 1-13. A summary of system functions is located in table 1-17 and operating
instructions are found in GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide.
CAUTION
The GTN has a display that is coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to waxes and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL
HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the display
using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-
reflective coatings.
CAUTION
The use of ground-based cellular telephones while aircraft are airborne is prohibited by
FCC rules. Due to potential interference with onboard systems, the use of ground-based
cell phones while the aircraft is on the ground is subject to FAA regulation 14 CFR §91.21.
FCC regulation 47 CFR §22.925 prohibits airborne operation of ground-based cellular
telephones installed in or carried aboard aircraft. Ground-based cellular telephones must
not be operated while aircraft are off the ground. When any aircraft leaves the ground, all
ground-based cellular telephones on board that aircraft must be turned off. Ground-based
cell phones that are on, even in a monitoring state, can disrupt GPS/SBAS performance.

Rev. N Page 1-2
1.3 General Specifications
Table 1-2 Physical Specifications
Characteristics Specifications
Bezel height 6.00" (152 mm)
Bezel width 6.25" (159 mm)
Rack height (dimple-to-dimple) 6.025" (153 mm)
Rack width 6.300" (160 mm)
Depth behind panel with connectors (measured from face of aircraft
11.25" (286 mm)
panel to rear of connector backshells)
GTN 725 weight (unit only) 6.1 lbs (2.80 kg)
GTN 725 weight (Installed with 115-01294-00 rack and connectors) 7.7 lbs (3.52 kg)
GTN 725 weight (Installed with 115-01294-A0 rack and connectors) 8.6 lbs (3.91 kg)
GTN 750 weight (unit only) 7.4 lbs (3.38 kg)
GTN 750 weight (installed with 115-01294-00 rack and connectors) 9.3 lbs (4.24 kg)
GTN 750 weight (installed with 115-01294-A0 rack and connectors) 10.2 lbs (4.63 kg)
-20 C to +55 C. For more details,
refer to the environmental
qualification form at the
Operating temperature range
Dealer Resource Center at
Garmin’s website. See appendix A
for part numbers.
Humidity 95% non-condensing
Altitude range -1,500 ft to 55,000 ft
Input voltage range - all units (main connector) 11 to 33 VDC
Input voltage range (COM connector on GTN 750) 11 to 33 VDC
Input voltage range (NAV connector on GTN 750) 11 to 33 VDC
GTN current draw See table 1-10
320 mA maximum per superflag
Superflag Power requirements
output
Refer to the environmental
qualification form at the Dealer
Environmental testing Resource Center at Garmin’s
website. See appendix A for part
numbers.
Table 1-3 Display Specifications
The display on the GTN is a sunlight readable LCD display.
Display size 6.9" diagonal
Active area 4.46" (W) x 5.27" (H)
Resolution 600 x 708 pixels
Left: 45
Right: 35°
Viewing angle (direction of pilot’s viewing angle)
From top: 30
From bottom: 10

Rev. N Page 1-3
1.4 GPS/SBAS Specifications
Table 1-4 GPS/SBAS Specifications
Number Of channels 15 (12 GPS and 3 GPS/WAAS/SBAS)
Frequency 1575.42 MHz L1, C/A code
-134.5 dBm GPS
Sensitivity (acquisition, no interference)
-135.5 dBm WAAS
Sensitivity (drop lock) -144 dBm
Dynamic range > 20 dB
LAT/LON position accuracy <1.25 meter RMS horizontal, <2 meter vertical, with WAAS
Velocity 1000 knots maximum (above 60,000 ft)
TTFF (Time To First Fix) 1:45 min. typical with current almanac, position, and time
Reacquisition 10 seconds typical
Position update interval 0.2 sec (5 Hz)
1 PPS (Pulse Per Second) 275 Nsec of UTC second
Datum WGS-84
SATCOM compatibility SATCOM compatibility is dependent upon antenna selection.
Antenna power supply 35 mA typical, 40 mA max at 4.7 VDC
1.5 COM Specifications (GTN 750 Only)

Table 1-5 COM Transmitter Specifications
Classes 3, 4, 5, 6
Two inputs, standard carbon or dynamic mic with integrated
Microphone input
preamp providing minimum 70 mVRMS into 1000 Ω load
Modulation capability 85% with 100 to 1000 mVRMS microphone input at 1000 Hz
AM double-sided
Modulation Emission Designator: 6K00A3E (118 – 136.975 MHz)
5K60A3E (118 – 136.992 MHz)
118.000 to 136.975 MHz, 25 kHz channel spacing 
Frequency range
118.000 to 136.992 MHz, 8.33 kHz channel spacing
Frequency tolerance +/-2ppm from -40 °C to +70 °C
10 Watt Mode: 10 watts minimum
Output power
16 Watt Mode: 16 watts minimum [1]
10 W: 100%
Duty cycle 16 W: Recommended 25% (5 seconds on/15 seconds off, 
15 seconds on/45 seconds off, etc.)
Carrier noise level At least 35 dB (SNR)
Stuck mic time-out 30 seconds time-out, reverts to receive
Less than 5% distortion when the transmitter is at 85%
Demodulated audio distortion
modulation at 350 to 2500 Hz
Sidetone 1.4 Vrms into a 500 Ω load
[1] COM software v2.11 (P/N 006-B1061-05) or later is required for 16 watt COM installations in
14 volt aircraft.

Rev. N Page 1-4
Table 1-6 COM Receiver Specifications
Classes C, E, H1, and H2
118.000 to 136.975 MHz, 25 kHz channel spacing
Frequency range
118.000 to 136.992 MHz, 8.33 kHz channel spacing
Headset audio output Up to 100 mW into a 500 Ω load
Audio response Less than 6 dB of variation between 350 Hz and 2500 Hz.
Audio distortion Less than 5% at rated output power
Less than 3 dB of variation in the audio output from 
AGC characteristics
-93 to -13 dBm (power absorbed by a 50  load)
SINAD on all channels is greater than 6 dB when the RF level
Sensitivity is 2 uV (hard) or -107 dBm (power absorbed by a 50  load)
modulated 30% at 1000 Hz at rated audio output power
Squelch Automatic squelch with manual override
6 dB BW is greater than + 7 kHz for 25 kHz channeling.
60 dB BW is less than ±22 kHz for 25 kHz channeling.
Selectivity
6 dB BW is greater than ±3.5 kHz for 8.33 kHz channeling.
60 dB BW is less than ±7.37 kHz for 8.33 kHz channeling.
Maximum audio output reduction 
11.2 dB
(Off-set carrier operation)
1.6 VOR Specifications (GTN 750 Only)

Table 1-7 VOR Specifications
Receiver audio sensitivity At -103.5 dBm (S+N)/N is not less than 6 dB.
Course deviation sensitivity -103.5 dBm or less for 60% of standard deflection.
The VOR course deviation flag indicates in the event of any of
the following conditions.
 Level of a standard VOR deviation signal produces less
Flag than a 50% of standard deflection
 RF signals are absent
 The 9960 Hz modulation is absent
 Either one of the two 30 Hz modulations are absent
From -99 dBm to -13 dBm input of a Standard VOR Audio Test
AGC characteristics
Signal, audio output level does not vary more than 3 dB.
Spurious response Greater than 60 dB
The bearing information as presented to the pilot does not
VOR OBS bearing accuracy have an error in excess of 2.7° as specified by RTCA DO-196
and EuroCAE ED-22B.
Audio output Up to 100 mW into a 500  load
Less than 6 dB of variation between 350 and 2500 Hz. In voice
Audio response mode, an IDENT tone of 1020 Hz Ident Tone is attenuated at
least 20 dB down.
The distortion in the receiver audio output does not exceed
Audio distortion
10% at all levels up to 100 mW.

Rev. N Page 1-5
1.7 LOC Specifications (GTN 750 Only)
Table 1-8 LOC Specifications
Receiver audio sensitivity At -103.5 dBm (S+N)/N is not less than 6 dB.
At -103.5 dBm, deviation output is not to be less than 60% of
Course deviation sensitivity standard deflection when a LOC deviation test signal is
applied.
The LOC course deviation flag indicates in the event of any
of the following conditions.
 Level of a standard LOC deviation test signal
produces 50% or less of standard deflection of the
Flag deviation indicator
 150 Hz modulation is absent
 90 Hz and 150 Hz modulation are both absent
From –99 dBm and –13 dBm input of a Standard VOR
AGC characteristics Audio Test Signal, audio output level does not vary more
than 3 dB.
6 dB BW is greater than 9 kHz
Selectivity
69 dB BW is less than 36 kHz
With a standard deflection FLY LEFT condition (90 Hz
dominant), the output is +90 mV ± 9 mV.
Standard deflection
With a standard deflection FLY RIGHT condition (150 Hz
dominant), the output is -90 mV ± 9 mV.
Spurious response Greater than 60 dB.
Centering accuracy 0 ±0.01023 ddm or 0 ±9.9 mV.
Audio output Up to 100 mW into a 500  load.
Less than 6 dB of variation between 350 and 2500 Hz. In
Audio response voice mode, an IDENT tone of 1020 Hz IDENT Tone is
attenuated at least 20 dB down.
The distortion in the receiver audio output does not exceed
Audio distortion
10% at all levels up to 100 mW.

Rev. N Page 1-6
1.8 Glideslope Specifications (GTN 750 Only)
Table 1-9 Glideslope Specifications
Sensitivity -87 dBm or less for 60% of standard deflection.
Centering accuracy 0 ±0.01183 ddm or 0 ±10.14 mV
The course deviation is 0 ddm  .0091 ddm when using the Glideslope
Centering Test Signal as the RF frequency is varied 17 kHz from the
Selectivity assigned channel.
At frequencies displaced by 132 kHz or greater, the input signal is at
least 60 dB down.
With a standard deflection FLY DOWN condition (90 Hz dominant), the
output is -78 mV ±7.8 mV.
Standard deflection
With a standard deflection FLY UP condition (150 Hz dominant), the
output is +78 mV ±7.8 mV.
The vertical deviation flag indicates in any of the following conditions.
 Level of a standard VOR deviation test signal produces 50% or
less of standard deflection of the deviation indicator
Flag  150 Hz modulation is absent
 90 Hz and 150 Hz modulations are both absent.
1.9 Current Draw Specifications
Table 1-10 GTN Current Draw Specifications
14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw
LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GTN 725
Main connector 2.4 A [1] 3.4 A [2] 1.2 A [1] 1.8 A [2]
GTN 750
Main connector 2.4 A [1] 3.4 A [2] 1.2 A [1] 1.8 A [2]
5.66 A (16W COM) [3] 2.33 A (16W COM)
COM connector 0.45 A 0.21 A
4.02 A (10W COM) 1.76 A (10W COM)
NAV connector 0.60 A 1.16A [2] 0.30 A 0.58 A [2]
[1] The specified current draw represents a typical installation with analog 
CDI/VDI, two Ethernet connections, the display set to 100%, and the fan operating at low
speed.
[2] The specified current draw does not include the superflags. If connected, their current draw
must be added to the specified current. The superflags will supply up to 320 mA each
regardless of the input voltage.
14 volt aircraft.

Rev. N Page 1-7
1.10 GPS/WAAS Antenna Requirements
Antenna performance is critical to the GPS/SBAS operation. The antennas listed in table 1-11 meet
Garmin’s specification as documented in Antenna Minimum Performance Specification for Garmin’s 
GPS/WAAS Receiver System. The GTN must be installed with one of these antennas to achieve acceptable
performance.
Table 1-11 Approved GPS/WAAS Antennas
Garmin Order
Model/Description Conn Type Mfr Part Number
Number
GA 35, GPS/WAAS  Garmin 013-00235-( )
TNC 013-00235-( )
[1] Aero Antenna AT575-93G( )-TNCF-000-RG-27-NM
Garmin 013-00244-( )
GA 36, GPS/WAAS TNC 013-00244-( )
Aero Antenna AT575-126G( )-TNCF-000-RG-27-NM
Garmin 013-00245-( )
GA 37, GPS/WAAS/XM TNC 013-00245-( )
Aero Antenna AT2300-126G( )-TNCF-000-RG-27-NM
Garmin 013-00261-( )
A33W, WAAS antenna TNC 013-00261-( )
Aero Antenna AT575-332G( )- TNCF-000-RG-27-NM
TNC/BNC 
GPS/VHF antenna Comant CI-2580-200 N/A
[2]
TNC/BNC 
GPS/VHF antenna Comant CI-2728-200 N/A
[2]
TNC/TNC/BNC
GPS/XM/VHF antenna Comant CI-2580-410 N/A
[3]
TNC/TNC/BNC
GPS/XM/VHF antenna Comant CI-2728-410 N/A
[3]
GPS/WAAS antenna TNC Comant CI-428-200 N/A
GPS/XM antenna TNC/TNC Comant CI-428-410 N/A
[1] Same mounting hole pattern as GA 56, but GA 35 antenna has a physically larger footprint.
[2] The antenna connector is a TNC type. The VHF connector is a BNC type.
[3] The antenna connector is a TNC type. The XM connector is a TNC type. The VHF connector
is a BNC type.

Rev. N Page 1-8
1.11 License Requirements (GTN 750 Only)
The Telecommunications Act of 1996, effective February 8, 1996, provides the FCC discretion to
eliminate radio station license requirements for aircraft and ships. GTN 750 installations must comply with
current transmitter licensing requirements. In the US, to find out the specific details on whether a particular
installation is exempt from licensing, please visit the FCC website http://wireless.fcc.gov/aviation. If an
aircraft license is required, make application for a license on FCC form 404, Application for Aircraft Radio
Station License. The FCC also has a fax-on-demand service to provide forms by fax. Outside the US,
contact the responsible telecommunication authority. The GTN 750 owner accepts all responsibility for
obtaining the proper licensing before using the transceiver. The maximum transmitting power, modulation
identification, and frequency band information may be required for licensing and are detailed in table 1-5.
CAUTION
The VHF transmitter in this equipment is guaranteed to meet Federal Communications
Commission acceptance over the operating temperature range. Modifications not
expressly approved by Garmin could invalidate the license and make it unlawful to
operate the equipment.

Rev. N Page 1-9
1.12 Certification
1.12.1 TSO/ETSO Authorization and Advisory Circular References
The conditions and tests required for TSO approval of this article are minimum performance standards. It
is the responsibility of those installing this article either on or within a specific type or class of aircraft to
determine that the aircraft installation conditions are within the TSO standards. TSO articles must have
separate approval for installation in an aircraft. The article may be installed only in compliance with 
14 CFR part 43 or the applicable airworthiness requirements.
All GTN unit functions are design approved under the TSO. Unauthorized changes or modifications to any
GTN unit product may void the compliance to required regulations and authorization for continued
equipment usage.
GTN units provide a GPS position output for use with ADS-B output equipment. It is the installer’s
responsibility to ensure the ADS-B Out system is compliant with AC 20-165A and to ensure compatibility
between the GTN unit and the ADS-B Out equipment. Refer to 14 CFR 91.227 ADS-B Out Compatible
Equipment for compatible equipment shown to be eligible for 
14 CFR 91.227-compliant installations in accordance with AC 20-165A.
FIS-B information is to be used for pilot planning decisions and pilot near-term decisions focused on
avoiding areas of inclement weather that are beyond visual range or where poor visibility precludes visual
acquisition of inclement weather.
FIS-B weather and NAS status information may be used as follows.
 To promote pilot awareness of own ship location with respect to reported weather, including
hazardous meteorological conditions, NAS status indicators, and enhance pilot planning decisions
and pilot near-term decision-making
 To cue the pilot to communicate with the Air Traffic Control controller, Flight Service Station
specialist, operator dispatch, or airline operations control center for general and mission critical
meteorological information, NAS status conditions, or both
FIS-B information, including, weather information, NOTAMs, and TFR areas, are intended for the sole
purpose of assisting in long- and near-term planning decision making. The system lacks sufficient
resolution and updating capability necessary for aerial maneuvering associated with immediate decisions.
For European installations, ADS-B traffic targets can be displayed both in the air and on the ground in
accordance with TSO-C195a when the GTN 725/750 is interfaced to the GDL 88. Installer must determine
suitability of this function at the installation since ETSO-C195a certification is not achieved. SiriusXM
weather products may be displayed when interfaced to GDL69 in accordance with TSO-C157a. Installer
must determine suitability of this function at the installation since ETSO-C157a certification is not
achieved.

Rev. N Page 1-10
Table 1-12 Hardware Part Numbers
Garmin P/N Garmin P/N
Market Name
(Unit Level) (Shipping Level)
010-00819-0( ) black
GTN 725 011-02281-0( ) black
010-00819-5( ) black standard
010-00820-0( ) black
011-02282-0( ) black 010-00820-5( ) black standard
010-00820-A( ) black helicopter standard
GTN 750 010-01060-0( ) black
011-02282-A( ) black [1]
010-01060-A( ) black helicopter standard
010-00890-0( ) gray
011-02282-5( ) gray
010-00890-5( ) gray standard
[1] Unit is NVIS-B compatible.
See table 1-13 for regulatory compliance by various GTN 7XX configurations of hardware, CLD and
software. See table 1-14 for descriptions of the TSOs and ETSOs referenced.
Table 1-13 GTN 7XX Hardware, CLD, and Software Compliance
Main
Market
SW TSO and ETSO Class/Type Software and CLD P/N Description
Name
Version
TSO-C74d, ETSO-C74d A Software:
TSO-C110a, ETSO-C110a 006-B1026-01 through -0( ) Main
TSO-C112c, ETSO-2C112b 006-B1027-02 through -0( ) Main Bootblock
TSO-C113, ETSO-C113 I, II, III 006-B1028-0( ) Touch Controller
TSO-C118, ETSO-C118 006-B1029-01 through -0( ) Touch Cntr Bootblock
with v2.xx
TSO-C139, ETSO-C139 006-B0339-1( ) WAAS
TSO-C146c, ETSO-C146 3 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
TSO-C147, ETSO-C147 A CLD:
TSO-C151b, ETSO-C151b B 006-C0134-22 thru -2( ) Main
TSO-C165, ETSO-C165 590-00039-01 thru -0( ) WAAS
TSO-C35d, ETSO-2C35d A Software:
TSO-C63d, ETSO-2C63c B, C 006-B1026-1( ) Main
GTN 725
TSO-C74d, ETSO-C74d A 006-B1027-02 through -0( ) Main Bootblock
TSO-C110a, ETSO-C110a 006-B1028-0( ) Touch Controller
TSO-C112c, ETSO-C112c 006-B1029-01 through -0( ) Touch Cntr Bootblock
TSO-C113, ETSO-C113 I, II, III 006-B0339-2( ) WAAS
TSO-C118, ETSO-C118 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
with v3.xx
TSO-C139, ETSO-C139 CLD:
TSO-C146c, ETSO-C146c 3 006-C0134-22 through -2( ) Main
TSO-C147, ETSO-C147 A 590-00039-01 through -0( ) WAAS
TSO-C151b, ETSO-C151b B
TSO-C157a 1, 2
TSO-C165, ETSO-C165
TSO-C195a B1, B3, B5

Rev. N Page 1-11
Main
Market
Name
Version
TSO-C35d, ETSO-2C35d A
Software:
TSO-C63d, ETSO-2C63c B, C Main
006-B1026-2( )
TSO-C74d, ETSO-C74d A Main Bootblock
006-B1027-02 through -0( )
TSO-C110a, ETSO-C110a Touch Controller
006-B1028-0( )
TSO-C112c, ETSO-C112c Touch Cntr Bootblock
006-B1029-01 through -0( )
TSO-C113, ETSO-C113 I, II, III WAAS
006-B0339-2( )
TSO-C118, ETSO-C118 WAAS Bootblock
006-B0336-0( )
with v4.xx TSO-C139, ETSO-C139
CLD:
TSO-C146c, ETSO-C146c 3 Main
006-C0134-22 through -2( )
TSO-C147, ETSO-C147 A WAAS
590-00039-01 through -0( )
TSO-C151b, ETSO-C151b B
TSO-C157a 1, 2
TSO-C165, ETSO-C165
TSO-C194, ETSO-C194
TSO-C35d, ETSO-2C35d A Software:
TSO-C63d, ETSO-2C63c B, C 006-B1026-3( ) Main
TSO-C74d, ETSO-C74d A 006-B1027-02 through -0( ) Main Bootblock
TSO-C110a, ETSO-C110a 006-B1028-0( ) Touch Controller
TSO-C112c, ETSO-C112c 006-B1029-01 through -0( ) Touch Cntr Bootblock
TSO-C113, ETSO-C113 I, II, III 006-B0339-2( ) WAAS
TSO-C118, ETSO-C118 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
GTN 725 with v5.xx TSO-C139, ETSO-C139 CLD:
TSO-C147, ETSO-C147 A 590-00039-01 through -0( ) WAAS
TSO-C151c, ETSO-C151b A, B
TSO-C157a 1, 2
TSO-C165, ETSO-C165
TSO-C194, ETSO-C194
TSO-C35d A Software:
TSO-C63d B, C 006-B1026-4( ) Main
TSO-C74d A 006-B1027-02 through -0( ) Main Bootblock
TSO-C110a 006-B1028-0( ) Touch Controller
TSO-C112c 006-B1029-01 through -0( ) Touch Cntr Bootblock
TSO-C113 I, II, III 006-B0339-2( ) WAAS
TSO-C118 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
with v6.xx TSO-C139 CLD:
TSO-C146c 3 006-C0134-22 through -2( ) Main
TSO-C147 A 590-00039-01 through -0( ) WAAS
TSO-C151c A, B
TSO-C157a 1, 2
TSO-C165
TSO-C194

Rev. N Page 1-12
Main
Market
Name
Version
TSO-C34e, ETSO-2C34f Software:
TSO-C36e, ETSO-2C36f A 006-B1026-01 through -0( ) Main
ETSO-2C37e 3, 4, 5, 6 006-B1027-02 through -0( ) Main Bootblock
ETSO-2C38e C, E 006-B1028-0( ) Touch Controller
TSO-C40c, ETSO-2C40c 006-B1029-01 through -0( ) Touch Cntr Bootblock
TSO-C74d, ETSO-C74d A 006-B1061-02 through -0( ) COM
TSO-C110a, ETSO-C110a 006-B1066-02 through -0( ) COM Bootblock
TSO-C112c, ETSO-2C112b 006-B0082-11 through -1( ) NAV
with v2.xx TSO-C113, ETSO-C113 I, II, III 006-B0082-BC through -B( ) NAV Bootblock
TSO-C118, ETSO-C118 006-B0339-1( ) WAAS
TSO-C128a 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
TSO-C146c, ETSO-C146 3 006-C0134-22 through -2( ) Main
TSO-C147, ETSO-C147 A 006-C0135-22 through -2( ) COM
TSO-C151b, ETSO-C151b B 006-C0124-00 through -0( ) NAV
TSO-C165, ETSO-C165 590-00039-01 through -0( ) WAAS
TSO-C169a C, E, 3, 4, 5, 6
GTN 750
TSO-C35d, ETSO-2C35d A 006-B1026-1( ) Main
TSO-C36e, ETSO-2C36f A 006-B1027-02 through -0( ) Main Bootblock
TSO-C40c, ETSO-2C40c 006-B1028-0( ) Touch Controller
TSO-C63d, ETSO-2C63c B, C 006-B1029-01 through -0( ) Touch Cntr Bootblock
TSO-C112c, ETSO-C112c 006-B0082-11 through -1( ) NAV
TSO-C113, ETSO-C113 I, II, III 006-B0082-BC through -B( ) NAV Bootblock
with v3.xx TSO-C118, ETSO-C118 006-B0339-2( ) WAAS
TSO-C128a, ETSO-2C128 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
TSO-C157a 1, 2 590-00039-01 through -0( ) WAAS
TSO-C165, ETSO-C165
TSO-C169a C, E, 3, 4, 5, 6

Rev. N Page 1-13
Main
Market
Name
Version
TSO-C118, ETSO-C118 006-B0339-2( ) WAAS
with v4.xx TSO-C128a, ETSO-2C128 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
TSO-C139. ETSO-C139 CLD:
TSO-C165, ETSO-C165
C, E, H1, H2,
TSO-C169a, ETSO-2C169a
3, 4, 5, 6
TSO-C194, ETSO-C194
GTN 750
TSO-C118, ETSO-C118 006-B0339-2( ) WAAS
with v5.xx TSO-C128a, ETSO-2C128 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
TSO-C139. ETSO-C139 CLD:
TSO-C151c, ETSO-C151b A, B 006-C0124-01 through -0( ) NAV
TSO-C165, ETSO-C165
C, E, H1, H2,
TSO-C169a, ETSO-2C169a
3, 4, 5, 6
TSO-C194, ETSO-C194

Rev. N Page 1-14
Main
Market
Name
Version
TSO-C34e Software:
TSO-C35d A 006-B1026-4( ) Main
TSO-C36e A 006-B1027-02 through -0( ) Main Bootblock
TSO-C40c 006-B1028-0( ) Touch Controller
TSO-C63d B, C 006-B1029-01 through -0( ) Touch Cntr Bootblock
TSO-C74d A 006-B1061-02 through -0( ) COM
TSO-C110a 006-B1066-02 through -0( ) COM Bootblock
TSO-C112c 006-B0082-11 through -1( ) NAV
TSO-C113 I, II, III 006-B0082-BC through -B( ) NAV Bootblock
TSO-C118 006-B0339-2( ) WAAS
GTN 750
with v6.xx TSO-C128a 006-B0336-0( ) WAAS Bootblock
TSO-C139 CLD:
TSO-C146c 3 006-C0134-22 through -2( ) Main
TSO-C147 A 006-C0135-22 through -2( ) COM
TSO-C151c A, B 006-C0124-01 through -0( ) NAV
TSO-C165
TSO-C169a C, E, 3, 4, 5, 6
TSO-C194

Rev. N Page 1-15
Table 1-14 TSO and ETSO Description
TSO/ETSO Description
TSO-C34e
ILS Glideslope Receiving Equipment
ETSO-2C34f
TSO-C35d
Airborne Radio Marker Receiving Equipment
ETSO-2C35d
TSO-C36e
Airborne ILS Localizer Receiving Equipment
ETSO-2C36f
VHF Radio Communication Transmitting Equipment Operating within the Radio
ETSO-2C37e
Frequency Range 117.975 - 137 MHz
VHF Radio Communication Receiving Equipment Operating within the Radio
ETSO-2C38e
Frequency Range 117.975 - 137 MHz
TSO-C40c
VOR Receiving Equipment
ETSO-2C40c
TSO-C63d
Airborne Weather Radar Equipment
ETSO-2C63c
TSO-C74d
Airborne ATC Transponder Equipment
ETSO-C74d
TSO-C110a
Airborne Passive Thunderstorm Detection Systems
ETSO-C110a
TSO-C112c Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System/Mode Select (ATCRBS/MODE)
ETSO-C112c Airborne Equipment
TSO-C113
Multipurpose Electronic Displays
ETSO-C113
TSO-C118
Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) Airborne Equipment, TCAS 1
ETSO-C118
TSO-C128a Equipment the Prevents Blocked Channels in 2 way Radio Communications
ETSO-2C128 due to Unintentional Transmissions
TSO-C139
Aircraft Audio Systems and Equipment
ETSO-C139
TSO-C146c Stand-alone Airborne Navigation Equipment Using the Global Positioning
ETSO-C146c System (GPS) Augmented by the Satellite Based Augmentation System
TSO-C147
Traffic Advisory System (TAS) Airborne Equipment
ETSO-C147
TSO-C151c
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)
ETSO-C151b
Aircraft Flight Information Services Broadcast (FIS-B) Data Link Systems and
TSO-C157a
Equipment
TSO-C165
Electronic Map Display Equipment for Graphical Depiction of Aircraft Position
ETSO-C165
TSO-C169a VHF Radio Communications Transceiver Equipment Operating within the
ETSO-2C169a Radio Frequency Range 117.975 - 137 MHz
TSO-C194
Helicopter Terrain and Awareness Warning Systems (HTAWS)
ETSO-C194
Avionics Supporting Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B)
TSO-C195a
Aircraft Surveillance Application (ASA)

Rev. N Page 1-16
1.12.2 Non-TSO Functions
Table 1-15 Non-TSO Functions
Function Applicable SW P/N Applicable CLD P/Ns
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Audio
Entertainment
The GTN 725/750 displays channel 006-B1026-01 through -4( ) 006-C0134-22 through -2( )
information and control audio output from
Garmin GDL 69 Series.
Traffic Display/Control (TIS)
The GTN 725/750 requests and displays
006-B1026-01 through -4( ) 006-C0134-22 through -2( )
traffic data from GTX Mode S
Transponder.
SiriusXM Weather
The GTN 725/750 displays weather data 006-B1026-01 006-C0134-22
from Garmin GDL 69 Series
1.12.3 TSO System Functions and Software Levels

Table 1-16 CLD DO-254 Levels
Description CLD P/N DO-254 Level
Main 006-C0134-22 through -2( ) B
COM 006-C0135-22 through -2( ) B
NAV 006-C0124-01 through -0( ) B
WAAS 590-00039-01 through -0( ) B [1]
[1] Developed to DO-178B Level B.

Rev. N Page 1-17
Table 1-17 System Functions
DO-178B
System Function
Level
Operating System B
Touchscreen Display and Control B
GPS/SBAS Navigation Information and CDI/VDI Output B
VHF DME Navigation Information and VHF CDI/VDI Output B
VHF Communication B
Display of VOR/LOC/Glideslope information B
Display of terrain and moving map B
Display of flight plan information B
HSDB Data Forwarding B
Checklists B
Roll Steering Command Output C
TAWS (Class A/B) Functionality C
HTAWS C
Display of ChartView and FliteCharts C
Control and display of ADS-B traffic data C
Display of marker beacon, data from passive lightning detection equipment, SiriusXM/data
C
link weather and SiriusXM audio entertainment data.
Display of Radar Information C
Remote Audio Panel Control, Transponder Communication C
Crossfill C
Search and Rescue Patterns C
Scheduled Message D
Display of traffic (TIS/TAS/TCAS I) data D

Rev. N Page 1-18
1.12.4 TSO/ETSO Deviations
Table 1-18 TSO/ETSO Deviations
TSO/ETSO Deviation
TSO-C34e 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to mark product name, part number, serial number
and statement on the unit’s nameplate label, “TSO-C146c Class 3, See IM for Add’l Appliance
Approvals,” instead of Product Type, TSO Numbers, Equipment Class, “Dev” (deviation),
Environmental Categories, Date of Manufacture, Weight and Software Part Number.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA/DO-160F instead of earlier versions
of RTCA/DO-160 as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures of Airborne
Equipment.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA/DO-178B instead of earlier versions
of RTCA/DO-178 to demonstrate compliance for the verification and validation of the computer
software.
TSO-C35d 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, RTCA/DO-143 section 2.15 to allow the visual
indication of the Standard Test Signal to not flash synchronized with the keying, but to flash at the
following fixed rates while keyed: Outer 1.33 Hz, Middle 3 Hz, Inner 4 Hz.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160F instead of RTCA DO-138
as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment.
ETSO-2C35d 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO, EUROCAE 1/WG7 section 3.16 to allow the
visual indication of the Standard Test Signal to flash at the following fixed rates while keyed: Outer
1.33 Hz, Middle 3 Hz, Inner 4 Hz.
TSO-C36e 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to mark product name, part number, serial number
Equipment.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from TSO to use RTCA/DO-178B instead of earlier versions of
RTCA/DO-178 to demonstrate compliance for the verification and validation of the computer
software.
TSO-C40c 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to mark product name, part number, serial number
Equipment.
software.
ETSO-2C40c 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to have a deflection response of 0.5 to 2.7
seconds.
TSO-C74d 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to mark product name, part number, serial number
ETSO-C74d 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to use RTCA/DO-144A instead of Appendix 1 of
ETSO-C74d.

Rev. N Page 1-19
TSO/ETSO Deviation
TSO-C110a 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to mark product name, part number, serial number
Equipment.
software.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO not to mark the computer software level(s) on the
unit.
TSO-C112c 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to mark product name, part number, serial number
TSO-C113 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to mark product name, part number, serial number
Equipment.
software.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO not to mark the computer software level(s) on the
unit.
TSO-C118 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO not to mark the computer software level(s) on the
unit.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA/DO-197A instead of RTCA/DO-197
as the Minimum Operational Performance Standards.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to mark product name, part number, serial number
and a statement on the unit’s nameplate label “TSO-C146c Class 3, See IM for Add’l Appliance
Environmental Categories, Date of Manufacture, weight and Software Part Number.
Equipment.
software.
ETSO-C118 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO to use RTCA-DO-197A instead of RTCA/DO-197
as the Minimum Operational Performance Standards.
Approvals,” instead of Product Type, TSO Numbers, Equipment Class, “Dev” (deviation,
Equipment.
software.

Rev. N Page 1-20
TSO/ETSO Deviation
TSO-C139 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO not to furnish each person receiving a GTN 725/750
copies of the data in Paragraph 5.l of the TSO.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO not to furnish each person receiving a GTN 725/
750 copies of the data in Paragraph 5.l, 5.m, 5.n of the TSO, if the equipment performs functions
beyond those in paragraph 3 and paragraph 3.a.
Equipment.
TSO-C146c 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-229D to use a 10 degree vertical viewing angle
below the lower display edge.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-229D to use GPS antennas that meet Garmin
minimum performance specifications.
Equipment.
5. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-229D, section 2.2.4.4.2.2 and 2.2.4.4.2.3 that
defines lateral CDI full-scale deflection (FSD) requirements for LPV and LNAV/VNAV approaches.
This deviation is applicable to GTN Main Software v5.00 or earlier.
ETSO-C146c 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-229D section 2.1.1.10 to use GPS antennas that
meet Garmin minimum performance specifications.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-229D section 2.2.1.1.4.3, which states “They [all
displays] shall be fully readable up to a vertical viewing angle of 20 degrees from normal to the face
of the display screen” to use a 10 degree vertical viewing angle below the lower display edge.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA/DO-229D, section 2.2.4.4.2.2 and 2.2.4.4.2.3 that
defines lateral CDI full-scale deflection (FSD) requirements for LPV and LNAV/VNAV
approaches.This deviation is applicable to GTN Main Software v5.00 or earlier.
TSO-C147 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO not to furnish each person receiving a unit copies of
the data in paragraphs 3(a)(10) through (12) of the TSO.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO/TSO Appendix 1 paragraph 3.1.1 to show only
the warning with the higher priority in case of multiple warnings are applicable simultaneously. The
traffic annunciation shares a space on the display with TAWS annunciations.
Equipment.
ETSO-C147 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO/TSO Appendix 1 paragraph 3.1.1 to show only the
warning with the higher priority in case of multiple warnings are applicable simultaneously. The traffic
annunciation shares a space on the display with TAWS annunciations.

Rev. N Page 1-21
TSO/ETSO Deviation
TSO-C151c 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to modify requirements in the TSO, Appendix 1,
section 1.3.e that requires Class A TAWS equipment to provide indications of imminent contact with
ground for Mode 1 (excessive rates of descent) as further defined in RTCA/DO-161A, section 2.1.1.
Approvals,” instead of TSO Number.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to modify requirements in the TSO, Appendix 1,
section 1.3.e that requires Class A TAWS equipment to provide indications of imminent contact with
ground for Mode 2 (excessive closure rate to terrain) as further defined in RTCA/DO-161A, section
2.1.2.
ETSO-C151b 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from the ETSO, section 4.2.a to not mark the date of manufacture
on the unit.
TSO-C157a 1. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA DO-267A sections 2.2.7, 3.8.1b, and 3.8.1.2 to not
include an indication of the product age for individual reports of SiriusXM AIRMETs, SiriusXM
SIGMETs, SiriusXM City Forecasts, SiriusXM County Warnings, SiriusXM Cell Movement, and
SiriusXM TFRs.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA DO-267A sections 2.2.7, 3.8.1b, and 3.8.1.2 to not
include an indication of the product age on the weather map for SiriusXM Icing Potential, SiriusXM
Winds Aloft and SiriusXM Turbulence.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from RTCA DO-267A sections 2.2.8 and 3.8.1.2.1b to not display
the valid time for SiriusXM Freezing Level, and SiriusXM Canada Winds Aloft.
4. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use RTCA DO-160F instead of RTCA DO-160D
as the standard for Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne.
TSO-C165 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO section 5.c(2) not to furnish each person receiving a
unit copies of the data in paragraphs 5.a(11) through (13) of the TSO.
Equipment.
Equipment.
ETSO-2C169a 1.Garmin was granted a deviation from EUROCAE ED-23C paragraph 3.1.3.2 to have up to 11.2 db
reduction in audio output instead of 10 db.
TSO-C195a 1. Garmin was granted deviations from RTCA/DO-317A section 2.3.1.1.b to display all traffic except
traffic that is “grouped” and has lower priority.
2. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO to use DO-160F as the standard for Environmental
Conditions and Test Procedures of Airborne Equipment instead of DO-160G.
3. Garmin was granted a deviation from the TSO, paragraph 3.a.(4) that requires databases used to
support moving maps integrated with the SURF application must meet at least 5 meter accuracy and
1 meter resolution.

Rev. N Page 1-22
1.12.5 FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Table 1-19 FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Model FCC ID IC ID
GTN 750 IPH-01594 1312A-01594
1.12.6 AFM/AFMS/POH Considerations
The following information may be used as guidance in developing an approved AFM, AFMS, and/or POH
when not installed in accordance with an STC provided the installation is:
 Comprised of one or more TSO-C146c Class 3 approved Garmin GTN 725/750 Display Unit(s),
with GPS software v4.0 or later approved version, and one or more Garmin approved 
GPS/SBAS antenna(s)listed in table 1-11
 In accordance with the guidance in AC 20-138C and the installation instructions in this manual
For installations or operation that requires dual GNSS installations, the installation needs to include one or
more GTN 725/750 units along with another Garmin TSO-C146a or TSO-C146c Class 3 approved GPS
units (such as the GNS 400W/500W series unit with GPS software v3.0 or later or 
GTN 625/635/650 series unit with GPS software v4.0 or later).
When using the following information to develop the AFMS, the information in [brackets] are examples
and should be updated appropriately for the specific installation and the equipment installed in the specific
aircraft. When using the following information to develop the AFMS, the paragraphs “applicable to dual
installations” should be included only for aircraft that include dual GNSS installations.
GARMIN GNSS (GPS/SBAS) NAVIGATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT APPROVALS
For FAA approved installations in U.S. registered aircraft:
The Garmin GNSS navigation system is a GPS system with a Satellite Based Augmentation System
(SBAS), comprised of one or more Garmin [TSO-C146c GTN 725/750 navigator(s) with GPS software
v4.0] and one or more Garmin approved GPS/SBAS antenna(s). The Garmin GNSS navigation system [in
this aircraft] is installed in accordance with [AC 20-138C].
The Garmin GNSS navigation system installed in this aircraft complies with the requirements of 
[AC 20-138C] and has airworthiness approval for navigation using GPS and SBAS (within the coverage of
a Satellite Based Augmentation System complying with ICAO Annex 10) for IFR en route, terminal area,
and non-precision approach operations (including those approaches titled “GPS,” “or GPS,” and “RNAV
(GPS)” approaches). The Garmin GNSS navigation system is approved for approach procedures with
vertical guidance including “LPV” and “LNAV/VNAV” and without vertical guidance including “LP” and
“LNAV,” within the U.S. National Airspace System.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system complies with the equipment requirements of AC 90-105 and meets
the equipment performance and functional requirements to conduct RNP terminal departure and arrival
procedures and RNP approach procedures without RF (radius to fix) legs. Part 91 subpart K, 121, 125,
129, and 135 operators require operational approval from the FAA.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system complies with the equipment requirements of AC 90-100A for
RNAV 2 and RNAV 1 operations. In accordance with AC 90-100A, Part 91 operators (except subpart K)
following the aircraft and training guidance in AC 90-100A are authorized to fly RNAV 2 and RNAV 1
procedures. Part 91 subpart K, 121, 125, 129, and 135 operators require operational approval from the
FAA.

Rev. N Page 1-23
Applicable to dual installations consisting of two Garmin GNSS units: The Garmin GNSS navigation
system has been found to comply with the requirements for GPS Class II oceanic and remote navigation
(RNP-10) without time limitations in accordance with [AC 20-138C] and FAA Order 8400.12B. The
Garmin GNSS navigation system can be used without reliance on other long-range navigation systems.
This does not constitute an operational approval.
Applicable to dual installations consisting of two Garmin GNSS units: The Garmin GNSS navigation
system has been found to comply with the navigation requirements for GPS Class II oceanic and remote
navigation (RNP-4) in accordance with [AC 20-138C], and FAA Order 8400.33. The Garmin GNSS
navigation system can be used without reliance on other long-range navigation systems. Additional
equipment may be required to obtain operational approval to utilize RNP-4 performance. This does not
constitute an operational approval.
The Garmin GNSS navigation system complies with the accuracy, integrity, and continuity of function,
and contains the minimum system functions required for P-RNAV operations in accordance with JAA
Administrative & Guidance Material Section One: General Part 3: Temporary Guidance Leaflets, Leaflet
No 10 (JAA TGL-10 Rev 1). The GNSS navigation system has [one or more] [TSO-C146c Class 3]
approved [Garmin GTN 725/750] Navigation Systems. The Garmin GNSS navigation system complies
with the accuracy, integrity, and continuity of function, and contains the minimum system functions
required for B-RNAV operations in accordance with EASA AMC 20-4. The Garmin GNSS navigation
system complies with the equipment requirements for 
P-RNAV and B-RNAV/RNAV 5 operations in accordance with AC 90-96A CHG 1. This does not
constitute an operational approval.
Garmin International holds an FAA Type 2 Letter of Acceptance (LOA) in accordance with AC 20-153 for
database integrity, quality, and database management practices for the navigation database. Flight crew
and operators can view the LOA status at flyGarmin.com then select “Type 2 LOA Status.”
Navigation information is referenced to the WGS-84 reference system.
For FAA approved installations in non-U.S. registered aircraft:
For installations outside the United States of America or in non-U.S. registered aircraft, installations
should comply with applicable regulations and guidance of the cognizant Civil Aviation Authority.
Note that for some types of aircraft operation and for operation in non-U.S. airspace, separate operational
approval(s) may be required in addition to equipment installation and airworthiness approval.
GARMIN GNSS (GPS/SBAS) NAVIGATION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
The flight crew must confirm at system initialization that the navigation database is current. Navigation
database is expected to be current for the duration of the flight. If the AIRAC cycle will change during
flight, the flight crew must ensure the accuracy of navigation data, including suitability of navigation
facilities used to define the routes and procedures for flight. If an amended chart affecting navigation data
is published for the procedure, the database must not be used to conduct the procedure. Databases must
only be updated on the ground and not during flight.
GPS/SBAS based IFR en route, oceanic, and terminal navigation is prohibited unless the flight crew
verifies and uses a valid, compatible, and current navigation database or verifies each waypoint for
accuracy by reference to current approved data.

Rev. N Page 1-24
Discrepancies that invalidate a procedure must be reported to Garmin International. The affected
procedure is prohibited from being flown using data from the navigation database until a new navigation
database is installed in the aircraft and verified that the discrepancy has been corrected. Navigation
database discrepancies can be reported at flyGarmin.com then select “Aviation Data Error Report.” Flight
crew and operators can view navigation database alerts at flyGarmin.com then select “NavData Alerts.”
For flight planning purposes, in areas where SBAS coverage is not available, the flight crew must check
RAIM availability.
 Within the United States, RAIM availability can be determined using the Garmin WFDE
Prediction program, Garmin part number 006-A0154-05 (included in GTN trainer) software v3.00
or later approved version with Garmin approved antennas or the FAA’s en route and terminal
RAIM prediction website: www.raimprediction.net, or by contacting a Flight Service Station
 Within Europe, RAIM availability can be determined using the Garmin WFDE Prediction
program or Europe’s AUGER GPS RAIM Prediction Tool at http://augur.ecacnav.com/augur/app/
home
 For other areas, use the Garmin WFDE Prediction program
This RAIM availability requirement is not necessary if SBAS coverage is confirmed to be available along
the entire route of flight. The route planning and WFDE prediction program may be downloaded from
Garmin’s website at www.garmin.com. For information on using the WFDE Prediction Program, refer to
Garmin’s document, WFDE Prediction Program Instructions, P/N 190-00643-01.
For flight planning purposes, for operations within the U.S. National Airspace System on RNP and RNAV
procedures when SBAS signals are not available, the availability of GPS RAIM shall be confirmed for the
intended route of flight. In the event of a predicted continuous loss of RAIM of more than five minutes for
any part of the intended route of flight, the flight should be delayed, canceled, or rerouted on a track where
RAIM requirements can be met.
For flight planning purposes for operations within European B-RNAV/RNAV-5 and P-RNAV airspace, if
more than one satellite is scheduled to be out of service, then the availability of GPS RAIM shall be
confirmed for the intended flight (route and time). In the event of a predicted continuous loss of RAIM of
more than five minutes for any part of the intended flight, the flight should be delayed, canceled, or
rerouted on a track where RAIM requirements can be met.
Applicable to dual installations consisting of two Garmin GNSS units: For flight planning purposes, for
operations where the route requires Class II navigation the aircraft’s operator or flight crew must use the
Garmin WFDE Prediction program to demonstrate that there are no outages on the specified route that
would prevent the Garmin GNSS navigation system from providing GPS Class II navigation in oceanic
and remote areas of operation that requires RNP-10 or RNP-4 capability. If the Garmin WFDE Prediction
program indicates fault exclusion (FDE) will be unavailable for more than 34 minutes in accordance with
FAA Order 8400.12B for RNP-10 requirements, or 25 minutes in accordance with FAA Order 8400.33 for
RNP-4 requirements, then the operation must be rescheduled when FDE is available.
Applicable to dual installations consisting of two Garmin GNSS units: Both Garmin GPS navigation
receivers must be operating and providing GPS navigation guidance for operations requiring RNP-4
performance.

Rev. N Page 1-25
Applicable to dual installations consisting of two Garmin GNSS units: North Atlantic (NAT) Minimum
Navigational Performance Specifications (MNPS) Airspace operations per AC 91-49 and AC 120-33
require both GPS/SBAS receivers to be operating and receiving usable signals except for routes requiring
only one Long Range Navigation sensor. Each display computes an independent navigation solution based
on its internal GPS receiver.
Whenever possible, RNP and RNAV routes including Standard Instrument Departures (SIDs), Standard
Terminal Arrival (STAR), and en route RNAV “Q” and RNAV “T” routes should be loaded into the flight
plan from the database in their entirety, rather than loading route waypoints from the database into the
flight plan individually. Selecting and inserting individual named fixes from the database is permitted,
provided all fixes along the published route to be flown are inserted. Manual entry of waypoints using
latitude/longitude or place/bearing is prohibited.
“GPS,” “or GPS,” and “RNAV (GPS)” instrument approaches using the Garmin navigation system are
prohibited unless the flight crew verifies and uses the current navigation database. GPS based instrument
approaches must be flown in accordance with an approved instrument approach procedure that is loaded
from the navigation database.
Not all published Instrument Approach Procedures (IAP) are in the navigation database. Flight crews
planning on flying an RNAV instrument approach must ensure that the navigation database contains the
planned RNAV Instrument Approach Procedure and that approach procedure must be loaded from the
navigation database into the Garmin GNSS navigations system flight plan by its name.
IFR non-precision approach approval using the GPS/SBAS sensor is limited to published approaches
within the U.S. National Airspace System. Approaches to airports in other airspace are not approved unless
authorized by the appropriate governing authority.
The navigation equipment required to join and fly an instrument approach procedure is indicated by the
title of the procedure and notes on the IAP chart. Use of the Garmin GPS/SBAS receivers to provide
navigation guidance during the final approach segment of an ILS, LOC, LOC-BC, LDA, SDF, MLS or any
other type of approach not approved for “or GPS” navigation is prohibited.
Applicable to installations with GTN 750 Units: When using the Garmin VOR/LOC/GS receivers to fly
the final approach segment, VOR/LOC/GS navigation data must be selected and presented on the CDI of
the pilot flying the aircraft.
Navigation information is referenced to the WGS-84 reference system, and should only be used where the
Aeronautical Information Publication (including electronic data and aeronautical charts) conform to 
WGS-84 or equivalent.
Navigation is not authorized north of 89 degrees north latitude or south of 89 degrees south latitude with
software v6.00 or later.
1.12.7 Checklists
For installations seeking operational approval for checklists, the software is designed to DAL B and the
function supports a safety classification of MIN.

Rev. N Page 1-26
1.13 GTN Databases
The GTN utilizes various databases. With the exception of the Navigation, Basemap, SafeTaxi, and
Obstacle databases which reside internal to the GTN, all databases are stored in a single SD memory card
that is inserted into the vertical slot on the left side of the GTN. The following describes each database and
how the databases are updated.
Garmin requests that the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain,
obstacles and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the
ground. Go to flyGarmin.com and select “Aviation Data Error Report.”
NOTE
In multiple GTN unit installations with Charts enabled, the same version and type of
charts (FliteCharts or ChartView) must be used.
CAUTION
The databases on the Supplemental Data Card are locked to specific GTN installations.
The first time the Supplemental Data Card is inserted into a GTN it becomes “locked” to
that particular GTN and will not work in other installations.
1.13.1 Basemap Database

The Basemap database provides ground-based references such as roads and bodies of water. The database
is stored in the GTN internal memory. The Basemap database does not claim compliance with 
RTCA/DO-200A Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data. The Basemap database does not have a
scheduled update cycle and as such does not have an expiration date. The Basemap database is updated
very infrequently. Should this database need to be updated in the future, Garmin will provide details on
how to load the updated data into the GTN.
1.13.2 Navigation Database
The Jeppesen Navigation database provides the GTN with the required information for displaying flight
plan information.
The GTN utilizes a database stored on an SD memory data card for easy updating and replacement. The
navigation database may be updated by inserting an updated navigation database update card into the
vertical SD card slot on the left side of the GTN. The actual database is downloaded into the unit, so the
card can be removed after the update. Each card will only update one system. Alternately, the Navigation
database may be updated by copying the database to the Garmin-supplied Supplemental Data card. It will
be downloaded into the GTN on first use, and the file can be left on the Supplemental Data card until the
next update cycle.
The Navigation database on the GTN database card is generated from current Jeppesen Sanderson data.
Garmin International holds an FAA Type 2 Letter of Acceptance (LOA) in accordance with AC 20-153A
and RTCA/DO-200A Level 1 and 2 for database integrity, quality, and management practices for the
Navigation database. Flight crews and operators can view the LOA status at flyGarmin.com then select
“Type 2 LOA Status.” GTN users update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates
from Garmin. The database card is programmed using an SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 
(866) 739-5687 or go to flyGarmin.com for more information and instructions.

Rev. N Page 1-27
1.13.3 FliteCharts® Database
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services (formerly named National Aeronautical
Charting Office) terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for
applicable charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Garmin International holds
an FAA Type 2 Letter of Acceptance (LOA) in accordance with AC 20-153A and RTCA/DO-200A 
Level 2 for database integrity, quality, and management practices for the FliteCharts database. Flight crews
and operators can view the LOA status at flyGarmin.com then select “Type 2 LOA Status.” When viewing
these charts on the GTN, the aircraft position is not depicted on the chart. The FliteCharts database is
updated by removing the database card from the GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting
the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GTN users update their database card by purchasing
database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is programmed using an SD card reader.
Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or go to flyGarmin.com for more information and instructions.
1.13.4 ChartView™ Database
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in
full color with high-resolution. The GTN depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams. The ChartView database is stored on an SD memory
card that remains in the GTN for normal operation. The ChartView database is updated by removing the
database card from the GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting the card. Each card can only
be used with one system. GTN users update their ChartView data by purchasing database subscription
updates from Jeppesen Sanderson. The database card is programmed using an SD card reader and
Jeppesen-provided software. Contact Jeppesen at (800) 621-5377 or www.jeppesen.com for more
information and instructions.
1.13.5 SafeTaxi® Database
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 900 airports in
the United States. Garmin International holds an FAA Type 2 Letter of Acceptance (LOA) in accordance
with AC 20-153A and RTCA/DO-200A Level 2 for database integrity, quality, and management practices
for the SafeTaxi database. Flight crews and operators can view the LOA status at flyGarmin.com then
select “Type 2 LOA Status.”
The SafeTaxi database is stored internally in the GTN for normal operation. The SafeTaxi database is
updated by removing the database card from the GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting
the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GTN users update their database card by purchasing
database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is programmed using an SD card reader.
Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or go to flyGarmin.com for more information and instructions.
1.13.6 Terrain Database
The Terrain database is used to provide basic terrain awareness functionality. The Terrain database is also
used to provide TAWS or HTAWS alerts to the pilot (with TAWS or HTAWS software only). Garmin
International holds an FAA Type 2 Letter of Acceptance (LOA) in accordance with AC 20-153A and
RTCA/DO-200A Level 2 for database integrity, quality, and management practices for the Terrain
database. Flight crews and operators can view the LOA status at flyGarmin.com then select “Type 2 LOA
Status.”
The Terrain database is available from Garmin for updating as needed. The Terrain database is updated by
removing the database card from the GTN, updating the database on the card and reinserting the card in the
vertical card slot on the left side of the GTN. The Terrain database can be downloaded via the Internet and
the card can be programmed using an SD card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or go 
to flyGarmin.com for more information or instructions.

Rev. N Page 1-28
1.13.7 Obstacle Database
There are multiple versions of the Obstacle database. The Fixed-Wing Obstacle databases provide
identification of known obstacles greater than 200 feet AGL, and are available with and without hazardous
power lines. The Basic Helicopter Obstacle databases contain all obstacles, and are available with and
without hazardous power lines. The Advanced Helicopter Obstacle database contains all obstacles and all
power lines. Obstacle databases that include power lines are only compatible with GTN software v5.10 or
later.
The Obstacle database is also used with Terrain awareness and TAWS/HTAWS functionality. Garmin
International holds an FAA Type 2 Letter of Acceptance (LOA) in accordance with AC 20-153A and
RTCA/DO-200A Level 2 for database integrity, quality, and management practices for the Obstacle
database. Flight crews and operators can view the LOA status at flyGarmin.com then select “Type 2 LOA
Status.”
The Obstacle database is updated by removing the database card from the GTN, updating the database on
the card and reinserting the card. The Obstacle database can be downloaded via the Internet and the card
programmed using an SD card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or go to flyGarmin.com for more
information or instructions.
1.14 Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE)
The GTN, when installed as defined in this manual, complies with the requirements for GPS/SBAS
primary means of navigation in oceanic and remote airspace when used in conjunction with the provided
FDE prediction program.
The GTN includes internal Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) software which is active for all flight
phases including oceanic and remote operations, en route and terminal, and precision and non-precision
approaches. FDE does not require any pilot interaction. The FDE consists of two parts:
 The fault detection function detects a satellite failure that can affect navigation
 The exclusion function is the capability to exclude one or more failed satellites and prevent them
from affecting navigation
The FDE Prediction program is used to predict FDE availability. This program must be used prior to all
oceanic or remote area flights for all operators using the GTN as a primary means of navigation under 
FAR parts 91, 121, 125, and 135. The FDE program is part of the GTN Trainer, available for download
from the GTN product information page on Garmin’s website, www.garmin.com.

Rev. N Page 1-29
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 Installation
Conditions and tests required for TSO approval of this article are minimum performance standards. It is the
responsibility of those installing this article either on or within a specific type or class of aircraft to
determine that the aircraft installation conditions are within the TSO standards. TSO articles must have
separate approval for installation in an aircraft. The article may be installed only if performed under 
14 CFR part 43 or the applicable airworthiness requirements.
The GTN GPS/SBAS receiver, when installed with an appropriate antenna listed in section 1.10, is
compatible with aircraft equipped with SATCOM when installed in accordance to this manual.
To mitigate against the loss of navigation and communication, installation of a second navigation and/or
communication system may be required.
2.1.1 GPS Antenna
The GTN’s GPS/SBAS receiver must be used with the GPS/SBAS antennas listed in section 1.10.
2.1.2 Helicopter Installation
The GTN 725 with Mod Level 3 and the GTN 750 with Mod Levels 2 and 3, when installed with the 
115-01294-A0 Install Rack, meet RTCA/DO-160F, Section 8, Category U, Test Curve G. When a GTN
with software versions 5.10 or 5.11 is installed in a rotorcraft, the GTN must not be configured to interface
with the GDL 88 unless one of the heading sources listed in section 3.3.3 is connected to the GTN.
2.2 Aircraft Radio
An aircraft radio station license is not required when operating in U.S. airspace, but may be required when
operating internationally.
As required by TSO-C169a, the quantitative safety objective for the VHF COM radio in the GTNs is 
1 x 10-3 per flight hour for Part 23 Airplanes, and 1 x 10-5 per flight hour for Parts 25, 27, and 29 aircraft.
To meet requirements for Part 25, 27, and 29 aircraft, it is necessary to install a second VHF
communications radio.
2.3 Weather Products
Product age for individual reports of SiriusXM AIRMETs, SIGMETs, City Forecasts, County Warnings,
Cell Movement and TFRs are not provided by SiriusXM Weather Service.
Product age indication for SiriusXM Icing Potential, Winds Aloft, and Turbulence is not included on the
weather map. The valid time for these products is displayed on the weather map in place of the generation
time.
The valid time indication for SiriusXM Freezing Level and Canada Winds Aloft is not displayed. Instead,
the generation time for these is displayed.
2.4 Operation
The GTN is not designed to be operated in an aircraft using a QFE datum altimeter setting when interfaced
with a barometric altitude source.
Navigation is not authorized north of 89 degrees north latitude or south of 89 degrees south latitude with

Rev. N Page 2-1
3 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
3.1 Introduction
Always follow acceptable avionics installation practices per AC 43.13-1B, AC 43.13-2B, or later FAA
approved revisions of these documents. The GPS/SBAS installation instructions have been prepared to
meet the guidance material contained in AC 20-138C Airworthiness Approval of Positioning and
Navigation Systems. The communications installation instructions have been prepared to meet the
guidance material defined by AC 20-67B, Airborne VHF Communications Equipment Installations.
3.2 Minimum System Configuration
3.2.1 VFR GPS Installation
The minimum GTN unit installation requires the following items for a VFR installation.
 GTN 725/750 installed in the aircraft manufacturer approved location for 6.25" wide avionics
equipment
 GPS/SBAS antenna for GPS navigation functions
 An external CDI for installations using the VOR navigation, localizer and glideslope information
 A NAV antenna for VHF NAV functions (GTN 750 only)
 A COM antenna for COM functions (GTN 750 only)
VFR installations must be placarded GPS LIMITED TO VFR USE ONLY in clear view of the pilot. The
placard must be located immediately adjacent to the GTN.
3.2.2 IFR Installation of a GTN 725
For an IFR installation of a GTN 725, the criteria in section 3.2.1 must be met in addition to the following.
 External CDI/HSI indicator
◦ Must be installed in the pilot’s primary field-of-view (or in the aircraft manufacturer
approved mounting location)
◦ In order to perform approaches with vertical guidance, the indicator must have a vertical
deviation indicator (GS)
 The GTN provides annunciations if mounted within the required field of view. If the GTN does not
meet the field of view requirements, remote source selection annunciators must be installed
 A second GPS navigator or a separate VHF navigation radio must be installed, see section 3.2.3 if
installing a GTN 750
NOTE
To take full advantage of the GTN unit capabilities, an optional barometric altitude source
is recommended for automatic sequencing of altitude leg types. If no barometric altitude
data is provided to the GTN unit, altitude leg types must be manually sequenced.

Rev. N Page 3-1
3.2.3 IFR Installation of a GTN 750
For an IFR installation of a GTN 750, the criteria in section 3.2.1 must be met in addition to the following.
 External CDI/HSI indicator
◦ Must be installed in the pilot’s primary field-of-view (or in the aircraft manufacturer
approved mounting location)
◦ In order to perform approaches with vertical guidance, the indicator must have a vertical
deviation indicator (GS)
 The GTN provides annunciations if mounted within the required field of view. If the GTN does not
meet the field-of-view requirements, remote source selection annunciators must be installed
 A second GPS navigator or a separate VHF navigation radio is required in the following
installations
◦ Aircraft with a maximum certified gross takeoff weight (GTOW) of greater than 6000
pounds
◦ Turbine powered aircraft
◦ Multi-engine aircraft
3.3 External Sensors
When GTN is installed with external sensors, these sensors must be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's data. This manual does not provide information for the installation of specific external
sensors.
The GTN can accept data from multiple altitude, heading, and baro correction sources. If multiple sources
are used, the GTN will accept data as described below.
3.3.1 Multiple Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Sources
The GTN can accept altitude from a RS-232 altitude encoder, fuel/air data computer (FADC), 
ARINC 429 air data computer (ADC), ARINC 429 EFIS, and ARINC 429 traffic advisory system. If
multiple sources of altitude data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source is
used (input priority cannot be configured). If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken
from the next-highest priority source. Priorities of the altitude sources are as follows from highest to
lowest.
Table 3-1 Multiple Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Sources
Priority Altitude Source

1 ARINC 429 Label 203 from Airdata
2 ARINC 429 Airdata/AHRS
3 ARINC 429 GDU Format 1
4 ARINC 429 EFIS Format 2
5 ARINC 429 Data Concentrator
6 ARINC 429 Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
7 RS-232 FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
8 RS-232 Altitude Format 1 or 3

Rev. N Page 3-2
3.3.2 Multiple Baro-corrected Altitude Sources
The GTN unit can accept baro-corrected altitude from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources.
If multiple sources of baro-corrected altitude data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest
priority source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-
highest priority source. Priorities of the baro-corrected altitude sources are as follows from highest to
lowest.
Table 3-2 Baro-corrected Altitude Sources
Priority Baro-corrected Altitude Source

2 ARINC 429 Label 204 from GDU Format 1
3 ARINC 429 Label 204 from EFIS Format 2
4 ARINC 429 Label 204 from Data Concentrator

Rev. N Page 3-3
3.3.3 Multiple Heading Sources
NOTE
Heading is not required by the GTN; however, to take full advantage of the GTN unit
capabilities, an optional heading source is recommended to allow the map to be oriented
to heading up, to provide autopilot roll steering on ARINC 424 heading legs, to display
TAS traffic and WX-500 Stormscope data on the moving map, and to calculate winds if
airspeed is also available.
The GTN unit can accept heading data from multiple ARINC 429, RS-232, and synchro sources. If
multiple sources of heading data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source
is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest priority
source. Priorities of the heading sources are as follows from highest to lowest.
Table 3-3 Multiple Heading Sources
Priority Heading Source

1 ARINC 429 Label 314 from EFIS Format 1 or Format 3
2 ARINC 429 Label 320 from EFIS Format 1 or Format 3
5 ARINC 429 Label 314 from INS/IRU
7 ARINC 429 Label 320 from INS/IRU
8 ARINC 429 Label 320 from Airdata/AHRS
9 ARINC 429 Label 320 from GAD Format 1
12 XYZ Synchro
14 ARINC 429 Label 320 from Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
16 RS-232 Bus from Lightning Detector 1

Rev. N Page 3-4
3.3.4 Multiple Indicated Airspeed Sources
The GTN unit can accept indicated airspeed data from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources. If
multiple sources of indicated airspeed data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest
highest priority source. Priorities of the indicated airspeed sources are as follows from highest to lowest.
Table 3-4 Multiple Indicated Airspeed Sources
Priority Indicated Airspeed Source

4 RS-232 Bus from FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
3.3.5 Multiple True Airspeed Sources

The GTN unit can accept true airspeed data from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources. If multiple
sources of true airspeed data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source is
used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest priority
source. Priorities of the true airspeed sources are as follows from highest to lowest.
Table 3-5 Multiple True Airspeed Sources
Priority True Airspeed Source

7 RS-232 Bus from FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
3.3.6 Multiple VOR/LOC Selected Course Sources

The GTN unit can accept VOR/LOC selected course data from the sources list below. If multiple sources
of VOR/LOC selected course data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source
is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next-highest priority
source. Priorities of the VOR/LOC selected course sources are as follows from highest to lowest.
Table 3-6 Multiple VOR/LOC Selected Course Sources
Priority VOR/LOC Selected Course Source

3 TO/FROM Course from an Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) control

Rev. N Page 3-5
3.3.7 Multiple GPS Selected Course Sources
The GTN unit can accept GPS selected course data from multiple ARINC 429 sources. If multiple sources
of GPS selected course data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source is
source. Priorities of the GPS selected course sources are as follows from highest to lowest.
Table 3-7 Multiple GPS Selected Course Sources
Priority GPS Selected Course Source

1 ARINC 429 Label 100 from EFIS Format 1 or 3
7 TO/FROM Course from an Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) control
3.3.8 Multiple Total Air Temperature Sources

The GTN unit can accept total air temperature data from multiple ARINC 429 and RS-232 sources. If
multiple sources of total air temperature data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest
highest priority source. Priorities of the total air temperature sources are as follows from highest to lowest.
Table 3-8 Multiple Total Air Temperature Sources
Priority Total Air Temperature Source

5 RS-232 bus from FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1

Rev. N Page 3-6
3.3.9 Multiple Static Air Temperature Sources
The GTN unit can accept static air temperature data from multiple ARINC 429 sources. If multiple sources
of static air temperature data are supplied to the GTN, only valid data from the highest priority source is
source. Priorities of the static air temperature sources are as follows from highest to lowest.
Table 3-9 Multiple Static Air Temperature Sources
Priority Static Air Temperature Source


Rev. N Page 3-7
3.4 GDL 88 Installation Considerations
When a GDL 88 is installed with a GTN, altitude data can be forwarded from sources connected to the
GTN to the GDL 88. The GTN is also capable of forwarding parallel Gray code received from an altimeter
connected to a GTX transponder. All of these sources must meet the minimum performance requirements
of TSO-C10 or TSO-C106, or altitude digitizers/encoders must meet TSO-C88. (Reference AC 20-165A,
section 3-4(a)(1) and (2)).
If a compatible TAS system and the GDL 88 are installed in an aircraft, the compatible TAS system should
be directly connected to the GDL 88. The traffic data is then sent from the GDL 88 to the GTN over
HSDB. See the GDL 88 interconnect diagrams for more information on the connection.
For more information on configuration of the GDL 88 and systems connected to the GDL 88, refer to 
GDL 88 Installation Manual.
NOTE
GDL 88 system software v2.00 or 2.01 required for GTN software versions prior to v5.00.
NOTE
GDL 88 system software v2.05 or later required for GTN software v5.00 or later.
NOTE
GDL 88 system software v3.00 or later and GTN software v5.10 or later required for
rotorcraft-specific features.

Rev. N Page 3-8
3.5 Antenna Considerations
Location considerations for the antennas required for the GTN units are contained in this section. For
mounting the GPS/SBAS antenna, refer to FAA approved data. For mounting the COM and NAV
antennas, refer to the aircraft manufacturer’s data.
3.5.1 GPS Antenna Location
The GPS/SBAS antenna is a key element in the overall system performance and integrity for a GPS/SBAS
navigation system. The mounting location, geometry, and surroundings of the antenna can affect the
system performance and/or availability. The following guidance provides information to aid the installer in
ensuring that the most optimum location is selected for the installation of the GPS antenna. The installation
guidelines presented here meet the intent of AC 20-138C, chapter 12. The greater the variance from these
guidelines, the greater the chance of decreased availability. Approach procedures with vertical guidance
are the most sensitive to these effects. LNAV only approaches, terminal operations, and en route
operations may also be affected. Because meeting all of these installations guidelines may not be possible
on all aircraft, these guidelines are listed in order of importance to achieve optimum performance. Items 3
below are of equal importance and their significance may depend on the aircraft installation. The installer
should use their best judgment to balance the installation guidelines. Figure 3-1 shows the recommended
placement of antennas.
1. Mount the antenna as close to level as possible with respect to the normal cruise flight attitude of
the aircraft. If the normal flight attitude is not known, substitute the waterline, which is typically
referenced as level while performing a weight and balance check.
2. The GPS antenna should be mounted in a location to minimize the effects of airframe shadowing
during typical maneuvers. Typically mounting farther away from the tail section reduces signal
blockage seen by the GPS antenna.
3a. The GPS antenna should be mounted no closer than two feet from any VHF COM antenna or any
other antenna which may emit harmonic interference at the L1 frequency of 
1575.42 MHz. An aircraft EMC check (reference VHF COM interference check in Post
Installation Checkout procedures) can verify the degradation of GPS in the presence of
interference signals. If an EMC check reveals unacceptable interference, insert a GPS notch filter
in line with the offending VHF COM or the (re-radiating) ELT transmitter.
NOTE
When mounting a combination antenna (ex. GPS and COM, GPS and XM), the
recommended distance of two feet or more is not applicable to the distance between the
antenna elements provided the combination antenna is TSO authorized and has been
tested to meet Garmin’s minimum performance standards.
3b. The GPS antenna should be mounted no closer than two feet from any antennas emitting more than
25 watts of power. An aircraft EMC check can verify the degradation of GPS in the presence of
interference signals.
3c. To achieve the best possible low-elevation antenna gain (by minimizing pattern degradation due to
shadowing and near-field interaction), the GPS antenna must be mounted with clearance from
other antennas, including passive antennas such as another GPS antenna or XM antenna. When
practical, installers will use 12" center-to-center spacing between antennas. If 12" spacing is not
practical, installers will use the maximum center-to-center spacing from adjacent antennas, but
never less than 9" center-to-center spacing. Spacing less than 9" center-to-center results in
unacceptable GPS/SBAS antenna pattern degradation.

Rev. N Page 3-9
4. To maintain a constant gain pattern and limit degradation by the windscreen, avoid mounting the
antenna closer than 3" from the windscreen.
5. For multiple GPS installations, the antennas should not be mounted in a straight line from the front
to the rear of the fuselage. Also varying the mounting location will help minimize any aircraft
shading by the wings or tail section (in a particular azimuth, when one antenna is blocked the other
antenna may have a clear view).
3.5.2 COM Antenna Location
The GTN COM antenna should be well removed from all projections, engines and propellers. The ground
plane surface directly below the antenna should be a flat plane over as large an area as possible (18"
square, minimum). The antenna should be mounted a minimum of six feet from any DME or other COM
antennas, four feet from any ADF sense antennas, and two feet from the GTN and its GPS antenna. The
COM antenna should also be mounted as far apart as practical from the ELT antenna. Some ELTs have
exhibited re-radiation problems generating harmonics that may interfere with GPS signals. This can
happen when the COM (GTN or any other COM) is transmitting on certain frequencies such as 121.15 or
121.175 MHz, which may cause the ELT output circuit to oscillate from the signal coming in on the ELT
antenna coax.
If simultaneous use of two COM transceivers is desired (split-COM or simul-COM), the COM antennas
should be spaced for maximum isolation. A configuration of one topside antenna and one bottom side
antenna is recommended. The GTN does not require a transmit interlock, but other COM radios such as the
GNS 530W may require it for split-COM operations.
NOTE
Canadian installations are required to meet Industry Canada specifications for maximum
radiation as documented in Radio Specifications Standard 102 (RSS-102). For more
information about RF exposure and related Canadian regulatory compliance, contact:
Manager, Radio Equipment Standards

Industry Canada
365 Laurier Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario
K1A 0C8
In accordance with Canadian Radio Specifications Standard 102 (RSS 102), RF field strength
exposure to persons from an antenna connected to this device should be limited to 60V/m for
controlled environment and 28V/m for uncontrolled environment.

Rev. N Page 3-10
ANTENNA MASKED BY VERTICAL FIN,
T-TAIL, OR DORSAL FIN ANTENNA NOT
MOUNTED LEVEL WITH RESPECT TO
THE NORMAL FLIGHT ATTITUDE
DISTANCE BETWEEN COM AND GPS ANTENNAS
SHOULD BE GREATER THAN 2 FEET. FOR GPS ANTENNA
LOCATION, SEE SECTION 3.5.1, STEP 3a.
GOOD BETTER
GREATER THAN 3” AFT OF WINDSCREEN
NORMAL
FLIGHT
ATTITUDE
SIDE VIEW
ANTENNA MUST BE ON
TOP OF AIRCRAFT
TOP VIEW GPS ANTENNA OFFSET

FROM CENTERLINE
WITH TYPICAL DUAL
GPS INSTALLATION
Figure 3-1 GPS Antenna Installation Considerations

Rev. N Page 3-11
3.5.3 VOR/LOC Antenna Location
The GTN VOR/LOC antenna should be well removed from all projections, engines and propellers. It
should have as clear a field of sight as possible. The antenna must be mounted along the centerline of the
aircraft, minimizing the lateral offset. Install the antennas according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Avoid running other wires and coaxial cables near the VOR/LOC antenna cable.
3.5.4 Glideslope Antenna Location
The GTN glideslope antenna should be well removed from all projections, engines and propellers. It
should have as clear a field of sight as possible. Install the antenna according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.5.5 Electrical Bonding
Ensure the GPS/SBAS/NAV/COM antennas are electrically bonded to the aircraft. Follow the aircraft
manufacturers’ instructions for the NAV and COM antenna installations, or obtain other FAA approval.
3.5.6 Interference of GPS
On some installations, VHF COM transceivers, Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) antennas, and
Direction Finder (DF) receiver antennas can re-radiate through the GPS antenna. The GTN COM does not
interfere with its own GPS section. However, placement of the GPS antenna relative to a COM transceiver
and COM antenna (including the GTN COM antenna), ELT antenna, and DF receiver antenna is critical.
Use the following guidelines, in addition to others in this document, when locating the GTN and its
antennas.
 Locate GPS antenna as far as possible from all COM antennas and all COM transceivers
(including the GTN COM), ELT antennas, and DF receiver antennas
 The GPS antenna is less susceptible to harmonic interference if a 1.57542 GHz notch filter is
installed on the COM transceiver antenna output
 Locate the GTN as far as possible from all COM antennas
If a COM antenna is found to be the problem, a 1.57542 GHz notch filter (Garmin P/N 330-00067-00) may
be installed in the VHF COM coax, as close to the COM as possible. This filter is not required for the GTN
transmitter.
If a COM is found to be radiating, the following can be done.
 Replace or clean VHF COM rack connector to ensure good coax ground
 Place a grounding brace between the GTN, VHF COM and ground
 Shield the VHF COM wiring harness

Rev. N Page 3-12
3.6 GTN 725/750 Mounting Considerations
The GTN is designed to mount in the avionics stack in the aircraft instrument panel within view and reach
of the pilot. The primary unit location should minimize pilot head movement when transitioning between
looking outside of the cockpit and viewing/operating the GTN. The location should be such that the GTN
unit is not blocked by the glare shield on top, or by the throttles, control yoke, etc. on the bottom. If aircraft
has a throw-over yoke, be sure the yoke does not interfere with the GTN.
3.7 Cabling and Wiring Considerations
Wiring should be installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11. For dual GTN unit installations,
care should be taken to ensure separation between wires of redundant systems to reduce the possibility of
loss of navigation due to a single event. When wire separation cannot be achieved, the following
considerations should be addressed.
 Do not expose the cable harness to wire chafing in a manner that both GPS units fail
simultaneously
 Cable harnesses should not be located near flight control cables and controls, high voltage lines or
fuel lines
 The cable harness should be located in a protected area of the aircraft (e.g., isolated from engine
rotor burst)
 Do not route cable near high voltage sources
NOTE
Pigtail lengths must be less than 3.0". Wiring must be shielded as required in appendix D.
See section 4.8 and section 4.9 for connector and tooling information.
See section 4.11 for recommended coax cable.
See appendix D for the appropriate wiring connections to assemble the wiring connector.
Once the cable assemblies have been made, attach the cable connectors to the rear connector plate. After
installing the mounting tube, attach the assembled connector plate. Route the wiring bundle as appropriate.
Use 22 to 24 AWG wire for all connections except for power. For power and ground, use the wire gauge
specified in the interconnect drawing, then 22 AWG for the short length from the splice to the connector.
Avoid sharp bends.

Rev. N Page 3-13
3.8 Air Circulation and Cooling
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the GTN, take precautions to prevent Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)
when handling the GTN, connectors, fan, and associated wiring. ESD damage can be
prevented by touching an object that is of the same electrical potential as the GTN before
handling the GTN itself.
The GTN unit meets all TSO requirements without external cooling. However, as with all electronic
equipment, lower operating temperatures extend equipment life.
Units tightly packed in the avionics stack heat each other through radiation, convection, and sometimes by
direct conduction. Even a single unit operates at a much higher temperature in still air than in moving air.
Fans or some other means of moving the air around electronic equipment are usually a worthwhile
investment.
The GTN has a cooling fan integrated into the backplate to draw forced-air cooling through the unit. There
are inlets along the left, right, and bottom sides of the GTN bezel that allow air to flow through the unit.
Ensure that there are no obstructions to the air inlets or fan exhausts. Air should be able to freely flow from
the bezel inlets to the backplate fan outlet on the rear of the unit.
3.9 Compass Safe Distance
After reconfiguring the avionics in the cockpit panel, if the GTN unit is mounted less than 12" from the
compass, recalibrate the compass and make the necessary changes for noting correction data.
3.10 TAWS-A Installation Considerations
To install the GTN with Class A TAWS-A functionality, the following are required in the aircraft.
 ARINC 429 radio altimeter that meets the requirements of TSO-C87 or ETSO-2C87
 Active-low discrete landing gear position sensor/switch
 Active-low discrete flap position sensor/switch
 GTN 7XX configured according to section 6.7.1
 Any VHF navigation radios, meeting the requirements of TSO-C34( )/ETSO-2C34( ), or GPS
navigators certified to provided vertical guidance on GPS approaches, in addition to the GTN(s),
must be connected to the GTN using ARINC 429 to enable glideslope alerting when approaches
are flown using that LRU
3.11 HTAWS Installation Considerations
If the GTN is not installed in the pilot's primary field of view, external annunciations must be provided in
the primary field of view for HTAWS Warning, HTAWS Caution, HTAWS Not Available, and HTAWS
Inhibit. If the GTN is interfaced to a Garmin G500H, all necessary annunciations are provided on the
GDU.

Rev. N Page 3-14
4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
4.1 Unit and Accessories
For description of units see table 1-1.
Table 4-1 Catalog Part Numbers

Standard Helicopter
Model Unit Only Kit Unit P/N Color COM
Kit Standard Kit
GTN 725 010-00819-00 010-00819-50 - 011-02281-00 BLK -
010-00820-00 010-00820-50 010-00820-A0 011-02282-00 BLK 10W [1]
GTN 750 010-00890-00 010-00890-50 - 011-02282-50 GRY 10W [1]
010-01060-00 - 010-01060-A0 011-02282-A0 BLK [2] 10W [1]
[1] Unit is available with COM and is calibrated for both 10W and 16W COM; 16W COM is a
software feature using an enablement card.
[2] Unit is NVIS-B compatible.
Table 4-2 Standard Kit Accessories

Model Item P/N
011-00979-00
Configuration module kit
011-00979-03 [1]
Connector kit 011-02326-00
GTN 725
Backplate assembly 011-02246-00
Mounting rack 115-01294-00
Product information kit K00-00488-00
011-00979-00
Configuration module kit
011-00979-03 [1]
Connector kit 011-02326-02
Backplate assembly 011-02246-02
GTN 750
115-01294-00 [2]
Mounting rack
115-01294-A0 [3]
K00-00488-00 [2]
Product information kit
K00-00488-A0 [3]
[1] Use P/N 011-00979-03 configuration module for new installations.
[2] Included in -50 Standard Kit.
[3] Included in -A0 Helicopter Standard Kit.
Table 4-3 Replacement Fan Parts

Model Item P/N
GTN 725 Fan with connector 371-00014-01
GTN 750 Fan mounting screws (Qty 4) 211-60234-23

Rev. N Page 4-1
4.2 Optional Accessories
4.2.1 GPS Antenna Options
For details regarding antenna selection, see section 1.10. Once the antenna type is decided upon, see the
information below for detailed parts information for antennas available directly from Garmin. Contact
manufacturer directly for information on other antennas.
Table 4-4 GA 35 Antenna

The GA 35 antenna contains the following items.
Item P/N Qty
013-00235-00 (Garmin)
GA 35 GPS/ WAAS Antenna [1] 1
AT575-93G (Aero Antenna)
[1] Antenna includes 8-32 UNC-2A x 1.00" SS 303 mounting screws (qty 4) and O-ring (qty 1).
An antenna doubler may also be required. Refer to the appropriate antenna installation data.
To secure the antenna #8 washers (qty 4) and #8 (qty 4) self-locking nuts are required in addition to the
antenna, or suitable nut plates may be installed on the doubler.
To connect the GPS antenna coaxial cable to the antenna a TNC plug is required.

Item P/N Qty
013-00244-00 (Garmin)
GA 36 GPS/WAAS Antenna [1] 1
[1] Antenna includes 10-32 UNF-2A x 1.00" SS 303 mounting screws (qty 4) and O-ring (qty 1).

Item P/N Qty
013-00245-00 (Garmin)
GA 37 GPS/WAAS + XM Antenna [1] 1
[1] Antenna includes 10-32 UNF-2A x 1.00" SS 303 mounting screws (qty 4) and O-ring (qty 1).

Rev. N Page 4-2
Table 4-7 A33W Antenna
The A33W antenna contains the following items.
Item P/N Qty
A33W, WAAS [1] 013-00261-00 (Garmin) 1
[1] Antenna includes 6-32 UNC-2A x 1.00" SS 303 mounting screws (qty 4) and O-ring (qty 1).
To secure the antenna, #6 washers (qty 4) and #6 (qty 4) self-locking nuts are required in addition to the
antenna, or suitable nut plates may be installed on the doubler that is used.
4.3 Database Options
Table 4-8 Database Options

Item Garmin P/N
GTN 6XX/7XX Database 010-00900-00
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Americas 010-00900-10
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, International 010-00900-20
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Worldwide 010-00900-30
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Helo [1] 010-01157-00
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Helo, Americas North [1] 010-01157-41
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Helo, Americas South [1] 010-01157-42
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Helo, Atlantic North [1] 010-01157-43
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Helo, Atlantic South [1] 010-01157-44
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Helo, Pacific North [1] 010-01157-45
GTN 6XX/7XX Database, Helo, Pacific South [1] 010-01157-46
[1] Compatible with GTN main software v4.00 or later. Required for HTAWS.
4.4 Miscellaneous Options
Table 4-9 Miscellaneous Options

Item Garmin P/N Mfg P/N
GPS 1.57542 GHz Notch Filter 330-00067-00 N/A
Connector, TNC, Male, Clamp N/A 031-4452 [1]
Splitter 2-way, 500 ohm, RF, BNC 013-00112-00 ZFSC-2-1B+ (Mini-Circuits)
[1] This part is not available from Garmin.
Vendor Contact Information (provided for convenience only):
Amphenol RF, Four Old Newtown Road, Danbury, CT 06810 Phone: (800) 627-7100

Rev. N Page 4-3
4.5 Optional Reference Material
Table 4-10 Reference Documents

Item Garmin P/N
14 CFR 91.227 ADS-B Out Compatible Equipment 190-01533-00
Antenna Minimum Performance Specification for Garmin’s GPS/WAAS
004-00287-00
Receiver System
Flight Stream 110/210 TSO Installation Manual 190-01700-00
GAD 42 Installation Manual 190-00159-00
GDL 69Series TSO Installation Manual 190-00355-07
GDL 69 Series SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Activation Instructions 190-00355-04
GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01310-00
GDL 88 TSO Installation Manual 190-01122-00
GSR 56 Satellite Radio Installation Manual 190-00836-00
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide 190-01007-03
GTN 725/750 Cockpit Reference Guide 190-01007-04
GTN 725/750 Training Software 006-A0411-( )
WFDE Prediction Program Instructions 190-00643-01
4.6 Enablement Cards
Table 4-11 Enablement Cards

Item Garmin P/N
GTN 7XX Internal TAWS-B Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-01
GTN 7XX Helicopter TAWS Enablement [1] 010-00878-02
GTN 7XX Search and Rescue Enablement Card [1] [5] 010-00878-03
GTN 7XX 16 Watt COM Enablement Card [1] [4] 010-00878-04
GTN 7XX TAWS-A Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-05
GTN 7XX ChartView Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-40
GTN 7XX Digital Radar Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-42
GTN 7XX Radar Automatic Ground Clutter Suppression Enablement Card [1] [3] 010-00878-44
GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence Detection Enablement Card [1] [3] 010-00878-45
GTN 7XX Radar Automatic Ground Clutter Suppression Dual Install Enablement
010-00878-46
Card [2] [3]
GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence Detection Dual Install Enablement Card [2] [3] 010-00878-47
[1] An SD enablement card is required to enable the indicated feature. Each enablement card can
only be used one time, and once used, the card will only work with that particular GTN.
[2] An SD enablement card is required to enable the indicated feature. Each Dual Install
Enablement Card can be used once on each GTN in a dual GTN installation, and once used,
the card will only work with those particular GTNs.
[3] Enablement feature is only compatible with GWX 70 12" and 18" antenna sizes.
14 volt aircraft.
[5] In dual installations, the search and rescue feature will automatically enable on the second
GTN when enabled on the first GTN.

Rev. N Page 4-4
4.7 Installation Materials Required but not Supplied
4.7.1 Accessories Required but not Supplied
The following installation accessories are required but not provided.
Table 4-12 Required Accessories

Item Requirements
COM antenna Meets TSO-C37( ) and C38( ) or TSO-C169( ). 50 , vertically
(GTN 750 only) polarized with coaxial cable.
Meets TSO C40( ) and C36( ). 50, horizontally polarized with
NAV antenna
coaxial cable. Note that if the NAV antenna is a combined VOR/LOC/
(GTN 750 only)
GS antenna, it must meet TSO C40( ), C36( ), and C34( ).
Glideslope antenna Meets TSO-C34( ). 50, horizontally polarized with coaxial cable or
(GTN 750 only) low-loss splitter used with the VOR/LOC antenna.
Headphones 500  nominal impedance.
Microphone Low impedance, carbon or dynamic, with transistorized pre-amp
GPS antenna See section 4.2.1 for options.
4.7.2 Materials Required but not Supplied (New Installations Only)
The GTN is intended for use with the standard aviation accessories. The following items are required for
installation, but not supplied:
 Wire (MIL-W-22759/16 or equivalent)
NOTE
If MIL-W-22759/18 wire is utilized because the smaller insulation diameter works better
with the high-density connectors used in the GTN, care must be taken to adequately
support and protect the wiring due to its thinner insulation.
 Shielded wire (MIL-C-27500 or equivalent)
 Mounting screws (8 minimum – MS24693 screw, machine, flat countersunk head 100°, cross-
recessed with .1380-32 UNC-2A thread, corrosion resistant steel)
 Push/pull (manually resettable) circuit breakers
 Tie wraps or lacing cord
 Ring terminals (for grounding)
 Coaxial cable (RG-400, RG-142B or equivalent, see section 4.11 for additional information)
 Aircraft grade category 5 Ethernet cable (required only for installations utilizing HSDB
interfaces). The following Ethernet cable part numbers are acceptable for this installation.
Table 4-13 Approved Ethernet Cable Manufacturers

MANUFACTURER P/N
ELECTRONIC CABLE SPECIALIST 392404 (24 AWG)
PIC WIRE AND CABLE 10424 (24 AWG)

Rev. N Page 4-5
4.7.3 Optional Annunciation Panels
An external GPS annunciation panel may be required for some installations. The following indicators and
indicator/switches are available for external GPS annunciation.
Table 4-14 Optional Annunciator Panels

Manufacturer Part Number Type Notes
MD41-1408A
MD41-1404A
MD41-1418A
MD41-1414A
MD41-1464A
MD41-1468A
MD41-1470
5 VDC, 14 VDC, and 28 VDC indicators
MD41-1474A available.
Indicator/Switch/GPS
Mid-Continent MD41-1478A
Annunciations
MD41-1484W The MD41-151X ACU is the preferred indicator,
although the MD41-14XX ACU is acceptable.
MD41-1488W
MD41-1510
MD41-1511
MD41-1512
MD41-1513
MD41-1514
MD41-1515
Vendor Contact Information (provided for convenience only):
Mid-Continent Instrument Co Inc., 9400 E. 34th Street N., Wichita, KS 67226, Phone: (316) 630-0101,
www.mcico.com.

Rev. N Page 4-6
4.8 Special Tools Required
Some of the connectors use crimp contacts. Table 4-15 identifies crimp tools required to ensure consistent,
reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors.
Table 4-15 Recommended Crimp Tools (or Equivalent)

22 – 28 AWG (P1001 – P1005)
Hand Crimping
Manufacturer Insertion/
Tool Positioner
Extraction Tool
M81969/14-01
Military P/N M22520/2-01 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-04
Positronic 9507-0-0-0 9502-4-0-0 M81969/1-04
000849490
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 995-0001-739
274-7048-000MIL
91067-1
AMP 601966-1 601966-6
2031838-1
M81969/14-01
Daniels AFM8 K42
M81969/1-04
M81969/14-01
Astro 615717 615725
M81969/1-04
NOTE
Insertion/extraction tools from ITT Cannon are all plastic; others are plastic with metal
tip.
Table 4-16 Socket Contact Part Numbers [1]
P1001-P1005
Wire Gauge (including P1001 configuration module) [2]
22-28 AWG [2]

Garmin P/N 336-00021-00
Military P/N M39029/58-360 [3]
[1] Recommended crimp tools are listed in table 4-15.
[2] For configuration module pins, ensure that the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire.
[3] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to change
without notice.
4.9 Coaxial Cable Installation
Follow the steps below for installation of the coaxial cables:
1. Route the coaxial cable to the radio rack location keeping in mind the recommendations of 
section 3.5. Secure the cable in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, chapter 11, section 11.
2. Trim the coaxial cable to the desired length and install the TNC and BNC connectors per
manufacturer’s instructions.

Rev. N Page 4-7
4.10 Equipment Mounting
4.10.1 Rack Installation
Use the dimensions shown in figure C-3 to prepare the mounting holes for the GTN unit. You may also use
the GTN unit mounting rack itself as a template for drilling the mounting holes.
1. Figure C-1 shows outline dimensions for the avionics rack for the various GTN units. Install the
rack in a rectangular 6.32" x 6.07" hole (or gap between units) in the instrument panel. The lower-
front lip of the rack should be flush with, or extend slightly beyond, the finished aircraft panel.
NOTE
If the front lip of the mounting rack is behind the surface of the aircraft panel, the GTN
unit connectors may not fully engage. See figure C-4 for more information. Ensure that no
screw heads or other obstructions prevent the unit from fully engaging in the rack (see
section 6.3). Exercise caution when installing the rack into the instrument panel.
Deformation of the rack may make it difficult to install and remove the GTN unit.
2. Install the rack in the aircraft panel using ten #6-32 flat head screws and ten self-locking nuts. The
screws are inserted from the inside through the holes in the sides of the rack.
3. To attach the backplate to the rack, align the backplate so that the backplate screw heads pass
through the keyed holes in the back of the rack.
4. Slide the backplate to the right (viewing from cockpit) until it clicks into place. Secure the
backplate by tightening the four #4-40 screws.
4.10.2 GTN Unit Insertion and Removal
It may be necessary to insert the hex drive tool into the access hole and rotate the drive tool
counterclockwise until it completely stops in order to ensure correct position of the retention mechanism
prior to placing the unit in the rack. The GTN unit is installed in the rack by sliding it straight in until it
stops, about 3/8" short of the final position. A 3/32" hex drive tool is then inserted into the access hole at
the bottom of the unit face. Rotate the hex tool clockwise while pressing on the left side of the bezel until
the unit is firmly seated in the rack.
To remove the unit from the rack, insert the hex drive tool into the access hole on the unit face. Rotate
counterclockwise until the unit is forced out about 3/8" and the hex drive tool completely stops. This will
allow the unit to be freely pulled from the rack.
Be sure not to over tighten the unit into the rack. The application of hex drive tool torque exceeding 
15 in-lbs can damage the locking mechanism.
4.10.3 Unit Replacement
Whenever the GTN unit is removed or reinstalled, verify that the unit power-up self-test sequence is
successfully completed and no failure messages are annunciated. Section 6.11.1 outlines the power-up
self-test sequence.

Rev. N Page 4-8
4.11 Antenna Installation and Connections
4.11.1 GPS Antenna
Antenna cable installation information is contained in this section. For location considerations, 
see section 3.5.
NOTE
The internal GTN unit COM does not interfere with its own GPS/SBAS receiver. However,
placement of the GTN unit antenna relative to other COM transceivers and antennas
(including the GTN unit COM antenna) is critical.
NOTE
It may be beneficial to temporarily locate the GPS/SBAS antenna with coax connected to
the GTN unit and check the GPS/SBAS performance as described in section 6.11.2. Once a
suitable location has been verified, then permanently mount the antenna.
Once the antenna mounting position has been prepared, route the coax cable from the antenna to the GTN
unit. Proper selection of coax cable and assembly of connectors is critical to GPS signal performance.
Cable loss from the GPS/SBAS antenna must be between 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB in order to maintain
proper rejection to interference signals.
Coaxial connectors and adapters, such as TNC to BNC, add additional loss to the cable and should be
considered when computing the cable loss. A typical loss of 0.2 dB can be used for each connection. To
maintain integrity of the SBAS signal, the GPS antenna coaxial cable must have a minimum of two shields
(e.g., RG-400 or RG-142B).
NOTE
If RG-142B or RG-400 is used, 1.5 dB equates to a length of approximately 6.5 feet of
cable with a connector on each end. RG-142B or RG-400 cable can be used as long as the
length is less than 35 feet. For longer lengths, use low-loss double or triple shielded 50 
coax.
For very short runs, where the loss is less than 1.5 dB, additional cable should be used to increase the loss
to within 1.5 dB to 6.5 dB. This additional cable may be coiled, taking into account the minimum bend
radius of the cable.
During the post-installation checkout, susceptibility to harmonics of VHF COM transmitters will be
evaluated. If problems arise, then better isolation, or distance, may be required between the GPS and COM
antennas, or a 1575.42 MHz notch filter, Garmin P/N 330-00067-00, may be installed in series with the
antenna coax of the VHF COM transceiver to reduce or eliminate the harmonic interference.
If a VHF COM transmitter causes problems with the GPS on the selected frequencies as listed in the post-
installation checkout, the problem may be due to the ELT. This can be verified by disconnecting the ELT
antenna coax at the ELT unit. If the ELT is found to cause the problem, then contact the ELT manufacturer
or replace the ELT.

Rev. N Page 4-9
4.11.2 COM Antenna (GTN 750 Only)
The GTN unit requires a standard 50  vertically polarized antenna. Follow the antenna manufacturer’s
installation instructions for mounting the antenna.
The antenna should be mounted on a metal surface or a ground plane with a minimum area of 
18" x 18". See section 3.5.2 for installation location considerations.
The antenna coax cable should be made of RG-142B, RG-400 or a comparable quality 50  coax.
Check for insertion loss and VSWR (voltage standing wave ratio). VSWR should be checked with an in-
line type VSWR/wattmeter inserted in the coaxial transmission line between the transceiver and the
antenna. The VSWR should be inserted as close to the transceiver as possible. When rack and harness
buildup is performed in the shop, the coax termination may be provisioned by using a 6" inline BNC
connection. This would be an acceptable place to insert the VSWR. Any problem with the antenna
installation is most likely seen as high reflected power. A VSWR of 3:1 may result in up to a 50% loss in
transmit power.
4.11.3 NAV Antenna (GTN 750 Only)
The NAV antenna is a standard 50 Ω horizontally polarized VOR/Localizer/Glideslope antenna (the
glideslope may be a separate antenna in some aircraft) that receives VOR frequencies between 108 and
117.95 MHz, and localizer frequencies between 108 and 112 MHz, and glideslope information between
328.6 and 335.4 MHz Follow the antenna manufacturer’s installation instructions for mounting antennas.
It is recommended that the installer use RG-142B, RG-400 or equivalent 50 Ω coax for the NAV
antenna(s).

Rev. N Page 4-10
4.12 Electrical Installation Procedure
The installation kits for the GTN include connectors and crimp contacts. Use wire specified in section 4.7
for all connections. Make the crimp connections with a crimp tool as specified in table 4-15.
For the appropriate connections see the interconnect diagrams in appendix D. Use 22 or 24 AWG wire for
all connections. For power and ground, use the wire gauge specified in the interconnect drawings in
appendix D and 22 AWG for the short length from the splice to the connector. Install the configuration
module as described in section 4.12.1.2. Once the wire harness assemblies have been made, use anti-chafe
tape and attach the backshell/connector to the rear of the mounting unit. Route the wire harness as
appropriate. Avoid sharp bends that may damage the wire harness. Allow adequate space for installation of
wire harnesses and connectors. See section 5 for connector pinout information. All electrical connections
to the GTN are made through the following connectors provided by Garmin.
 J1001 Main - 78-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
 J1002 Main - 26-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
 J1003 COM - 44-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male) (GTN 750 only)
 J1004 NAV - 62-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male) (GTN 750 only)
 J1005 I/O - 62-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
Construct the wire harness according to the information contained in this and the following sections. Strip
all wires going to the connectors 0.17 inches. Insert the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the
recommended (or equivalent) crimping tools. Insert the pin into the connector housing location as
specified by the interconnect drawing in appendix D. Verify that the pin is properly engaged into the
connector by gently tugging on the wire.
Section 5 provides the pin-out information for the GTN. Required connectors and associated hardware are
supplied with the connector kits.
CAUTION
Check wiring connections for errors before inserting the unit into the rack. Incorrect
wiring could cause component damage.
4.12.1 Backshell Assembly and D-Sub Connectors
The GTN connector kits include Garmin backshell assemblies and ground adapter assemblies. Backshell
connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing using the
shield block ground kit. Table 4-17 lists Garmin part numbers for the D-Sub connectors and the backshell
assemblies.

Rev. N Page 4-11
Table 4-17 GTN Backshell Assembly
See
Figure 4-1
Description Garmin P/N Notes
through
Figure 4-3
Backshell (P1001) 125-00085-00
Backshell (P1002) 125-00082-00
1 [1]
Backshell (P1003) 125-00083-00
Backshell (P1004, P1005) 125-00084-00
2 Shield block (P1002, P1003) 117-00147-00
[2]
Shield block (P1001, P1004, P1005) 117-00147-01
3 Screw, 4-40 x.250, FLHP100, SS/P, Nylon 211-63234-08 [2], [3]
6 Screw, 4-40 x.375,PHP,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-60234-10 [1]
Strain Relief (P1001, P1004, P1005) 115-00499-03
7 Strain Relief (P1002) 115-00499-01 [1]
Strain Relief (P1003) 115-00499-02
Cover (P1001) 115-00500-04
Cover (P1002) 115-00500-01
8 [1]
Cover (P1003) 115-00500-02
Cover (P1004, P1005) 115-00500-03
9 Screw,4-40x.187, FLHP100,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06 [1]
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 78 Pin (P1001) 330-00185-78
10 Connector, D-Sub, HD, 44 Pin (P1003) 330-00185-44 [3]
11 Multiple Conductor Shielded Cable (See appendix D) As Required [4]
12 Shield Terminator As Required [4], [5]
13 Wire, Insulated (20-22 AWG), 3" max length As Required [4], [5]
14 Pin Contacts, #22D 336-00021-00 [3]
MS25036-149,
Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG, 14-16 AWG,
15 MS25036-153, [4], [6]
12–10 AWG
MS25036-156
MS51957-42, 
16 Screw, PHP, 8-32x.312", Stainless or Cad Plated Steel [4], [6]
MS35206-242
Split Washer, #8, (.045" compressed thickness) Stainless MS35338-137,
17 [4], [6]
or Cadmium plated steel MS35338-42
Flat Washer, #8, .032" thick, .174"ID, .375" OD, Stainless NAS1149CN832R,
18 [4], [6]
or Cad Plated Steel NAS1149FN832P
19 Silicon Fusion Tape 249-00114-00 [4]
[1] Supplied as part of Backshell Kits P/N 011-00950-04 (P1001), P/N 011-00950-01 (P1002), 
P/N 011-00950-02 (P1003) and P/N 011-00950-03 (P1004 and P1005).
[2] Supplied as part of Ground Adapter Kits P/N 011-01169-01 (P1001, P1004, P1005) and 
P/N 011-01169-00 (P1002, P1003).
[3] Supplied as part of GTN Connector Kit P/N 011-02326-00 (GTN 725), and P/N 011-02326-02
(GTN 750).
[4] Not supplied – must be purchased separately.
[5] Solder sleeve with pre-installed shield drain wire may be used instead of items 12 and 13.
[6] Not a Garmin part number.

Rev. N Page 4-12
4.12.1.1 Shield Block Ground Procedure
Acceptable methods for terminating shielded wires for the GTN is provided in this section.
4.12.1.1.1 Special Considerations
CAUTION
Due to insufficient clearance between the fan case and P1001 shield block, do not use the
three tapped holes on shield block above the fan for grounding. See section 4.12.2 for
more information.
Up to three shields or wires may be terminated within the 14-16 AWG MS25036-153 #8 ring terminal, and
a maximum of 3 ring terminals may be installed on each shield block terminal location.
9 2X
3X
6
1
2X 3
3 4X
Figure 4-1 Connector and Backshell Assembly

Rev. N Page 4-13
PREFERRED METHOD
ALTERNATE METHOD
ALTERNATE METHOD
Figure 4-2 Shielded Cable Preparation

Rev. N Page 4-14
) &7
* (2 17$
$5 (' &2
0$;
.(
7
62 &
'
+ ,(/
)6
*2
1 1,1
*,
%(
$5

$5
$5
$5 $;
0 ('
326 /'
(; +,(
6
$5 $5
$5
$5
Figure 4-3 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly (Preferred Method)

Rev. N Page 4-15
The screws (16) used to ground the shields to the shield block should penetrate two to four threads past the
shield block when installed. If the screws are too long, they could potentially damage the wires going into
the backshell.
Each tapped hole on the backshell can accommodate only two ring terminals (15). It is preferred that only
two wires (13) be terminated per ring terminal. Two wires per ring terminal will necessitate the use of a
ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG (MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left or if only a single
wire is needed for this connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can
accommodate this single wire. If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is
permissible to terminate three wires per ring terminal.
Prepare all of the shielded cables as shown in figure 4-2. See figure 4-3 For details of the shield
termination to the connector backshell. Skip to step 5 below for wires with no shielding.
1. At the end of the shielded cable (11), strip back a 2.5" maximum length of the jacket to expose the
braid. Remove this exposed braid. Carefully score the jacket 1/4" to 5/16" from the end and
remove the jacket to leave the braid exposed.
2. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (13) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. See
figure 4-2.
NOTE
Alternatively, use a Raychem S-2 series solder sleeve with the thermochromic temperature
indicator. These solder sleeves come with a pre-installed lead and effectively take the
place of items 12 and 13. For detailed instructions on product use, refer to Raychem
installation procedure.
3. Slide a shield terminator (12) onto the prepared cable assembly (11) and connect the wire (13) to
the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The chosen size of solder sleeve
must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable and the wire (13) to be
attached.
4. For the remaining shielded cables, repeat steps 1 through 3 as needed.
5. Crimp pins/sockets (14) onto the wires and terminate in the connector (10) in accordance with the
aircraft wiring drawings.
6. For P1001, install the configuration module wires into the connector. For instructions on installing
the configuration module, see section 4.12.1.2.
Complete the following steps to assemble the backshell onto the connector, see figure 4-1.
1. Attach the shield block (2) to the backshell (1) by inserting the flathead screws (3) through the
holes on the shield block and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (1). See figure 4-1.
2. Wrap the wire harness with silicone fusion tape (19 or a similar version) at the point where the
backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the wire harness.
3. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief (7) across the wire harness and secure using the
two screws (6). Ensure that each half of the strain relief bar is supporting half of the wire harness.
CAUTION
Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the wire harness may damage wires.
4. For P1001, install the configuration module into the connector backshell. For instructions on
installing the configuration module into the backshell, see section 4.12.1.2.
5. Attach the cover (8) to the backshell with two screws (9).

Rev. N Page 4-16
6. Install ring terminals (15) onto the shield drain wires (13), grouping wires as appropriate for the
connector.
7. Terminate the ring terminals to the shield block (2) by placing items on the pan head screw (16) in
the following order: split washer (17), flat washer (18), first ring terminal, second ring terminal if
needed, before finally inserting the screw into the tapped holes on the shield block.
8. Insert the assembled connector into the backplate. Using screws (3), secure the connector into the
backplate.
4.12.1.2 Configuration Module Installation (P1001 Only)
GTN P1001 connector assemblies serve as the housing for a configuration module. This section lists the
two configuration module assemblies that are supplied with GTN installation kits.
Table 4-18 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart
Color Function P1001 Contact
Red Vcc 65
Black Ground 64
Yellow Data 62
White Clock 63
NOTE
The pin contacts supplied with the GTN configuration module are specifically made to
accommodate 28 AWG wire.

Rev. N Page 4-17
4.12.1.2.1 Configuration Module Assembly with Potted PCB
Details and item numbers in the following procedure are shown in figure 4-4.
1. Strip 0.17" of insulation from each wire prior to crimping.
2. Crimp pins (4) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert the newly crimped pins and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing (5) locations
shown in figure 4-4 and figure D-4.
4. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB (1).
5. Insert the PCB (1) into the backshell (6) recess.
6. Attach cover (7) to backshell (6) using screws (8).
Table 4-19 Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-03 (P1001)
See
Description Garmin P/N
Figure 4-4
1 Configuration module, PCB board assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00
3 4-conductor harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin contact, crimp, #22D 336-00021-00

Figure 4-4 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module)

Rev. N Page 4-18
4.12.1.2.2 Configuration Module Assembly with Spacer
NOTE
Configuration module assembly P/N 011-00979-00 may not be available for new GTN
installations. For new GTN installations, see section 4.12.1.2.
Table 4-20 Configuration Module Kit 011-00979-00 (P1001)
See
Figure 4-5
1 Configuration module, PCB board assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, configuration module 213-00043-00
3 4-conductor harness 325-00122-00
For details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure, see figure 4-5.
2. Crimp socket contacts (4) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing
location shown in figure 4-5 and figure D-4.
4. Apply the spacer (2) by wrapping it around the PCB board (1) making sure to insert the plastic
connector mounted on the board into the hole provided in the spacer.
5. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB board (1).
6. With spacer (2) in position, insert PCB board (1) into the backshell recess.
7. Orient the connector housing so that the inserted four conductor wire harness (3) is on the same
side of the backshell as the inserted PCB board (1).

Rev. N Page 4-19
Figure 4-5 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer)

Rev. N Page 4-20
4.12.2 GTN Fan Installation
Table 4-21 lists part numbers for the fan kit, which is used with P1001 only.
Table 4-21 Fan Kit (P1001 Only)
See
Figure 4-6
1 Fan cable assembly, 3 conductor harness 320-00600-00
3 Silicone fusion tape 249-00114-00
Table 4-22 Fan Cable Wire Color Reference Chart

Color Function P1001 Contact
Red Power 59
Black Ground 43
Yellow Fan tachometer 58
The GTN backplate assembly has a cooling fan mounted to it. The cooling fan is mounted to the backplate
assembly at the factory. The fan is necessary for proper cooling and air circulation within the unit. The fan
is powered from the GTN and must be wired to the GTN connector, P1001.
2. Crimp socket contacts onto each wire of the three-conductor wire harness.
3. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires into the appropriate connector housing location as
shown in figure 4-6 and the interconnect drawings in appendix D.
4. Plug the three-conductor wire harness connector into the connector on the fan.

Rev. N Page 4-21
NOTES
DUE TO INSUFFICIENT CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE FAN CASING AND TERMINAL LUGS, DO NOT USE THE
1 THREE TAPPED HOLES ON THE SHIELD BLOCK ABOVE THE FAN.
TO PREVENT THE FAN WIRES FROM BEING DISLODGED OR DAMAGED FROM EXCESS MOVEMENT. WRAP
2 FAN WIRES WITH SILICONE FUSION TAPE SEPARATELY FROM THE MAIN HARNESS.
3 ENSURE THE FAN WIRES DO NOT EXCEED EIGHT INCHES IN LENGTH.
Figure 4-6 Fan Wiring Installation

Rev. N Page 4-22
5 CONNECTOR PINOUT INFORMATION
5.1 Pin Function List
5.1.1 P1001 Connector – Main Board
(View looking at rear of unit, Pin 1 is top right)
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
Table 5-1 P1001 Connector

Pin Pin Name I/O
1 MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) --
2 MAIN OBS ROTOR C Out
3 TIME MARK OUT A Out
4 AUDIO OUT HI Out
5 RS-232 OUT 4 Out
6 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
7 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
8 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
9 ARINC 429 OUT 2A Out
11 MAIN +TO OUT Out
12 MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT Out
13 MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out
14 OBS ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
15 GPS ANNUNCIATE* Out
16 OBS MODE SELECT* [1] In
17 LIGHTING BUS 1 LO In
18 LIGHTING BUS 1 HI In
19 AIRCRAFT POWER In
21 MAIN OBS STATOR D In
22 TIME MARK OUT B Out
23 AUDIO OUT LO Out
24 RS-232 IN 4 In
25 RS-232 IN 3 In
26 RS-232 IN 2 In
27 RS-232 IN 1 In
28 ARINC 429 OUT 2B Out
30 MAIN +FROM OUT Out
31 MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT Out
32 MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out
33 WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
34 TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* [1] Out
36 AUDIO INHIBIT IN* [1] In

Rev. N Page 5-1
Pin Pin Name I/O
37 TAWS INHIBIT IN* [1] In
38 AIR/GROUND* [1] In
39 CDI SOURCE SELECT* [1] In
40 MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) --
41 MAIN OBS STATOR F In
42 LIGHTING BUS 2 LO In
43 FAN GROUND --
44 RS-232 GND 3/4 --
45 RS-232 GND 2 --
46 RS-232 GND 1 --
47 ARINC 429 IN 2A In
49 MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT Out
50 MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT Out
51 MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT Out
52 VOR/LOC ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
53 LOI ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
54 MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
55 APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
56 ILS/GPS APPROACH* Out
57 TAWS INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
58 FAN TACH IN In
59 FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) Out
60 MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) --
61 LIGHTING BUS 2 HI In
62 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
63 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
64 CONFIG MODULE GND Out
65 CONFIG MODULE POWER Out
66 ARINC 429 IN 2B In
68 MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT Out
69 MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT Out
70 MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT Out
71 TERRAIN WARNING ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
72 TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
73 TERRAIN CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
74 GPS SELECT* [1] Out
75 TRAFFIC TEST* [1] Out
76 TRAFFIC STANDBY* [1] Out
77 AIRCRAFT GND --
78 AIRCRAFT GND --
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate. If there is no asterisk, the signal is an Active-High.
[1] This discrete may be configured to perform another function. See section 6.6.14 for more
information.

Rev. N Page 5-2
5.1.2 P1002 Connector – Main Board
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
18 17 16 15 14 13 11 10
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19

Pin Pin Name I/O
1 DEMO MODE SELECT* In
2 RESERVED --
3 SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* [1] Out
4 ETHERNET OUT 4A Out
5 ETHERNET OUT 4B Out
6 ETHERNET IN 1A In
7 ETHERNET IN 1B In
10 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* [2] In
11 GSR STATUS IN* [1] In
12 GSR REMOTE POWER OUT* [1] Out
13 ETHERNET IN 4A In
14 ETHERNET IN 4B In
19 RESERVED In
20 RESERVED In
21 RESERVED Out
22 RESERVED Out
[1] This discrete may be configured to perform another function. See section 6.6.14 for more
information.
[2] In software v5.00 or later, the SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* pin is no longer used. Instead, the
System ID is set through the System ID setting. For more information, see section 6.6.10.

Rev. N Page 5-3
5.1.3 P1003 Connector – COM Board (GTN 750 Only)
15 14 13 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

Pin Pin Name I/O
1 RESERVED --
2 RESERVED --
3 RESERVED --
4 RESERVED --
5 COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI In
6 RESERVED --
7 500Ω COM AUDIO HI Out
8 RESERVED --
9 RESERVED --
10 RESERVED --
11 COM MIC 1 KEY* In
12 INTERCOM ENABLE* RESERVED In
13 RESERVED --
14 RESERVED --
15 RESERVED --
16 RESERVED --
17 RESERVED --
18 500Ω COM AUDIO LO --
19 RESERVED --
20 MIC AUDIO IN LO In
21 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED --
23 RESERVED --
24 RESERVED -
25 RESERVED -
26 RESERVED -
27 COM REMOTE TRANSFER* In
28 COM REMOTE TUNE UP* In
29 COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* In
31 RESERVED --
32 RESERVED --
33 RESERVED --
34 RESERVED --
35 RESERVED --
36 RESERVED --
37 AIRCRAFT GND --
38 AIRCRAFT GND --
39 RESERVED --
40 AIRCRAFT GND --
41 RESERVED --

Rev. N Page 5-4
Pin Pin Name I/O
42 RESERVED --

Rev. N Page 5-5
5.1.4 P1004 Connector – NAV Board (GTN 750 Only)
(View looking at rear of unit, Pin 1 is on bottom left)
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

Pin Pin Name I/O
1 VOR/LOC +TO Out
2 VOR/LOC +FROM Out
3 VOR/LOC +FLAG Out
4 VOR/LOC -FLAG Out
5 VOR/LOC +LEFT Out
6 VOR/LOC +RIGHT Out
7 RESERVED --
8 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT Out
9 VOR OBS ROTOR C Out
10 VOR OBS ROTOR H (GND) --
11 VOR OBS STATOR E (GND) --
12 VOR OBS STATOR F In
13 VOR OBS STATOR D In
14 VOR OBS STATOR G (GND) --
15 VOR/LOC SUPERFLAG Out
16 500Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI Out
17 500Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO Out
18 SERIAL DME - CLOCK In/Out
19 SERIAL DME - DATA In/Out
20 SERIAL DME- RNAV/CH REQ In
21 SERIAL DME - RNAV MODE In
22 AIRCRAFT GND --
23 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B Out
24 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A Out
25 VOR OBI CLOCK Out
26 VOR OBI SYNC Out
27 VOR OBI DATA Out
28 VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER In
29 ILS ENERGIZE Out
30 RESERVED --
31 RESERVED --
32 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG Out
33 PAR DME 1MHZ-D/SERIAL DME ON Out
34 GLIDESLOPE +UP Out
35 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN B In
36 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN A In
37 PAR DME 100KHZ-A/SERIAL DME HOLD Out
38 GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG Out
39 PAR DME 100KHZ-B Out
40 PAR DME 100KHZ-C Out

Rev. N Page 5-6
Pin Pin Name I/O
41 DME COMMON In
42 PAR DME 100KHZ-D Out
43 PAR DME 50KHZ Out
44 SERIAL DME - DME REQUEST In/Out
45 PAR DME 1MHZ-A Out
46 PAR DME 1MHZ-B Out
47 PAR DME 1MHZ-C Out
48 RESERVED --
49 AIRCRAFT GND --
50 RESERVED --
53 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG Out
54 PAR DME 100KHZ-E Out
55 GLIDESLOPE +DOWN Out
56 PAR DME 1MHZ-E Out
57 RESERVED --
58 GLIDESLOPE COMPOSITE OUT Out
59 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Out
60 AIRCRAFT GND --
61 AIRCRAFT GND --
62 AIRCRAFT GND --

Rev. N Page 5-7
5.1.5 P1005 Connector – I/O Board
(View looking at rear of unit, Pin 1 is on bottom left)

Pin Pin Name I/O
1 RESERVED --
2 RESERVED --
3 RESERVED --
4 RESERVED --
5 RESERVED --
6 RESERVED --
8 RS-232 OUT 5 Out
9 RS-232 OUT 6 Out
10 RESERVED --
11 RESERVED --
12 RESERVED --
13 WX RADAR ON* Out
14 SYNCHRO Y In
15 SYNCHRO REF LO In
18 ARINC 453/708 IN 1A In
19 ARINC 453/708 TERM 1B --
20 ARINC 453/708 IN 2A In
21 ARINC 453/708 TERM 2B --
22 RESERVED --
23 RESERVED --
24 RESERVED --
25 RESERVED --
26 RESERVED --
27 RESERVED --
29 RS-232 IN 5 In
30 RS-232 IN 6 In
31 RESERVED --
32 RESERVED --
33 SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE LO) In
34 SPARE OUTPUT C Out
35 SYNCHRO X In
36 SYNCHRO REF HIGH In
39 RESERVED --

Rev. N Page 5-8
Pin Pin Name I/O
40 ARINC 453/708 TERM 1A --
41 RESERVED --
42 ARINC 453/708 TERM 2A --
43 RESERVED --
44 RESERVED --
45 RESERVED --
46 RESERVED --
47 RESERVED --
48 RESERVED --
49 RS-232 GND 5 --
50 RS-232 GND 6 --
51 RESERVED --
52 RESERVED --
53 SPARE INPUT 1 --
54 SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE HI) In
55 RESERVED --
56 SYNCHRO Z In
57 RESERVED --
58 RESERVED --
59 RESERVED --
60 ARINC 453/708 IN 1B In
61 RESERVED --
62 ARINC 453/708 IN 2B In

Rev. N Page 5-9
5.2 Power, Lighting, and Antennas
This section covers the power input requirements, lighting bus input, and antenna connections. 
See appendix D for interconnect information.
5.2.1 Power
Table 5-6 Power Pins
Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
AIRCRAFT POWER (MAIN) P1001 19 In
AIRCRAFT POWER (MAIN) P1001 20 In
AIRCRAFT POWER (COM) P1003 30 In
AIRCRAFT POWER (NAV) P1004 51 In
AIRCRAFT POWER (NAV) P1004 52 In
AIRCRAFT GROUND (MAIN) P1001 77 --
AIRCRAFT GROUND (MAIN) P1001 78 --
AIRCRAFT GROUND (COM) P1003 37 --
AIRCRAFT GROUND (NAV) P1004 60 --
Power inputs P1001-19 and P1001-20 provide power for everything except for the COM radio and NAV
radio. Both pins must be connected.
Power inputs P1003-30, P1003-43, and P1003-44 provide power for the COM radio. All three pins must be
connected.
Power inputs P1004-51 and P1004-52 provide power for the NAV radio. Both pins must be connected.
5.2.2 Lighting Bus
CAUTION
Connection of the lighting bus to incorrect pins can cause damage to the unit that will
require return to the factory for repair. Ensure that the lighting bus is connected to the
correct pins and does not short to any adjacent pins prior to applying power to the unit,
including the lighting bus.
Table 5-7 Lighting Bus Pins

LIGHTING BUS 1 HI P1001 18 In
LIGHTING BUS 1 LO P1001 17 In
LIGHTING BUS 2 HI P1001 61 In
LIGHTING BUS 2 LO P1001 42 In
The GTN can be configured to track 28 VDC, 14 VDC, 5 VDC or 5 VAC lighting buses using these inputs.
Two lighting buses allow for independent control of display and bezel lighting. Alternatively, the GTN can
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions based on the photocell. See section 6.6.6 for
instructions on configuring the lighting inputs.

Rev. N Page 5-10
5.2.3 Antennas
Table 5-8 Antenna Connectors
Pin Name Connector I/O
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA P1006 In
COM ANTENNA P1007 I/O
NAV ANTENNA P1008 In
The GPS/SBAS antenna use a TNC coaxial connector on the connector backplate. The COM and NAV
antennas use BNC coaxial connectors on the connector backplate. See figure D-5 for splitter/diplexer
block diagrams.
5.2.4 Serial Data
5.2.4.1 RS-232
The GTN interfaces with other aviation instruments by transmitting RS-232 Type 1 and Type 2 data on any
RS-232 OUT port. See appendix section B.1 for a detailed data format description of the following.
 Current latitude, longitude, and GPS altitude in feet (see note below)
 Current velocity vector (ground speed and direction of velocity vector over the ground)
 Distance to waypoint
 Cross track error
 Desired track
 Destination waypoint identifier
 Bearing to destination waypoint
 Magnetic variation
 Navigation and warning status
 Waypoint sequence in route
 Waypoint position (latitude and longitude) and magnetic variation
NOTE
Aviation RS-232 data may be transmitted with or without the current GPS altitude in feet.
See appendix B.
The GTN can receive pressure altitude, air data, and fuel data from certain systems on any RS-232 IN port.

Rev. N Page 5-11
5.2.4.2 ARINC 429
Data output on the ARINC 429 OUT ports depends on the configuration, see section 6.6.1. Below is a list
of the configurations and the labels output for each one.
1 ARINC 429
2 GAMA Format 1
3 GAMA Format 2
4 GAMA Format 3
5 GAMA Format 4
6 GAMA Format 5
7 GAMA Format 6
8 GAMA Format 7
9 GAMA Format 8
Table 5-9 ARINC 429 Labels
Label # Parameter Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
001 Distance to Go (BCD) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
002 Time to Go (BCD) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
012 Ground Speed (BCD) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
074G Data Record Header ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
075G Active Wpt From/To Data ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
076 GPS Altitude (MSL) ●
100 Selected Course 1 ●
100P Selected Course 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
113G Message Checksum ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
114 Desired Track (True) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
115 Waypoint Bearing (True) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
116 Cross Track Distance ●
116G [1] Cross Track Distance ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
117G Vertical Deviation ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
117P Vertical Deviation ●
121 Horizontal Command (to Autopilot) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
125 Greenwich Mean Time (BCD) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
130 Autonomous Horizontal Integrity ●
133 Autonomous Vertical Integrity Limit ●
136 Vertical FOM ●
142 Vertical Velocity FOM [5] ●
145 Horizontal Velocity FOM [5] ●
147G Magnetic Variation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
150 Greenwich Mean Time (BNR) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
165 Vertical Velocity ●
173 Localizer Deviation (BNR) [5] ● ●
174 Glideslope Deviation (BNR) [5] ● ●
220 GNSS Latitude Fine [5] ●
221 GNSS Longitude Fine [5] ●
247 Horizontal FOM ●

Rev. N Page 5-12
Label # Parameter Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
251 Distance to Go ●
251G Distance to Go ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
252 Time to Go ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
260G Date (BCD) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
261G GPS Discrete Word 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
266 MOT Bearing [5] ●
267 MOT Range [5] ●
271 FMS Failure Word [5] ●
273 GAD Configuration [4] ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
275G LRN Status Word ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
300G Station Declination, Type, and Class ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
303 Message Length/Type/Number ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
304G Message Characters 1-3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
305G Message Characters 4-6 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
306G NAV/Waypoint/Airport Latitude ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
307G NAV/Waypoint/Airport Longitude ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
310 Present Position Latitude ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
311 Present Position Longitude ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
312 Ground Speed ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
313 Track Angle (True) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
314 True Heading ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
315 Wind Speed ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
316 Wind Angle (True) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
320 Magnetic Heading ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
321 Drift Angle ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
326G [1] Lateral Scale Factor ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
327G Vertical Scale Factor ● ● ● ● ● ●
330 Conic Arc Inbound Course [6] ● ● ●
331 Conic Arc Radius [6] ● ● ●
332 Conic Arc Course Change Angle [6] ● ● ●
333 Airport Runway Azimuth [6] ● ● ●
334 Airport Runway Length in Feet [6] ● ● ●
335 Left/Right Hand Holding Pattern Azimuth [6] ● ● ●
340 Left/Right Hand Procedure Turn Azimuth [6] ● ● ●
351G Distance to Destination (Via Flight Plan) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
352G Estimated Time to Destination (Via Flight Plan) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
366 NS Velocity ●
367 EW Velocity ●
370 GPS Height WGS84 ●
371G Specific Equipment ID ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
377 Equipment Hex ID Code ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[1] Label 116G and 326G utilize the optional resolution extension bits (bits 11-13).
[2] Labels 074G, 300G, 330, 331, 332, 333, 334, 335, and 340 are dependent upon the flight plan
records as defined in the GAMA Publication No. 11: ARINC 429 General Aviation Subset and
therefore are not transmitted at a periodic rate.

Rev. N Page 5-13
[3] Label 075G for GAMA Format 4 is transmitted immediately after the transmission of label 074
(see Note [1]) and therefore is not transmitted at a periodic rate.
[4] Label 273 will be transmitted only after a GAD 42 configuration change is made on the 
GAD 42 configuration page.
[5] These labels do not conform to the standard label definition. Use these formats with caution.
[6] These labels can be disabled when using GAMA Format 8 by selecting “More A429 Setup” on
the ARINC 429 Configuration page and disabling GAMA Graphics.
The following labels are output on ARINC 429 OUT 3 when configured to Radar Format 1.
Table 5-10 ARINC 429 OUT 3 Labels
Label # Parameter Name
270 Radar Control Word 1
271 Radar Control Word 2
273 Vertical Profile Word 3
The following labels are output on the VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT port of the GTN 750 only.
Table 5-11 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT Labels
034G VOR/ILS Frequency (BCD)
035G DME Frequency (BCD)
100G Selected Course #1
173 Localizer Deviation
174 Glideslope Deviation
222 VOR Omnibearing
371G Specific Equipment ID
377 Equipment Hex ID Code

Rev. N Page 5-14
The following labels are output on the ARINC output at a frequency of 5 Hz, synchronized with the PPS
signal when configured to ARINC 743a format.
Table 5-12 ARINC Output Labels
076 GNSS Altitude (MSL)
101 HDOP
102 VDOP
103 GNSS Track Angle
110 GNSS Latitude
111 GNSS Longitude
112 GNSS Ground Speed
120 GNSS Latitude Fine
121 GNSS Longitude Find
125 UTC Time of Day (BCD)
130 Horizontal Protection Level
133 Vertical Integrity Limit
136 Vertical Figure of Merit
140 UTC Fine
142 Vertical Velocity Figure of Merit
145 Horizontal Velocity Figure of Merit
150 UTC Time of Day
165 Vertical GPS Velocity
166 North/South Velocity
174 East/West Velocity
247 Horizontal Figure of Merit
260 Date (BCD)
273 GNSS Sensor Status
355 GNSS Fault Summary
370 GNSS Height (HAE)
377 Equipment ID (00B)

Rev. N Page 5-15
5.2.4.3 Serial Data Electrical Characteristics
Table 5-13 RS-232
RS-232 OUT 1 P1001 8 Out
RS-232 IN 1 P1001 27 In
RS-232 GND 1 P1001 46 --
RS-232 OUT 2 P1001 7 Out
RS-232 IN 2 P1001 26 In
RS-232 GND 2 P1001 45 --
RS-232 OUT 3 P1001 6 Out
RS-232 IN 3 P1001 25 In
RS-232 GND 3/4 P1001 44 --
RS-232 OUT 4 P1001 5 Out
RS-232 IN 4 P1001 24 In
RS-232 OUT 5 P1005 8 Out
RS-232 IN 5 P1005 29 In
RS-232 GND 5 P1005 49 --
RS-232 OUT 6 P1005 9 Out
RS-232 IN 6 P1005 30 In
RS-232 GND 6 P1005 50 --
RS-232 outputs are compatible with EIA Standard RS-232C with an output voltage swing of at least ±5 V
when driving a standard RS-232 load.
Table 5-14 ARINC 429
ARINC 429 OUT 1A P1001 10 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 1B P1001 29 Out
ARINC 429 IN 1A P1001 48 In
ARINC 429 IN 1B P1001 67 In
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A P1004 24 Out
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B P1004 23 Out
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN A P1004 36 In
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN B P1004 35 In
ARINC 429 outputs conform to ARINC 429 electrical specifications when loaded with up to five standard
ARINC 429 receivers.

Rev. N Page 5-16
5.2.5 Ethernet (HSDB)
Table 5-15 Ethernet
ETHERNET OUT 1 A P1002 8 Out
ETHERNET OUT 1 B P1002 9 Out
ETHERNET IN 1 A P1002 6 In
ETHERNET IN 1 B P1002 7 In
The Ethernet-based HSDB (High Speed Data Bus) meets the hardware aspects of IEEE standard 802.3 for
10Base-T Ethernet communications.
5.2.6 Main Audio Output
The main audio output is used to play the sounds associated with the touch screen, as well as TAWS/
HTAWS alerts on GTN units that are equipped with TAWS/HTAWS.
Table 5-16 Main Audio Output
AUDIO OUT HI P1001 4 Out
AUDIO OUT LO P1001 23 Out
The audio output is 60 mW across a 500 Ω load.

Rev. N Page 5-17
5.2.7 Main Indicator
5.2.7.1 Main Indicator Function
The main indicator displays both lateral and vertical deviation from selected course, to/from indications,
lateral and vertical flags and superflags.
The CDI key on the screen of the GTN takes the place of remote NAV/GPS switches, and is used to toggle
between display of GPS and VOR/ILS navigation on a remote indicator. The navigation source is
annunciated on the display below the CDI key. The navigation method is optionally annunciated
externally by connecting to the VOR/LOC ANNUNCIATE output (P1001-52) and GPS ANNUNCIATE
output (P1001-15). GPS and VOR/ILS navigation may be toggled externally when the CDI SOURCE
SELECT input (P1001-39) is momentarily grounded. See section 5.2.8 and section 5.2.9 for more
information on the discrete inputs and outputs.
An OBS resolver connection to the GPS is preferred, but not required. For the GTN 750, an OBS resolver
typically is connected to the MAIN OBS inputs for use with the VOR receiver.
5.2.7.2 Main Indicator Electrical Characteristics
Table 5-17 Deviation
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT P1001 49 Out
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT P1001 68 Out
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT P1001 12 Out
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT P1001 31 Out
The deviation output drives up to three 1000  loads with +150 mVDC +15 mVDC for full-scale
deflection, 0 mVDC +9.9 mVDC when centered. The drive circuit provides for more than full-scale
deflection with a maximum course deviation output voltage of +300 mVDC +30 mVDC.
Table 5-18 TO/FROM
MAIN +TO OUT P1001 11 Out
MAIN +FROM OUT P1001 30 Out
The TO/FROM output drives up to three 200  loads. When indicating TO, MAIN +TO OUT is +225 ±75
mVDC with respect to MAIN +FROM OUT. When indicating FROM, MAIN +TO OUT is -225 ±75
mVDC with respect to MAIN +FROM OUT. When invalid information is present (Flag IN VIEW) the
TO/FROM output is 0 ±20 mVDC.
Table 5-19 Flag
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT P1001 50 Out
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT P1001 69 Out
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT P1001 51 Out
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT P1001 70 Out
Flag outputs drive up to three 1000  loads. When valid information is present (Flag OUT OF VIEW) the
Flag output is 375 ±80 mVDC. When invalid information is present (Flag IN VIEW) the Flag output is 0
±25 mVDC.

Rev. N Page 5-18
Table 5-20 Superflags
MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT P1001 13 Out
MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT P1001 32 Out
The superflag output supplies not less than 320 mA with the output voltage not less than (AIRCRAFT
POWER –2.0 VDC) when the flag is to be OUT OF VIEW. The output is electrically open when the flag is
to be IN VIEW.
Table 5-21 OBS
MAIN OBS ROTOR C P1001 2 Out
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) P1001 1 --
MAIN OBS STATOR D P1001 21 In
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) P1001 40 --
MAIN OBS STATOR F P1001 41 In
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) P1001 60 --
MAIN OBS ROTOR C and H (GND) are a buffered output that is intended to drive the OBS rotors.
MAIN OBS STATOR D and MAIN OBS STATOR F are each amplitude shifted versions of the MAIN
ROTOR C output. Each pair is intended to read one of the two windings of the indicator’s OBS stator.

Rev. N Page 5-19
5.2.8 Discrete Inputs
NOTE
Default settings for discrete inputs are shown in table 5-22. Configuring discretes
enables them to perform other functions. See section 6.6.14.
Table 5-22 Discrete Input Defaults
OBS MODE SELECT* P1001 16 In
TAWS AUDIO INHIBIT IN* P1001 36 In
TAWS INHIBIT IN* P1001 37 In
AIR/GROUND* [1] P1001 38 In
CDI SOURCE SELECT* P1001 39 In
DEMO MODE SELECT* P1002 1 In
SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* P1002 10 In
GSR STATUS IN* P1002 11 In
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT - LOW P1005 33 In
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT - HIGH P1005 54 In
OFF P1005 53 In
DAY/NIGHT* -- -- In
MARK ON TARGET* -- -- In
RP MODE* -- -- In
REMOTE GO AROUND* -- -- In
HTAWS ALERT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT* -- -- In
FLAP OVERRIDE* -- -- In
FLAP POSITION* [1] -- -- In
GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT* -- -- In
GPWS INHIBIT* -- -- In
LANDING GEAR POSITION* [1] -- -- In
[1] These discrete functions must not be configured for use on P1002-10 or P1001-39.
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate. If there is no asterisk, the signal is Active-High.
Active-Low discrete inputs are considered active if either the voltage to ground is ≤3.5 VDC or the
resistance to ground is ≤375 . These inputs are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is 
6.5-33 VDC or the resistance to ground is >100 k.
Active-High discrete inputs are considered active if either the voltage to ground is >6.5 VDC. These inputs
are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is ≤3.5 VDC or the resistance to ground is ≤375 .
5.2.8.1 OBS MODE SELECT*
The OBS MODE SELECT* discrete input is used to toggle between GPS OBS and GPS AUTO modes of
operation. A momentary low on this pin performs the same function as touching the OBS key on the GTN
display.
5.2.8.2 AUDIO INHIBIT IN*
The AUDIO INHIBIT IN* discrete input is used to suppress TAWS/HTAWS and touchscreen feedback
audio from the GTN.

Rev. N Page 5-20
5.2.8.3 TAWS INHIBIT IN*
The TAWS INHIBIT IN* discrete input, when toggled momentarily low, is used to inhibit TAWS/
HTAWS alerts from the GTN.
5.2.8.4 AIR/GROUND*
The AIR/GROUND* discrete is an Active-Low, and is configured to interpret if the aircraft is airborne or
on the ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open.
5.2.8.5 CDI SOURCE SELECT* (GTN 750 Only)
The CDI SOURCE SELECT* discrete input is used to toggle between display of GPS and VOR/LOC/
Glideslope information on the MAIN external CDI/HSI. A momentary low on this pin performs the same
function as touching the CDI key on the GTN display.
5.2.8.6 DEMO MODE SELECT*
The DEMO MODE SELECT* discrete input is used to select Demo Mode on the GTN. When this pin is
connected to ground during power up, the GTN starts up in Demo Mode. Demo Mode allows the GTN to
simulate reception of GPS satellite signals. Demo Mode can also be accessed by holding down the D
key during power-up.
CAUTION
Do not connect DEMO MODE SELECT* in an aircraft installation.
NOTE
Garmin has worked closely with Lone Star Aviation Corporation to ensure compatibility
of their Commander Docking Station which is designed to be used in Demo Mode. Contact
Lone Star Sales Department for more information at (682) 518-8831.
5.2.8.7 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* (Software Versions Prior to v5.00)
The SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* discrete input is used to identify GTN #2 in an installation with more than
one GTN. This input must be strapped to ground on the second GTN.
Table 5-23 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* DISCRETE
SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* GTN Installation
Open GTN #1 or single-GTN installation
Ground GTN #2
In software v5.00 or later, the SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* pin is no longer used. Instead, the System ID is
set through the System ID setting. For more information, see section 6.6.10.
5.2.8.8 GSR STATUS IN*
The GSR STATUS IN* is an active-low discrete input that is used to receive the status of the GSR 56.
5.2.8.9 DAY/NIGHT*
The DAY/NIGHT* discrete input is used to toggle between the day and night lighting curves when the
enhanced lighting configuration is used. For more information see section 6.6.7.
5.2.8.10 MARK ON TARGET*
The MARK ON TARGET* discrete input, when toggled momentarily low, creates a user waypoint at the
aircraft's present location.

Rev. N Page 5-21
5.2.8.11 RP MODE*
The RP MODE* discrete input, when toggled momentarily low, is used to place the HTAWS system in
reduced protection mode.
5.2.8.12 REMOTE GO AROUND*
The REMOTE GO AROUND* discrete input, when toggled momentarily low, is used to activate the
missed approach.
5.2.8.13 HTAWS ALERT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT*
The HTAWS ALERT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT* discrete input, when toggled momentarily low, mutes
all active HTAWS cautions until all alerts have ceased while not in RP Mode. In RP Mode, this input will
quiet warning aurals for 10 seconds.
5.2.8.14 FLAP OVERRIDE*
The FLAP OVERRIDE* discrete input is used to activate the Flap Override mode of the GTN for 
TAWS-A installations.
5.2.8.15 FLAP POSITION*
The FLAP POSITION* discrete input must be connected to the flap position sensor/switch in TAWS-A
installations to indicate if the aircraft flaps are in the landing configuration. This discrete can be configured
for “Active for Landing” or “Active for Non-Landing” on the TAWS Settings page of the Terrain
Configuration page. See section 6.7.1 for more information.
5.2.8.16 GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT*
The GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT* discrete input is used to inhibit the glideslope alerting function for 
TAWS-A installations.
5.2.8.17 GPWS INHIBIT*
The GPWS INHIBIT* discrete input is used to inhibit the GPWS modes of the GTN for TAWS-A
installations.
5.2.8.18 LANDING GEAR POSITION*
The LANDING GEAR POSITION* must be connected to landing gear position sensor in TAWS-A
installations to indicate if the aircraft landing gear is in the landing configuration. This discrete can be
configured for “Active for Landing” or “Active for Non-Landing” on the TAWS Settings page of the
Terrain Configuration page. See section 6.7.1 for more information.

Rev. N Page 5-22
5.2.9 Discrete Outputs
NOTE
Default settings for discrete outputs are shown in table 5-24. Configuring discretes
enables them to perform other functions. See section 6.6.14.
Table 5-24 Discrete Output Defaults
OBS ANNUNCIATE* P1001 14 Out
GPS ANNUNCIATE* P1001 15 Out
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* P1001 33 Out
TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* P1001 34 Out
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE ANNUNCIATE* P1001 35 Out
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* P1001 52 Out
LOI ANNUNCIATE* P1001 53 Out
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* P1001 54 Out
APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* P1001 55 Out
ILS/GPS APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* P1001 56 Out
TAWS/TERRAIN INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* P1001 57 Out
TAWS WARNING ANNUNCIATE* P1001 71 Out
TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE* P1001 72 Out
TAWS CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* P1001 73 Out
GPS SELECT ANNUNCIATE* [1] P1001 74 Out
TRAFFIC TEST ANNUNCIATE* P1001 75 Out
TRAFFIC STANDBY/OPERATE ANNUNCIATE* P1001 76 Out
SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* P1002 3 Out
GSR REMOTE POWER* P1002 12 Out
OFF P1005 34 Out
RADAR ON* P1005 13 Out
FLAP OVERRIDE ANNUNCIATE* -- -- Out
GLIDESLOPE CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* -- -- Out
GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* -- -- Out
GPWS INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* -- -- Out
GPWS NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE* -- -- Out
GSR AUDIO ATTENUATE* -- -- Out
RP MODE ANNUNCIATE* -- -- Out
[1] The operation of the GPS SELECT can be configured,. See section 6.6.10.
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, producing a low (ground)
on the output when active.
All discrete outputs from the GTN are Active-Low. Each is an open drain output capable of sinking 
500 mA when active.

Rev. N Page 5-23
5.2.9.1 OBS ANNUNCIATE*
The OBS ANNUNCIATE* output is driven to indicate GPS OBS mode of operation. This output is active
when the OBS annunciation is on the display.
5.2.9.2 GPS ANNUNCIATE*
The GPS ANNUNCIATE* output is driven when the unit is configured with a single CDI/HSI and the
GPS data is being displayed on the CDI/HSI. This output parallels the GPS annunciation on the display.
5.2.9.3 WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE*
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE* output is driven in the following manner.
 When the aircraft is within 10 seconds of reaching the turning point for a course change, the
waypoint annunciator flashes
 When the aircraft is in a turn, the waypoint annunciator illuminates and remains illuminated until
the turn is completed
 When a user arrival alarm is set and the aircraft is within the circle defined by the arrival alarm
radius at the arrival waypoint, the waypoint annunciator flashes for 10 seconds
 When a user arrival alarm is not set and the aircraft is within 10 seconds of reaching the arrival
waypoint, the waypoint annunciator flashes
5.2.9.4 TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE*
When performing approach navigation, the TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE* output is active when operating
within 30 nautical miles of the departure or arrival airport and the CDI scale is the equivalent or 1.0 nm or
less.
5.2.9.5 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE ANNUNCIATE*
The TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE ANNUNCIATE* is active when the GTN is issuing a TAWS audio alert.
This output can be connected to the Audio Inhibit input of other units with audio that is lower priority than
TAWS.
5.2.9.6 VLOC ANNUNCIATE* (GTN 750 Only)
The VLOC ANNUNCIATE* output is driven when the unit is configured with a single CDI/HSI and the
VOR/ILS data is being displayed on the CDI/HSI. This output parallels the VOR/LOC annunciator on the
display.
5.2.9.7 LOI ANNUNCIATE*
The LOI ANNUNCIATE* output is active when the GPS receiver detects a position error, or is unable to
calculate the integrity of the position. On the 400W/500W Series navigators, this output is called “Integrity
Annunciate.”
5.2.9.8 MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE*
When a new status message is available, the MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE* output is active and the
message annunciator flashes. When status messages remain effective, the message annunciator illuminates
continuously.
5.2.9.9 APPROACH ANNUNCIATE*
When performing approach navigation, the APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* output is active while an
approach is active.

Rev. N Page 5-24
5.2.9.10 ILS/GPS APPROACH ANNUNCIATE*
The ILS/GPS APPROACH ANNUNCIATE* output is active in either of the following cases.
 GPS navigation is selected and either a GPS approach mode is active or 0.3 nm is selected for the
CDI full scale deflection
 VOR/LOC navigation is selected and an ILS channel has been selected
This output may be connected to the ILS Engage input of an autopilot or flight director to provide higher
autopilot gain while the GTN is operating in the ILS or GPS Approach modes of operation.
5.2.9.11 TAWS/TERRAIN INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE*
The TAWS/TERRAIN INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* is active when TAWS is inhibited on the GTN.
5.2.9.12 TAWS WARNING ANNUNCIATE*
The TAWS WARNING ANNUNCIATE* is active when a TAWS warning is active on the GTN.
5.2.9.13 TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE*
The TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE* is inactive causing the external TAWS N/A
annunciator to illuminate.
5.2.9.14 TAWS CAUTION ANNUNCIATE*
The TAWS CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* is active when a TAWS caution is active on the GTN. TAWS
CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* is not activated when a glideslope caution occurs for TAWS-A installations.
5.2.9.15 GPS SELECT ANNUNCIATE*
The GPS SELECT ANNUNCIATE* discrete output is active when GPS data is being displayed on the
CDI/HSI and the ILS/GPS Approach Output is not active. It is intended for use with autopilots having a
GPS SELECT input (such as the Bendix/King KAP 140 and KFC 225), so that the autopilot can capture
vertical guidance while GPS data is being displayed on the CDI/HSI.
5.2.9.16 TRAFFIC TEST ANNUNCIATE*
The TRAFFIC TEST ANNUNCIATE* discrete output is used to command compatible traffic systems into
test mode.
5.2.9.17 TRAFFIC STANDBY/OPERATE ANNUNCIATE*
The TRAFFIC STANDBY/OPERATE ANNUNCIATE* discrete output is used to command compatible
traffic systems into standby or operate mode.
5.2.9.18 SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE*
The SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* output is driven to indicate GPS suspend mode of operation. This output
is active when the SUSP annunciation is on the display.
5.2.9.19 GSR REMOTE POWER*
The GSR REMOTE POWER* discrete commands the GSR to be on when the discrete is active.
5.2.9.20 RADAR ON*
The RADAR ON* discrete commands the weather radar to be on when the discrete is active.
5.2.9.21 FLAP OVERRIDE ANNUNCIATE*
The FLAP OVERRIDE ANNUNCIATE* output is driven to annunciate when the Flap Override mode is
active in TAWS-A installations.

Rev. N Page 5-25
5.2.9.22 GLIDESLOPE CAUTION ANNUNCIATE*
The GLIDESLOPE CAUTION ANNUNCIATE* output is active when a Glideslope caution is active on
the GTN in TAWS-A installations. A Glideslope caution does not activate the TAWS CAUTION
ANNUNCIATE* discrete.
5.2.9.23 GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE*
The GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* output is driven to annunciate when the Glideslope Inhibit
mode is active in TAWS-A installations.
5.2.9.24 GPWS INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE*
The GPWS INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE* output is active when GPWS is inhibited on the GTN in TAWS-A
installations.
5.2.9.25 GPWS NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE*
The GPWS NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE* is inactive when GPWS is not available in TAWS-A
installations.
5.2.9.26 GSR AUDIO ATTENUATE* (Software v6.00 or Later)
The GSR AUDIO ATTENUATE* output is active when the GTN detects when the GSR telephone is
ringing. When connected to the ATTENUATE OUTPUT discrete input of the GSR 56, this discrete output
will decrease the volume of the GSR telephone ringer.
5.2.9.27 RP MODE ANNUNCIATE*
The RP MODE ANNUNCIATE* output is driven to indicate the HTAWS Reduced Protection mode of
operation. This output is active when the RP MODE annunciation is on the display.
5.2.10 TIME MARK OUT
Table 5-25 TIME MARK OUT Outputs
TIME MARK OUT A P1001 3 Out
TIME MARK OUT B P1001 22 Out
The TIME MARK OUT outputs a differential 1 ms ± 1 s wide pulse once every second. TIME MARK
OUT is a logic level output, capable of sourcing 1 mA at greater than 3.8 V and sinking 1 mA at less 
than 0.4 V.
5.2.11 Heading Synchro
The GTN accepts heading information using synchro, RS-232, or ARINC 429 inputs. If synchro heading is
provided, refer to the paragraphs below.
Table 5-26 Heading Synchro XYZ
SYNCHRO X P1005 35 In
SYNCHRO Y P1005 14 In
SYNCHRO Z P1005 56 In
Connect these pins to an XYZ type directional gyro.

Rev. N Page 5-26
Table 5-27 Heading Synchro Reference Voltage
SYNCHRO REF HIGH P1005 36 In
SYNCHRO REF LO P1005 15 In
A reference voltage must be provided if the synchro heading input is used. This input should be 26 VAC
400 Hz (nominal) and provided by the same source that provides the excitation voltage to the synchro
heading source.
Table 5-28 Heading Synchro Valid Input
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT (ACTIVE HI) P1005 54 In
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT* P1005 33 In
P1005-54 is considered active if the voltage on this input is 6.5-33 VDC. If the voltage is ≤3.5 VDC, the
input is considered inactive.
P1005-33 is considered active if either the voltage to ground is <1.9 V or the resistance to ground
is <375 . This input is considered inactive if the voltage to ground is 11-33 VDC.
Unless P1005-54 or P1005-33 is active, the GTN will consider the synchro heading input to be invalid.
5.2.12 COM Audio (GTN 750 Only)
5.2.12.1 COM Audio Function
Activation of MIC 1 TRANSMIT enables MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI and causes the transceiver to transmit.
500  COM AUDIO is a 100 mW audio output that is intended to drive a headset or an audio panel.
5.2.12.2 COM Audio Electrical Characteristics
Table 5-29 COM MIC AUDIO
COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI P1003 5 In
MIC AUDIO IN LO P1003 20 In
The COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI is a standard carbon or dynamic mic input with integrated preamps
providing minimum 70 mVrms into a 1000 Ω load.
The COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI is set in the factory so that 100 mVrms modulates the transmitter to 85%
nominally at 1000 Hz. The microphone gain adjustment is made through Configuration Mode. See 
section 6.6.11.
Table 5-30 COM AUDIO

500  COM AUDIO HI P1003 7 Out
500  COM AUDIO LO P1003 18 Out
The 500  COM AUDIO supplies 100 mW into a 500  load. This is a balanced output and the LO output
must be connected.
The 500  COM AUDIO is the summation of the COM receiver audio, COM sidetone audio, and intercom
audio.

Rev. N Page 5-27
5.2.13 COM Discrete Inputs (GTN 750 Only)
Table 5-31 COM Discrete Inputs
COM MIC 1 KEY* P1003 11 In
COM REMOTE TRANSFER* P1003 27 In
COM REMOTE TUNE UP* P1003 28 In
COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* P1003 29 In
activate.
These inputs are considered active if either the voltage to ground is ≤3.5 VDC or the resistance to ground is
≤375 . These inputs are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is 11-33 VDC or the resistance to
ground is >100 kΩ.
5.2.13.1 COM MIC 1 KEY*
The COM MIC 1 KEY* discrete input, when pulled low, allows the audio that is present on the COM 
MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI (P1003-5) to be transmitted over the radio.
5.2.13.2 COM REMOTE TRANSFER*
The COM REMOTE TRANSFER* discrete input is used to flip-flop between the active and standby COM
frequencies. A momentary low on this pin will load the standby COM frequency into the active COM
frequency field.
The COM REMOTE TRANSFER* input is used for emergency operation of the COM transmitter. If the
switch is depressed for two seconds, the active COM frequency changes to 121.500 MHz. Once the
emergency frequency is activated through COM REMOTE TRANSFER*, the GTN transceiver ignores
inputs from the front panel controls for COM selections only. The pilot may exit this independent mode
restoring COM selection control to the front panel knobs and keys by again depressing the switch for two
seconds.
5.2.13.3 COM REMOTE TUNE UP*
The COM REMOTE TUNE UP* discrete input is used to scroll through a list of preset COM frequencies.
A momentary low on this pin will load the next preset frequency in the list into the standby COM
frequency field.
5.2.13.4 COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN*
The COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* discrete input is used to scroll through a list of preset COM
frequencies. A momentary low on this pin will load the previous preset frequency in the list into the
standby COM frequency field.
5.2.14 VOR/ILS Audio (GTN 750 Only)
Table 5-32 VOR/ILS Audio
500  VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI P1004 16 Out
500  VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO P1004 17 Out
The 500  VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI supplies 100 mW into a 500  load. It is a balanced output and the 
500  VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO output must be connected.

Rev. N Page 5-28
5.2.15 VOR/ILS Discrete Inputs (GTN 750 Only)
Table 5-33 VOR/ILS Discrete Inputs
VOR/LOC REMOTE TRANSFER* P1004 28 In
activate.
This input is considered active if either the voltage to ground is ≤3.5 VDC or the resistance to ground is
≤375 . This input is considered inactive if the voltage to ground is 11-33 VDC or the resistance to ground
is >100 kΩ.
5.2.15.1 VOR/LOC REMOTE TRANSFER
The VOR/LOC REMOTE TRANSFER* discrete input is used to flip-flop between the active and standby
NAV frequencies. A momentary low on this pin will load the standby NAV frequency into the active NAV
frequency field.
5.2.16 VOR/ILS Indicator (GTN 750 Only)
5.2.16.1 VOR/ILS Indicator Function
NOTE
Because the GTN 750 includes a CDI key that performs switching between GPS and VOR/
ILS on a remote indicator, it is seldom necessary to use these outputs to drive an indicator.
It is only necessary when it is desired for a separate indicator to display VOR/ILS
deviation full-time, regardless of the CDI key status.
The VOR/ILS indicator displays both lateral and vertical, To/From indications, lateral and vertical flags
and superflags. GTN 750 connector P1004 always outputs the VOR/Localizer/Glideslope navigation
information. The VOR/ILS pins on P1004 are used to drive an indicator that displays VOR/ILS
information at all times, regardless of the CDI selection on the GTN 750.
The VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT is a standard VOR/localizer composite output signal which is used to
drive Left/Right, To/From, and Flag indications of certain navigation indicators that contain an internal
converter.
The ILS ENERGIZE output becomes active (low) when VOR/LOC frequency is set to a localizer channel.
5.2.16.2 VOR/ILS Indicator Electrical Characteristics
Table 5-34 Superflags
VOR/LOC SUPERFLAG P1004 15 Out
GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG P1004 38 Out
The output supplies not less than 320 mA with the output voltage not less than (AIRCRAFT POWER
-2 VDC) when the flag is to be OUT OF VIEW. The output voltage with respect to ground is 0 +/-250
mVDC when the flag is to be IN VIEW.

Rev. N Page 5-29
Table 5-35 Deviation
VOR/LOC +LEFT P1004 5 Out
VOR/LOC +RIGHT P1004 6 Out
GLIDESLOPE +UP P1004 34 Out
GLIDESLOPE +DOWN P1004 55 Out
Deviation outputs drive up to three 1000  loads with ±150 mVDC ±15 mVDC for full-scale deflection, 0
mVDC ±9.9 mVDC for LOC signal and 0 ± 10.14 mVDC for GS signal, when centered. The drive circuit
provides for more than full-scale deflection with a maximum course deviation output voltage of ±300
mVDC ±30 mVDC.
Table 5-36 TO/FROM
VOR/LOC +TO P1004 1 Out
VOR/LOC +FROM P1004 2 Out
The TO/FROM output drives up to three 200  loads. When indicating TO, the output is +225 ±75
mVDC. When indicating FROM, output is -225 ±75 mVDC. When invalid information is present (Flag IN
VIEW) the TO/FROM output is 0 ±10 mVDC.
Table 5-37 Flag
VOR/LOC +FLAG P1004 3 Out
VOR/LOC -FLAG P1004 4 Out
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG P1004 32 Out
GLIDESLOPE -FLAG P1004 53 Out
The flag output drives up to three 1000  loads. When valid information is present (Flag OUT OF VIEW)
the flag output is 375 ±80 mVDC. When invalid information is present (Flag IN VIEW) the flag output is
0 ±25 mVDC.
Table 5-38 OBS
VOR OBS ROTOR C P1004 9 Out
VOR OBS ROTOR H (GND) P1004 10 --
VOR OBS STATOR D P1004 13 In
VOR OBS STATOR E (GND) P1004 11 --
VOR OBS STATOR F P1004 12 In
VOR OBS STATOR G (GND) P1004 14 --
VOR OBS ROTOR C and H are a buffered 400 Hz output that is intended to drive the OBS rotors. VOR
OBS STATOR D and VOR OBS STATOR F are each amplitude shifted version of the VOR ROTOR C
output. Each pair is intended to read one of the two windings of the indicator’s OBS stator.
Table 5-39 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT P1004 8 Out
With a standard VOR test signal applied, VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT is 0.5 ± 0.1 Vrms into a 10 k
load. With a standard Localizer centering test signal applied, VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT is 0.350
±0.05 Vrms into a 10 k load.

Rev. N Page 5-30
Table 5-40 GLIDESLOPE COMPOSITE
GLIDESLOPE COMPOSITE OUT P1004 58 Out
With a standard glideslope test signal applied, GLIDESLOPE COMPOSITE OUT is 0.350 ±0.05 Vrms
into a 10 k load.
Table 5-41 NAV ILS ENERGIZE
ILS ENERGIZE P1004 29 Out
The driver output voltage is not more than 1.0 V when sinking 20 mA. The maximum off state leakage
current with respect to GND is less than 10 A.
5.2.17 RMI/OBI (GTN 750 Only)
5.2.17.1 RMI/OBI Function
The VOR OBI output provides bearing information from the currently tuned VOR station for Bendix/King
Serial OBI devices based upon the GTN 750 VOR receiver. When a localizer channel is tuned on the
VOR/LOC window, there is a bit in the data stream set to indicate that a localizer frequency is tuned which
stows the needle or drives it to the 3 o’clock position.
5.2.17.2 RMI/OBI Electrical Characteristics
Table 5-42 RMI/OBI Electrical Characteristics
VOR OBI CLOCK P1004 25 Out
VOR OBI SYNC P1004 26 Out
VOR OBI DATA P1004 27 Out
The output driver is an Active-Low. The driver output voltage is not more than 1.0 V when sinking 20 mA.
The maximum off state leakage current with respect to ground is less than 10 A.

Rev. N Page 5-31
5.2.18 DME Tuning (GTN 750 Only)
5.2.18.1 DME Tuning Function
The GTN 750 can channel a DME based on the tuned VOR/LOC frequency. The GTN 750 outputs 
2 of 5, BCD, or Slip parallel DME and King Serial DME channeling format. When DME COMMON is
held low, the GTN 750 actively tunes the DME.
5.2.18.2 DME Tuning Electrical Characteristics
Table 5-43 Parallel DME Tuning
PAR DME 100KHZ-A/NAV SERIAL DME HOLD P1004 37 Out
PAR DME 100KHZ-B P1004 39 Out
PAR DME 100KHZ-C P1004 40 Out
PAR DME 100KHZ-D P1004 42 Out
PAR DME 100KHZ-E P1004 54 Out
PAR DME 50KHZ P1004 43 Out
PAR DME 1MHZ-A P1004 45 Out
PAR DME 1MHZ-B P1004 46 Out
PAR DME 1MHZ-C P1004 47 Out
PAR DME 1MHZ-D/NAV SERIAL DME ON P1004 33 Out
PAR DME 1 MHZ-E P1004 56 Out
DME COMMON P1004 41 In
For each of the parallel DME tuning discrete outputs, the driver output voltage is not more than 1.0 V
while sinking 20 mA. The maximum off state leakage current with respect to ground is less than 10 A.
The DME COMMON must be pulled low to indicate to the GTN 750 that it is the device channeling the
DME.
The DME COMMON is considered active if either the voltage to ground is <1.9 V or the resistance to
ground is <375 . These inputs are considered inactive if the voltage to ground is 11-33 VDC.
Pins 37, 40, 41, 42, 43, 45, 47, 33, 54, and 56 are configured for 2 of 5 parallel DME tuning.
Table 5-44 King Serial DME Tuning
SERIAL DME – DATA P1004 19 Out
SERIAL DME – CLOCK P1004 18 Out
SERIAL DME – RNAV/CH REQ P1004 20 In
SERIAL DME – RNAV MODE P1004 21 In
DME COMMON P1004 41 In
SERIAL DME – DME REQUEST P1004 44 I/O
When SERIAL DME – DATA or SERIAL DME – CLOCK is asserted high and driving a 360 load, the
driver output voltage is not less than 8 V, and when asserted low is not greater than 10 mV.
SERIAL DME – RNAV/CH REQ, SER DME – RNAV MODE, and DME COMMON are considered
active if either the voltage to ground is <1.9 V or the resistance to ground is <375 . These inputs are
considered inactive if the voltage to ground is 11-33 VDC.
The DME COMMON must be pulled low to indicate to the GTN 750 that it is the device channeling the
DME.
Pins 18, 19, 20, and 41 are configured for King Serial DME tuning.

Rev. N Page 5-32
6 POST INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION AND CHECKOUT
PROCEDURES
6.1 System Configuration Overview
This section contains instructions for configuring the GTN for each installation as well as checks to ensure
the system is properly installed and functioning correctly. A summary of the steps required for
configuration and checkout of the GTN is as follows.
 Perform the installation checks
 Load software into the GTN, see section 6.16
 Configure the GTN for the specific installation, see section 6.4
 Perform ground checks to verify the interfaces to external sensors, see section 6.10 and 
section 6.11
 Perform the specified flight checks, see section 6.13
 Update the aircraft documentation, see section 6.17
6.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks
Verify that all cables are properly secured and shields are connected to the shield block of the connectors.
Check the movement of the flight and engine controls to verify there is no interference between the cabling
and control systems. Ensure that all wiring is installed as described in section 3.7.
Prior to powering up the GTN, the wiring harness must be checked for proper connections to the aircraft
systems and other avionics equipment. Point to point continuity must be checked to expose any faults such
as shorting to ground. Any faults or discrepancies must be corrected before proceeding.
After accomplishing a continuity check, perform power and ground checks to verify proper power
distribution to the GTN. Any faults or discrepancies should be corrected at this time. Remove power from
the aircraft upon completion of the harness checkout.
The GTN can be installed after completion of the continuity and power checks. The GTN should be
installed into the rack and secured appropriately, as described in section 4.10.1. The GTN must be
connected to the wiring harness and antennas.
CAUTION
Before applying power to the GTN, ensure all lighting buses are turned to their lowest
setting. This prevents damage to the unit in case of any wiring errors. Apply power and
slowly increase the brightness. Stop if the brightness does not increase the lighting level.
Verify wiring before proceeding.

Rev. N Page 6-1
6.3 Connector Engagement Check
Prior to configuration and checkout of the GTN, the connector engagement should be checked as described
below:
1. If installed, turn on the avionics master switch.
2. Place the GTN in the rack and engage the cam mechanism.
3. Turn the Allen screw of the locking cam (located on the lower left side of the unit) slowly
clockwise until the GTN just powers on. A T-handle can be used for this, but ensure that the screw
is not over-tightened.
4. Count the number of complete revolutions the Allen screw can be turned until it cannot turn any
more. Take care not to over-tighten. Three turns is the minimum for proper installation. If fewer
than three turns are possible, the mounting rack should be moved aft (toward the pilot) such that
the aircraft panel does not obstruct the unit from properly engaging in the rack.
6.4 Configuration Mode Operations
Configuration mode is used to configure the GTN settings for each specific installation. To access
configuration mode with the GTN turned off, press and hold the HOME key and apply power to the GTN.
Release the HOME key when the display activates and the Garmin logo appears fully lit on the screen.
The first page displayed is the Configuration Mode page. While in configuration mode, pages can be
selected by touching the desired key on the display.
Figure 6-1 Configuration Mode Page
NOTE
The configuration pages shown in this section reflect main software v4.00. Some
differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual
to later or earlier software versions.

Rev. N Page 6-2
6.5 System Information Page
Access the System Information page by touching the System Information key on the Configuration Mode
page, shown in figure 6-1. The System Information page displays the unit type, serial number, and system
ID for the GTN. It also contains the software and hardware versions of the Main, I/O, Display, Keypad,
LED, GPS/WAAS, COM and NAV boards. This information is also available for and certain other LRUs
connected to the GTN. Touch the GTN key and choose which LRU to display. Touch Up or Down to view
all the information.
Figure 6-2 System Information Page

Rev. N Page 6-3
6.6 GTN Setup Page
The following sections describe pages that are accessed from the GTN Setup page. To access the GTN
Setup page, touch the GTN Setup key from the Configuration Mode page as shown in figure 6-1.
Figure 6-3 GTN Setup Page

6.6.1 ARINC 429 Configuration Page
Access the ARINC 429 Configuration page by touching the ARINC 429 key on the GTN Setup page. This
page configures the four ARINC 429 input ports and the three ARINC 429 output ports. Select the correct
speed for each port depending upon the installed interfaced equipment by touching the speed key and
toggling the high or low selection.
Figure 6-4 ARINC 429 Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-4
Select the correct Data In and Data Out settings for each port. Touch the Up or Down key to scroll through
the ARINC selections. The data selections are described in the following tables.
Table 6-1 Speed Selections
Selection Description
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 Kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 Kb per second)
Table 6-2 Data In Selections

GTN Selection GNS Equivalent Description
Off Off No unit connected to this ARINC 429 input.
Altitude, temperature, and airspeed information from
the following Air Data systems:
Airdata Airdata B & D 2600, 2601, 2800, 90004-003
Bendix/King KAD 280/480, Shadin ADC 2000
Heading, altitude, and airspeed information from an Air
Airdata/AHRS Airdata/AHRS Data/AHRS system.
This is a Garmin data concentration format. Only high
Data Concentrator Garmin GTX 330 speed ARINC 429 should be used.
Selected course and heading information from the
following EFIS systems:
EFIS Format 1 EFIS Bendix/King EFS 40/50
Certain versions of Collins EFIS may also be
compatible with this format.
Selected course, heading, altitude, temperature, and
airspeed information from the following systems:
EFIS Format 2 [3] EFIS/Airdata Collins Pro Line 21
Bendix/King EFS 40/50 (with SW 1201 or later)
Selected course, heading, and joystick waypoint
EFIS Format 3 Honeywell EFIS information from the following EFIS systems:
Honeywell Primus 1000
Selected course and heading information from the
EFIS Format 4 Sandel EHSI following EHSI system:
Sandel SN3308 and Sandel SN3500
Fuel quantity and fuel flow for EUROCOPTER EC145

Fuel Format 3 [2] [4] N/A
T2 (all variants with HELIONIX installed)
Fuel quantity and fuel flow for EUROCOPTER
Fuel Format 4 [2] N/A AS365N3e (twin-engine medium H/C, part of the
Dauphin family)
Fuel Format 5 [2] N/A
AS355NP and AS555AP (part of the Ecureuil family)

Fuel Format 6 [2] N/A AS350B2, AS350B3e, AS550C3 and EC130T2 (also
part of the Ecureuil family) and EC120B (Colibri)
EUROCOPTER EC135, EC145 and EC155B1 (all
Fuel Format 7 [2] N/A variants with CPDS “Central Panel Display System”
and FCDS “Flight Control Display System” installed)

Rev. N Page 6-5
Selected course, heading, and true airspeed data from
GAD Format 1 Garmin GAD 42 the Garmin GAD 42.
Selected course, heading, and true airspeed data from

GDU Format 1 Garmin GDU the Garmin GDU 620.
Heading information from the following inertial systems:
Bendix/King KAH 460
Collins AHC 85
INS/IRU INS/IRU Honeywell Laseref
Litef LTR 81
Litton LTN 90-100, LTN 91, LTN 92
Radar Altimeter [1] N/A Radio Altitude (AGL) from a radar altimeter.
Course deviation from VHF navigation radios or GPS
TAWS VDI Format 1 [2] N/A Navigators for use with TAWS-A enabled GTNs.
Traffic information from the Garmin GTS 800 traffic
Traffic Format 1 Traffic Advisory system.
Traffic information from the Garmin GTS 820 and GTS
Traffic Format 2 Traffic Advisory 850 traffic system.
Traffic Format 3 Traffic Advisory Traffic information from SKY899 traffic system.
Traffic information from Bendix/King KTA-870, KMH880
Traffic Format 4 Traffic Advisory systems.
Traffic Format 5 Traffic Advisory Traffic information from the Avidyne TAS systems.
Traffic information from L3 Communications SKY497
Traffic Format 6 Traffic Advisory SkyWatch.
[1] Software v4.00 or later.
[3] When EFIS Format 2 and GAMA Format 8 are configured, an option is available under “More
ARINC 429 Setup” for filtering ADAHRS labels by SDI = 11 (software v5.10 or later).
[4] When EFIS Format 2, GAMA Format 8, and Fuel Format 3 are all configured, an option is
available under “More ARINC 429 Setup” for receiving the Mag/True selection from an
external device (software v6.10 or later).

Rev. N Page 6-6
Data Out Selections
NOTE
Only one ARINC 429 output port can be configured to a GAMA Format output at one
time. If more than one interfaced system requires a GAMA Format output, splice the
GAMA 429 output wires from the GTN into each system requiring GAMA Format
information.
Table 6-3 Data Out Selections

Off Off No unit(s) connected to ARINC 429 output
ARINC 429 [5] ARINC 429 Standard ARINC 429 output data (non-GAMA).
GPS position output as defined by the ARINC 743a
ARINC 743a [3] N/A
standard, revision 5.
ARINC 429 data as defined by the General Aviation
Manufacturers’ Association (GAMA) General Aviation
Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation
and flight plan information to the following systems:
Garmin GDU 620, GAD 42 Interface Adapter
GAMA Format 1 [5] GAMA 429 Bendix/King EFS 40/50 with SG465 sw 1501 (GPS vertical
guidance provided, set SG 564 FMS #1/#2 type: KLN 90B-
GPS)
Collins EFIS 84
Certain other versions of Collins EFIS may also be
compatible with this format.
ARINC 429 data as defined by the GAMA General Aviation
Subset, 2nd Edition including GAMA Graphics Protocol ‘A’.
This format outputs intersection symbols as generic
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 2 [5] waypoint symbols. The output data includes navigation and
Graphics
flight plan information (including graphical representation of
flight plan procedures) to the following EFIS systems:
Honeywell Primus 1000
Subset, 2nd Edition including GAMA Graphics Protocol ‘A’.
GAMA 429 The output data includes navigation and flight plan
GAMA Format 3 [5]
Graphics w/Int information (including graphical representation of flight plan
procedures) to the following systems:
Sandel SN3308 and Sandel SN3500
GAMA 429 Pro Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation
GAMA Format 4 [5]
Line 21 and flight plan information to the following EFIS systems:
Collins Pro Line 21
GAMA 429 Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation
GAMA Format 5 [5]
Sextant and flight plan information to the following EFIS systems:
Sextant SMD 45

Rev. N Page 6-7
Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation,
flight plan and GPS vertical guidance information to the
GAMA 429 Bendix following systems:
GAMA Format 6 [5]
King
Bendix/King EFS 40/50 with SG 465 sw 1101 (GPS vertical
guidance provided, set SG 564 FMS #1/#2 type: GAMA
429-GPS)
Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation,
GAMA Format 7 [2] [5] N/A
flight plan and GPS vertical guidance information for OEM
installations.
The output data includes navigation, flight plan and GPS
GAMA Format 8 [2] [4] N/A
vertical guidance information for OEM installations.
ARINC 429 output for the control of ARINC 708 weather
Radar Format 1 [1] N/A
radars.
[4] The GAMA Graphics labels of GAMA Format 8 can be disabled by selecting “More A429
Setup” and then setting “GAMA Graphics” to “Disabled.”
[5] In GTN software versions 4.10 and 5.00, when an ARINC 429 output port is configured for the
"ARINC 429" format and a second ARINC 429 output port is configured for any of the GAMA
formats (excluding "GAMA Format 8"), GPS position will not be provided on the GAMA Format
configured output. If multiple LRUs require the ability to receive the same data from a GTN,
verify that the selected GAMA Format will provide the necessary data for each LRU. Splice the
wiring so a single output port from the GTN is connected to multiple LRUs. See table 5-14.
Table 6-4 SDI Selections

GTN Selection Description
RX: Accepts all 429 inputs
Common
TX: Generates all 429 outputs with SDI = 0
Number 1 (Pilot) long-range navigator.
LNAV 1 RX: Accepts 429 inputs with SDI = 0 or 1
Number 2 (Copilot) long-range navigator
LNAV 2 RX: Accepts 429 inputs with SDI = 0 or 2

Rev. N Page 6-8
6.6.2 RS-232 Configuration Page
Access the RS-232 Configuration page by touching the RS-232 key on the GTN Setup page. Change the
inputs or outputs to match the equipment that is installed in the aircraft. Touch the key corresponding to the
RS-232 channel and select the applicable input or output setting. The input/output settings are described
below. Touch the Up or Down key to scroll through the RS-232 selections.
Figure 6-5 RS-232 Configuration Page
Table 6-5 Channel Input Selections

Off Off No unit(s) connected to input of this channel.
Serial air data information from the following units:
Airdata Format 1 Shadin-adc
Shadin ADC 200, 200+, 2000
Serial altitude data from the following units:
Icarus Instruments 3000
Sandia SAE5-35
Altitude Format 1 Icarus-alt
Garmin GTX 327 Transponder
Trans-Cal Industries IA-RS232-X, SSD120
ACK Technologies A-30 (Mod 8 and above)
Serial altitude data from the following units:
Altitude Format 3 Shadin-alt
Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T
Bluetooth configuration and flight plan information from the
Connext Format 1 [1] Connext
Flight Stream 210.
Connext Format 2 [1] N/A Flight plan information from G3X Touch.
Serial air data and fuel flow information from the following
units:
FADC Format 1 Shadin-fadc
Shadin 9628XX-X Fuel/Air Data Computer
INSIGHT TAS 1000 Air Data Computer

Rev. N Page 6-9
Serial fuel flow information from the following units:
Fuel Format 1 Arnav/ei-fuel ARNAV FC-10, FT-10
Electronics International FP-5L
Serial fuel flow information from the following units:
Shadin 91053XM Digital Fuel Management System
Fuel Format 2 Shadin-fuel
Shadin 91204XM Digital Fuel Management System
JP Instruments EDM-700 or EDM-760 Engine Monitor
This input format supports the GMA 35 audio panel
interface.
GMA system software v2.00 required for GTN software
v2.00.
v3.xx.
GMA Format 1 N/A
GMA system software v3.05 to 3.07 or later required for
GTN software v4.00 to 5.00.
GMA system software v3.10 or later required for GTN
software v5.10 to 5.13.
GMA system software v4.10 or later is required for GTN
This interface supports receiving marker beacon
GMA Format 2 [2] N/A
annunciations from the GMA 350.
Select this format to transmit flight plan information
GNS Crossfill N/A
automatically to a connected GNS 400W/500W navigator.
GSR Format 1 N/A Select this format for the Garmin GSR 56.
Select this format for the GTX 32/327 transponder #1.
Provides status data, altitude data, and flight ID. Choosing
GTX Mode C #1 N/A
this input setting will automatically configure the
corresponding channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 32/327 transponder #2.
Provides status data, altitude data, and flight ID. Choosing
GTX Mode C #2 N/A
this input setting will automatically configure the
corresponding channel output to the same setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES
transponder #1. Provides status data, ICAO address, and
GTX Mode S #1 N/A Flight ID. Choosing this input setting will automatically
configure the corresponding channel output to the same
setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33ES/330ES transponder
#1 with GTX software v7.00 or later for AC 20-165A
compliance. Provides status data, ICAO address, and
GTX Mode S+ #1 N/A
Flight ID. Choosing this input setting will automatically
setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES
transponder #2. Provides status data, ICAO address, and
GTX Mode S #2 N/A Flight ID. Choosing this input setting will automatically
setting.

Rev. N Page 6-10
GTX Mode S+ #2 N/A compliance. Choosing this input setting will automatically
setting.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES
transponder #1. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO
GTX w/TIS #1 N/A address, and Flight ID. Choosing this input setting will
automatically configure the corresponding channel output
to the same setting.
compliance. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO
GTX w/TIS+ #1 N/A
address, and Flight ID. Choosing this input setting will
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES
transponder #2. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO
GTX w/TIS #2 N/A address, and Flight ID. Choosing this input setting will
compliance. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO
GTX w/TIS+ #2 N/A
address, and Flight ID. Choosing this input setting will
Lightning strike information from an L3 Communications
Lightning Detector 1 WX-500
WX-500 Stormscope.
Select this format to receive radio control commands from
MapMX Format 2 [2] N/A
the G3X.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #1.
This provides TIS data from the panel mount 
Panel GTX w/TIS #1 N/A
GTX 330/330ES transponder without controlling the
transponder via the GTN.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #1 with
GTX software v7.00 or later for AC 20-165A compliance.
Panel GTX w/TIS+ #1 N/A This provides TIS data from the panel mount GTX 330/
330ES transponder without controlling the transponder via
the GTN.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #2.
This provides TIS data from the panel mount GTX 330/
Panel GTX w/TIS #2 N/A
the GTN.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #2 with
GTX software v7.00 or later for AC 20-165A compliance.
Panel GTX w/TIS+ #2 N/A This provides TIS data from the panel mount GTX 330/
the GTN.

Rev. N Page 6-11
Select this format for receiving radio control commands
Radio CTRL Format 1
N/A from an external radio control unit. This format is defined in
[2]
appendix B.3.
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900B Series traffic
Traffic Format 7 Ryan TCAD
system.
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900BX Series traffic
system.
Table 6-6 Channel Output Selections
Off Off No unit(s) connected to output of this channel.
Serial communication of GPS data to Garmin panel
ADS-B ADS-B mount mode S transponders. Note: This format is not
required when using any other GTX output format.
Serial communication of GPS data to Garmin panel
mount mode S transponders with GTX software v7.00 or
ADS-B+ N/A later for AC 20-165A compliance. Note: This format is
not required when using any other GTX output format
that is described as being for AC 20-165A compliance.
Serial position, altitude, velocity, and navigation data to
the following units:
Argus 3000, 5000, or 7000 Moving Map
Electronics International FP-5L Fuel Flow Computer
(non-TSO’d)
Garmin MX20 (V5.6 or later), GMX 200, GPSMAP 195,
Aviation Output 1 Aviation GPSMAP 295 or GPS III Pilot, GPSMAP 196, 
GPSMAP 296, GPSMAP 396, GPSMAP 496, GPSMAP
695, GPS MAP 696, GTX 327 Transponder
JP Instruments EDM-700 or EDM-760 Engine Monitor,
Shadin 9628XX-X Fuel/Air Data Computer, 91204XM
and 91053XM Digital Fuel Management Systems.
Stormscope Series II (with NAVAID) Moving Map
Serial position, velocity, and navigation data to the
following units:
Aviation Output 2 Aviation no alt Garmin MX20 (V5.5 or earlier)
Horizon DDMP
INSIGHT TAS 1000 Air Data Computer
Bluetooth configuration, flight plan information, and GPS
Connext Format 1 [1] Connext
position information to the Flight Stream 210.
Connext Format 2 [1] N/A Flight plan information to the G3X Touch.
Serial communication to a Bendix/King (Honeywell) KGP
External EGPWS HW EGPWS
560 EGPWS.

Rev. N Page 6-12
Control of GMA 35 Audio Panel functions.
v2.00.
v3.xx.
GMA Format 1 N/A GMA system software v3.05 to 3.07 or later required for
GTN software v4.00 to 5.00.
software v5.10 to 5.13.
Select this format to request marker beacon
GMA Format 2 [2] N/A
annunciations from the GMA 350.
Select this format to transmit flight plan information
GNS Crossfill N/A automatically to a connected GNS 400W/500W
navigator.
GSR Format 1 N/A Select this format for the Garmin GSR 56.
Control of GTX 32/327 #1 transponder functions,
GTX Mode C #1 N/A
pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data.
Control of GTX 32/327 #2 transponder functions,
GTX Mode C #2 N/A
Control of GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES #1 transponder
GTX Mode S #1 N/A
functions, pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data,
Control of GTX 33ES/330ES #1 transponder functions,
pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data. For use
GTX Mode S+ #1 N/A
with GTX software v7.00 or later for AC 20-165A
compliance.
GTX Mode S #2 N/A
pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data. For use
GTX Mode S+ #2 N/A
with GTX software v7.00 or later for AC 20-165A
compliance.
Control of GTX 33 #1 transponder functions, pressure
GTX w/TIS #1 N/A
altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS traffic.
pressure altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS
GTX w/TIS+ #1 N/A
traffic. For use with GTX software v7.00 or later for AC
20-165A compliance.
Control of GTX 33 #2 transponder functions, pressure
GTX w/TIS #2 N/A
altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS traffic.
GTX w/TIS+ #2 N/A
traffic. For use with software v7.00 or later for AC 20-
165A compliance.
Serial communication to an L3 Communications WX-500
Lightning Detector 1 WX-500
Stormscope.

Rev. N Page 6-13
MapMX Format 1 MapMX Serial position, altitude, velocity, and navigation data.
Select this format for the G3X to send radio information
MapMX Format 2 [2] N/A in addition to position, altitude, velocity, and navigation
data.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder
Panel GTX w/TIS #1 N/A #1. This provides ground speed, GPS PVT, and
pressure altitude information to the transponder.
Panel GTX w/TIS+ #1 N/A
traffic. For use with GTX software v7.00 or later for AC
20-165A compliance.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder
Panel GTX w/TIS #2 N/A #2. This provides ground speed, GPS PVT, and
pressure altitude information to the transponder.
Select this format for the GTX 330ES transponder #2.
This provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure
Panel GTX w/TIS+ #2 N/A altitude information to the transponder without controlling
the transponder via the GTN. For use with GTX software
v7.00 or later for AC 20-165A compliance.
Select this format for transmitting radio information to an
Radio CTRL Format 1
N/A external radio control unit. This format is defined in
[2]
appendix B.3.
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900B Series
traffic system.
Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900BX Series
traffic system.

Rev. N Page 6-14
6.6.3 HSDB (Ethernet) Configuration Page
Access the HSDB Ethernet page by touching the HDSB (Ethernet) key on the GTN Setup page. Touch
the key next to the port to configure it as “Connected” or “Not Connected.” If a Garmin LRU is connected
to a specific Ethernet port, then configure the port as “Connected.” If no LRU is connected to the port,
configure it as “Not Connected.”
Figure 6-6 HSDB Port Utilization Page

Rev. N Page 6-15
6.6.4 Interfaced Equipment Page
Access the Interfaced Equipment page by touching the Interfaced Equipment key on the GTN Setup
page. This page configures which LRUs are installed and interfaced to the GTN. From the available list of
LRUs, select either “Present” or “Not Present.” The transponder interfaced equipment configuration
should be pre-populated when the RS-232 data format is selected for each RS-232 channel.
Figure 6-7 Interfaced Equipment Page

Cross-Side Navigator
In a single GTN installation, select “Not Present.” In a dual GTN installation, select “Present.”
GDL 69/69A
Select either “Present” or “Not Present.” If present, select either GDL 69 or GDL 69A based upon the
installed LRU.
GDL 88
Select either “Present” or “Not Present.” If present, touch GDL 88 to select the GDL 88 ADS-B transmit
state (Enable or Disable). Configuration of this parameter enables portions of the GDL 88 user interface in
normal mode and does not configure the GDL 88.
ADS-B In Source (software v6.10 or later)
Select either “Present” or “Not Present.” If present, select the type of ADS-B In source (GDL 88, GTX #1,
GTX #2) connected to the GTN and the external traffic source (None, TCAD, or TAS/TCAS) connected to
the ADS-B In source.
GDU #1, GDU #2, GDU #3
Set GDU #1 to “Present” if there is one G500/G600 system installed. Set GDU #2 to “Present” if there are
two G500/G600 systems installed. Set GDU #3 to “Not Present.”

Rev. N Page 6-16
Transponder #1 and Transponder #2
Select “GTX Mode C,” “GTX Mode S,” or “GTX Mode S+” based upon the interfaced transponder type.
If the type of transponder connected to the cross-side navigator is GTX w/TIS or GTX w/TIS+, select
“GTX Mode S” or “GTX Mode S+,” respectively. If the correct data format is selected on the RS-232
configuration page, this will be filled in and grayed out. Ensure the correct transponder type is displayed.
Also, the transponder should be configured as present even if it is connected to the other installed GTN.
This setting enables the user interface in normal mode.
GSR 56
Select either “Present” or “Not Present.” In installations with multiple GTNs, this selection must be the
same on all GTNs.
GWX
Select either “Present” or “Not Present.” If present, select GWX 68 or GWX 70, based upon the installed
radar.
NOTE
If an ARINC 708 weather radar is configured, the Present key will not be available for
selection for the GWX weather radar.

Rev. N Page 6-17
6.6.5 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page
Access the Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration page by touching the Main Indicator (Analog) key on
the GTN Setup page. This page allows you to calibrate the OBS resolver, enable the CDI key, selected
course for GPS and/or VOR/LOC, and configure the V-Flag state.
Figure 6-8 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page

The following fields can be configured.
Calibrate OBS Resolver
To calibrate the OBS resolver, touch the Calibrate key on the Main CDI Configuration page. Next, select
150˚ on the OBS, then touch the OK key, as prompted on the display. After the OBS resolver is finished
calibrating, the GTN will display “OBS Resolver Calibration Complete.” Touch OK after the calibration is
complete. Verify OBS operation by checking that the course displayed on the GTN is within 2° of the
selected course.
CDI Key
To disable the CDI key, touch the key to the right of “CDI Key” to toggle between enabling and disabling
the CDI key. Disabling the CDI key removes the CDI key from the screen and sets the CDI/VDI outputs
always to GPS. This may be necessary for certain EFIS systems where navigation sensor selection must be
accomplished on the EFIS or its control panel.
Selected Course For GPS
To ignore a selected course input for GPS operation in OBS mode, touch the key to the right of “Selected
Course for GPS” until “Ignored” is displayed on the key.
Selected Course For VOR/LOC
To ignore a selected course input such that the VOR valid flag is dependent only on a valid VOR signal,
with lateral deviation calculated by another display device, touch the key to the right of “Selected Course
for VOR/LOC” until “Ignored” is displayed on the key.

Rev. N Page 6-18
V-Flag State
Select either Normal or Declutter for the V-Flag State by touching the key until the desired selection is
displayed on the key.
Table 6-7 V-Flag State Selections
Whenever vertical deviation is invalid, the vertical deviation bar is parked in
the maximum UP position and the vertical flag is removed from view, except
in the following cases: (i) the CDI is in VOR/LOC mode and an ILS frequency
Declutter is tuned, or (ii) the CDI is in GPS mode and a GPS approach with vertical
guidance is active. In these cases, whenever the vertical deviation is invalid,
the vertical deviation bar parks in the centered position and the vertical flag is
shown.
Whenever vertical deviation is invalid the vertical deviation bar parks in the
Normal centered position and the vertical flag is shown.
6.6.6 Lighting Configuration Page

Access the Lighting Configuration page by touching the Lighting key on the GTN Setup page. This page
allows you to set display parameters that affect the display backlight and key lighting brightness.
Figure 6-9 Lighting Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-19
The display and key lighting characteristics are adjusted separately, each with the following fields:
Source
Table 6-8 Source Selections
Backlight or key lighting level is determined by the ambient light level as
Photocell
measured by the photocell on the GTN.
Lighting Bus 1 Backlight or key levels track the Lighting Bus 1 levels.
Lighting Bus 2 Key lighting levels track the Lighting Bus 2 levels.
The display source can only be configured to track the Photocell or Lighting Bus 1. If the aircraft has a
single lighting bus, display and key brightness can be set to track Lighting Bus 1.
Minimum Level
This sets the minimum brightness of the keys or display, whichever is applicable. Touch the Minimum
Level key corresponding to either the keys or the display to adjust the minimum brightness. The minimum
brightness level for the display can be adjusted in a range from 0.14% to 100.00%, with 100.00% being the
highest brightness level. The minimum brightness level for the keys can be adjusted in a range from 0.00%
to 100.00%, with 100.00% being the highest brightness level. The display and key brightness default level
is set to 5.00% at the factory. Enter the desired minimum value on the keypad and then touch the Enter
key to store the settings.
6.6.6.1 Photocell Configuration Page
Access the Photocell Configuration page by touching the Configure Photocell key from the Lighting
Configuration page. The following parameters can be configured by touching the corresponding key. Each
selection displays a numeric keypad where the numeric values can be entered.
Figure 6-10 Photocell Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-20
Response Time
Sets the speed with which the brightness responds to the input level (bus voltage or ambient light) changes.
The higher the number the slower the display responds. This field has a range of 2-7 seconds, and is set to
2 seconds as a default value.
Slope
Sets the sensitivity the brightness of the display has to changes in the input level. The higher the number,
the brighter the display for a given increase in the input level. This field has a range of 0 to 100, and is set
to 50 as the default setting.
Offset
Adjusts the lighting level up or down for any given input level. This field has a range of 0 to 99, and is set
to 50. At 50, there is no offset. This may also be used to match lighting curves with other equipment in the
panel.
Key Backlight Cutoff
This parameter configures the point at which key backlighting is switched off in bright light. For example,
a value of 70% means that the key backlights will be off at photocell source input levels above 70%. This
field has a range of 0 to 100% and is set to 80% as the default setting.
Photocell Transition
This parameter sets the lighting bus input level where the lighting bus input will be ignored and the
photocell will be used to control the GTN display backlight. The photocell transition is a percentage of the
maximum lighting bus input level. This field has a range of 5 to 50, and is set to 25 as the default setting.

Rev. N Page 6-21
6.6.6.2 Lighting Bus Configuration Page
The Lighting Bus Configuration pageoffers the same Response Time, Slope, and Offset adjustments as
described in section 6.6.6.1. The lighting bus response time is configurable from 0 to 7 seconds for GTN
software v5.00 or later and 2 to 7 seconds for GTN software version prior to v5.00.
Figure 6-11 Lighting Bus Configuration Page

Lighting Bus Source
To configure the lighting bus source voltage, touch the Lighting Bus 1 or Lighting Bus 2 key. Select 14V
DC, 28V DC, 5V DC, or 5V AC depending on the lighting bus voltage source.

Rev. N Page 6-22
6.6.7 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Page (Software v4.00 or Later)
NOTE
To access the Enhanced Lighting Configuration pages, the Enhanced Lighting setting on
the Main System page must be enabled. For more information see section 6.6.10.
Access the Enhanced Lighting Configuration page by touching the Enhanced Lighting key on the GTN
Setup page.
Figure 6-12 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Page

This page allows you to access the following pages.
Table 6-9 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Selections
Source Settings This selection contains display and key lighting source configuration items.
Day Mode Operation Contains day mode display and backlight curve configuration items.
Night Mode Operation Contains night mode display and backlight curve configuration items.

Rev. N Page 6-23
6.6.7.1 Source Settings Page
Access the Source Settings page by touching the Source Settings key on the Enhanced Lighting
Configuration page. The Source Settings page allows configuration of the lighting bus and photocell
parameters listed below.
Figure 6-13 Enhanced Lighting Configuration - Source Settings Page

Display Source
Sets the source input for the display backlight. This may be set to “Photocell” or “Lighting Bus 1.” If
configured for Photocell, the photocell sensor will be used to provide the lighting input level for day and
night curves. The display source may alternatively be configured for a dimmer lighting bus.
Keys Source
Sets the source input for the keys backlight. This may be set to “Photocell,” “Lighting Bus 1,” or 
“Lighting Bus 2” (if display source is configured for Lighting Bus 1). If configured for Photocell, the
photocell sensor will be used to provide the lighting input level for day and night curves. The keys source
may alternatively be configured for a dimmer lighting bus.
Response Time
Sets the speed with which the key or display brightness responds to the input level (bus voltage or ambient
light) changes. The higher the number the slower the display responds. The response time for the photocell
has a range of 2 to 7 seconds and the response time for the lighting bus is 0 to 7 seconds. The default value
is set to 2 seconds.
Lighting Bus 1/2
These fields are configurable when either the display or the keys source is set to Lighting Bus 1 or 2. This
field sets the input type for each lighting bus source (5 VDC, 5 VAC, 14 VDC, or 28 VDC).

Rev. N Page 6-24
6.6.7.2 Day Mode Operation Page
The Day Mode Operation page is reached by touching the Day Mode Operation key on the Enhanced
Lighting Configuration page, shown in figure 6-12.
Figure 6-14 Enhanced Lighting Configuration - Day Mode Operation Page

Day Mode Operation page allows configuration of the photocell transition, key backlight cutoff, and curve
parameters listed below.
Photocell Transition
This parameter sets the lighting bus input level where the lighting bus input will be ignored and the
photocell will be used to control the GTN display backlight. The photocell transition is a percentage of the
maximum lighting bus input level. This field has a range of 5 to 50, and is set to 25 as the default setting.
The transition point is depicted as a purple vertical line on the display curve configuration page
Key Backlight Cutoff
This parameter configures the point at which key backlighting is switched off in bright light. For example,
a value of 70% results in the key backlights being turned off at photocell source input levels above 70%.
This field has a range of 0 to 100% and is set to 80% as the default setting. The key backlight cutoff is
depicted as a purple vertical line on the keys curve configuration page.
Minimum Level
This sets the minimum brightness of the keys or display. Touch the Minimum Level key corresponding to
either the Keys or the Display to adjust the minimum brightness. The minimum brightness level can be
adjusted in a range from 0.05% to 100.00% when tracking the lighting bus, and from 0.14% to 100.00%
when tracking the photocell, with 100.00% being the maximum brightness level. The default minimum
display brightness level when tracking the lighting bus is 0.05%. The default minimum display brightness
level when tracking the photocell is 0.14%. The default minimum bezel key brightness level is 0.00%.
Maximum Level
This sets the maximum brightness level for the lighting curve. Values may be between the range 20 and
100.

Rev. N Page 6-25
Configure Curve Page
Under this setting, the display or key lighting curves may be customized.
Vertices: Four vertices may be maneuvered by touching and dragging the points to the appropriate input/
brightness location. A vertex may not be positioned to the left or right of bordering vertices, and a vertex
may not be positioned above the point to the right or below a point to the left. The position of the points are
bounded by the maximum and minimum brightness levels respectively. As an alternative method of
adjustment, the coordinate buttons on the page may be selected and the input/brightness levels may be
adjusted using the control arrows. This is depicted in figure 6-15.
Swap Curves: This selection item is only available when the lighting source is configured for Lighting Bus
1 or 2. This selection transitions between the source curve and the photocell curve.
Source Curve: This curve may be either be a curve for photocell or lighting bus, depending on the main
source configuration. If display or key source is configured for lighting bus, then the source curve is for the
lighting bus curve.
Photocell Curve: This curve is only available if a lighting bus is configured as the main source input. The
curve must be configured across the entire input range. The photocell curve will take over when the
lighting bus input drops below the photocell transition percentage.
Figure 6-15 Enhanced Lighting Configuration - Display-Day Mode Page

Rev. N Page 6-26
6.6.7.3 Night Mode Operation Page
NOTE
Night Mode Operation is available if a discrete input is assigned. For more details, see
section 6.6.14.
Access the Night Mode Operation page by touching the Night Mode Operation key on the Enhanced
Lighting Configuration page shown in figure 6-12. The available settings on the Night Mode Operation
page are similar to those shown on the Day Mode Operation page. For more information, see
section 6.6.7.2.
Figure 6-16 Enhanced Lighting Configuration - Night Mode Operation Page

Rev. N Page 6-27
6.6.8 Audio Configuration Page
Access the Audio Configuration page by touching the Audio key on the GTN Setup page. The Audio
Configuration page allows the adjustment of volume alerts. To adjust the alert volume, press the left arrow
to decrease the volume and the right arrow to increase the volume. The volume is displayed as a percentage
of maximum volume, with 0% being muted and 100% being max volume. The selected volume level can
be checked by touching Test Sound and then touching the white triangle to the right of the key to hear the
test sound. There are three selections available: Altitude, Terrain, and Test Tone.
Figure 6-17 Audio Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-28
6.6.8.1 Voice Command Configuration Page (Software v6.00 or Later)
Access the Voice Command Configuration page by touching the Voice Command Configuration key on
the Audio Configuration page. This page allows the configuration of the Telligence Voice Command
feature. Telligence Voice Command is only available when the GTN is connected to a compatible Garmin
audio panel.
Figure 6-18 Voice Command Configuration Page

Voice Commands
When connected to a compatible Garmin audio panel, the GTN can use voice commands to control the
audio panel when the push-to-command (PTC) input to the audio panel is activated.
Table 6-10 Voice Command Selections
Voice commands are enabled. The pilot and copilot have control of the audio
Enabled
panel functions using voice commands.
Disabled (Default) Voice commands are disabled.
Mute Tone
After a voice command is issued, the audio panel can play a tone to indicate if the command was received
and understood or rejected. The Mute Tone setting can be used to mute those tones. It is recommended that
this setting be set to Disabled.
Table 6-11 Mute Tone Selections
Enabled Tones will not play after a command is spoken.
Tones will be played after a command is spoken to indicate acceptance or
Disabled (Default)
rejection of a voice command.
"Say..." Commands
This setting is not used.

Rev. N Page 6-29
6.6.9 Traffic Configuration Page
Access the Traffic Configuration page by touching the Traffic key on the GTN Setup page. If the GTN is
installed with other traffic displays, choose the appropriate symbol color (White or Cyan) to maintain
cockpit consistency. If the GTN is used to control the traffic system, select “Yes.” If a separate display
device is used to control the traffic system, select “No.” If the GTN is configured for a GDL 88 interfaced
with a TCAD system, the option to configure the GTN control of the TCAD system will be available. If the
GTN is used to control the TCAD traffic system, select “Yes.” If a separate display device is used to
control the TCAD traffic system, select “No.”
Figure 6-19 Traffic Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-30
6.6.10 Main System Configuration Page
Access the Main System Configuration page by touching the Main System key on the GTN Setup page.
This page displays miscellaneous configuration options.
Figure 6-20 Main System Configuration Page

Airframe Type (Software v4.00 or Later)
The first step in configuring the GTN should be setting the Airframe Type. The available options are
Aircraft and Rotorcraft. This setting will change which configuration items are available throughout the
configuration process.
Air/Ground Threshold
The Air/Ground Threshold is the groundspeed at which the GTN transitions from a ground state to an
airborne state, and vice versa. To adjust the Air/Ground Threshold, touch the key to the right and enter a
value. This field has a range of 0 to 99 knots and is set to 30 knots as a default value.
Air/Ground Discrete
The Air/Ground discrete is an Active-Low, and can be configured to interpret if the aircraft is airborne or
on the ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open. If it is desired for the air/ground state to
be airborne when the squat switch input is grounded, then toggle the Air/Ground Discrete key to “Active
for Airborne.” If it is desired for the Air/Ground Discrete state to be airborne when the squat switch input
is open, then toggle the Air/Ground Discrete key to “Active for Ground.” The default configuration is
Active for Airborne.

Rev. N Page 6-31
Table 6-12 Air/Ground Configuration
Air/Ground Discrete Air/Ground Input
GTN Air/Ground Status
Configuration State
Open Airborne
Configured Active for Ground
Grounded On-Ground
Open On-Ground
Configured Active for Airborne
Grounded Airborne
GPS Antenna Height Above Ground
This setting configures the height of the GPS antenna above ground level while the aircraft is sitting on the
ground. Before proceeding, measure the GPS antenna vertical offset (to the nearest tenth of a foot) as
shown in figure 6-21. Enter the measured value by touching the key and entering the measured value into
the keypad on the display. This field has a range of 0.0 to 99.9 feet.
GPS Antenna
Vertical Offset (ft)
Figure 6-21 Measurement of GPS Antenna Vertical Offset

Fuel Type
This setting configures the type of fuel the aircraft uses. Options are AV Gas, Jet A, or Jet B.
Synchro Heading Input
This setting configures the GTN as connected to a synchro heading source.
GPS Select
When in GPS mode, the GPS Select discrete is unasserted (open) whenever a GPS approach mode is active
and the pilot has enabled the A/P APR Outputs (an associated message is displayed telling the pilot to
enable the A/P APR Outputs). This setting will not allow the pilot to select automatic GPS to ILS CDI
transitions on the System Setup page (only manual transitions are permitted).

Rev. N Page 6-32
Table 6-13 GPS Select Selections
When in GPS mode, the GPS Select discrete is unasserted (open) whenever
a GPS approach mode is active – no associated messages appear and no
Auto
pilot action is required. The pilot is also allowed to select automatic or manual
GPS to ILS CDI transitions on the System Setup page.
When in GPS mode, the GPS Select discrete is unasserted (open) whenever
a GPS approach mode is active and the pilot has enabled the A/P APR
Outputs (an associated message is displayed telling the pilot to enable the 
Prompt A/P APR Outputs). This setting will not allow the pilot to select automatic GPS
to ILS CDI transitions on the System Setup page (only manual transitions are
permitted).
For Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC 225 and KAP 140 autopilots.
Heading Source Input (Software v3.00 or Later)

When upgrading from GTN v2.00 to v3.00, this setting defaults to “True.” If a nuisance heading lost
message appears a few minutes after power up and no heading source is present, configure this setting to
“Not Connected.”
Table 6-14 Heading Source Input Selections
Connected (Default) A heading source is connected to the GTN.
Not Connected A heading source is not connected to the GTN.
Radio Altimeter Input (Software v4.00 or Later)
When upgrading from GTN v3.00 to v4.00, this setting defaults to “Not Connected.” Select “Connected” if
a radar altimeter source is connected to the GTN.
Table 6-15 Radio Altimeter Input Selections
Connected A radar altimeter source is connected to the GTN.
Not Connected
A radar altimeter source is not connected to the GTN.
(Default)
Altitude Source Input (Software v3.00 or Later)
When upgrading from GTN v2.00 to v3.00, this setting defaults to True. If a nuisance altitude source lost
message appears a few minutes after power up and no heading source is present, configure this setting to
“Not Connected.”
Table 6-16 Altitude Source Input Selections
Connected (Default) A pressure altitude source is connected to the GTN.
Not Connected A pressure altitude source is not connected to the GTN.

Rev. N Page 6-33
Enhanced Lighting Mode (Software v4.00 or Later)
When upgrading from GTN v3.00 to v4.00, this setting defaults to “Disabled.” Enabling this feature will
change the GTN Setup menu item from Lighting to Enhanced Lighting. Enhanced lighting allows the
configuration of separate Day/Night curves for the backlight and keys.
Table 6-17 Enhanced Lighting Mode Selections
Enabled Customizable lighting curves and day/night curve configuration allowed.
Disabled (Default) Basic lighting configuration options enabled.
Voice Command (Software v3.00 to v5.13)
Table 6-18 Voice Command Selections
Enable Allows Telligence Voice Command control of the GMA 35 (if connected).
Disable (Default) Telligence Voice Command is not enabled.
NOTE
For software v6.00 and later, configuration of the Telligence Voice Command feature is on
the Voice Command Configuration page. See section 6.6.8.1.
Pilot Position (Software v4.00 or Later)

The pilot position setting allows the pilot seating position in the cockpit to be configured for the purposes
of 3D audio.
Table 6-19 Pilot Position Selections
For aircraft in which the pilot sits in the starboard seat, this selection is
Right
appropriate. This is the default setting for rotorcraft installations.
For aircraft in which the pilot sits in the port seat, this selection is appropriate.
Left
This is the default setting for fixed wing installations.
Crossfill Status Alert (Software v4.00 or Later)
When upgrading from GTN v3.00 to v4.00, this setting defaults to “Disabled.” This setting, when enabled,
configures the GTN to provide a message when Crossfill is disabled.
Table 6-20 Crossfill Status Alert Selections
Enabled A message will be provided when Crossfill is disabled.
Disabled A message will not be provided when Crossfill is disabled.

Rev. N Page 6-34
System ID (Software v5.00 or Later)
The System ID setting is used to identify GTN #2 in an installation with more than one GTN. This input
must be set to “GTN 2” on the second GTN. When upgrading from software released before v5.00 to GTN
v5.00 or later, this setting will default to the state of the SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* discrete input.
Otherwise, this setting will default to GTN 1.
In software v5.00 or later, this setting takes the place of the SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* discrete.
Database SYNC (Software v5.10 or Later)
The Database SYNC setting controls the ability of the GTN to synchronize databases with other LRUs
when a suitable data card is inserted.
Table 6-21 Database Sync Selections
Database SYNC is enabled and databases will be sent and received from this
Enabled
GTN when a data card is inserted that supports Database SYNC.
Database SYNC is disabled and databases will not be sent or received from
Disabled
this GTN.
Pilot Control Database SYNC is controlled by a pilot configurable setting.
Airspace Labels (Software v6.00 or Later)
The Airspace Labels setting is used to configure the availability of the airspace altitude labels on the map.
When enabled, the pilot can display airspace altitude labels on the map.
Table 6-22 Airspace Labels Selections
Enabled (Default) Airspace altitude labels are available for display on the map
Disabled Airspace altitude labels are not available for display on the map.
Checklist Page Title (Software v6.00 or Later)
The Checklist Page Title setting is used to change the name of the Checklist function.
Table 6-23 Checklist Page Title Selections
Checklist (Default) The checklist function is titled, “Checklists” in normal mode.
Task List The checklist function is titled, “Task Lists” in normal mode.

Rev. N Page 6-35
6.6.11 COM Configuration Page (GTN 750 Only)
Access the COM Configuration page by touching the COM key from the GTN Setup page. These values
are set at the factory and rarely require calibration. To enable or disable the COM radio, touch the key to
toggle between “Enabled” and “Disabled.” The COM radio defaults to enabled state.
Figure 6-22 COM Configuration Page

COM RF Squelch
This setting configures the RF squelch threshold for the COM radio. The default setting is 0%. 0% is the
most sensitive (i.e., the weakest signal level necessary to break squelch). Increasing the value will require a
stronger signal to break squelch.
Garmin has changed the GTN COM radio factory calibration process to allow the level at which the auto
squelch opens or closes to be set at a more sensitive level. The COM RF squelch range (0-100) was
remapped as shown in table 6-24. Installations of radios with the expanded sensitivity calibration process
may require a different COM RF Squelch setting to achieve the desired RF squelch performance. All
current production units are shipped with the expanded sensitivity calibration process.
Table 6-24 contains the approximate levels when the auto squelch opens and closes for various COM RF
squelch settings. Installations of GTNs with the expanded sensitivity calibration will generally use a COM
RF squelch setting of 75 or higher. Installations of GTNs with the original sensitivity calibration will
generally use a COM RF squelch setting of 0 or higher.

Rev. N Page 6-36
Table 6-24 Summary of COM RF Squelch Settings and Auto Squelch Levels
Original
COM RF Squelch Setting Expanded Calibration
Calibration
[1] Approximation
Approximation
Auto Squelch Open -99 dBm -105 dBm
0 [2]
Auto Squelch Close -101 dBm -107 dBm
75 [2]
100
[1] The COM RF squelch range (0-100) is a non-linear response.
[2] Auto squelch close at approximately -101 dBm is a typical value for many installations.
MIC 1 Gain
This can be adjusted to -12 dB, -6 dB, 0 dB, +6 dB, +12 dB, +18 dB, +24 dB, or +30 dB. The default value
is +12 dB.
Sidetone Volume
This parameter sets the audio sidetone output level. This value may be set to values between 0.0 dB and
63.0 dB in 0.5 dB increments. The default is 17.5 dB.
6.6.12 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page (750 Only)
Access the VOR/LOC/GS Configuration page by touching the VOR/LOC/GS key from the GTN Setup
page. This page allows you to verify and calibrate the CDI outputs from the VOR/LOC/GS receiver as well
as the OBS resolver input to the VOR receiver. It also allows you to select the format for the DME tuning
data.
Figure 6-23 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-37
Enable/Disable NAV Radio
To enable or disable the NAV radio, touch the key to toggle between “Enabled” and “Disabled.” The NAV
radio defaults to enabled state.
Calibrate OBS Resolver
To calibrate the OBS resolver, touch the Calibrate key on the VOR/LOC/GS Configuration page, as
shown in figure 6-23. Next, select 150˚ on the OBS, then touch the OK key, as prompted on the display.
Touch OK after the calibration is complete. Verify OBS operation by checking that the course displayed
on the GTN is within 2° of the selected course.
ARINC 429 Configuration Speed (RX and TX)
Table 6-25 ARINC 429 Configuration Speed Selections
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 kilobits per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 kilobits per second)
SDI Selections
Table 6-26 SDI Selections
Common TX: Generates all 429 outputs with SDI = 0
# 1 (Pilot) VOR/ILS Receiver
VOR/ILS 1
# 2 (Copilot) VOR/ILS Receiver
VOR/ILS 2
DME Mode Selections
Table 6-27 DME Mode Selections
If the GTN is connected to a multi-channel ARINC 429 DME, channel 1 of
Directed freq 1 that DME is tuned. “Directed freq 1” should be selected if a single-channel
ARINC 429 DME is to be tuned.
If the GTN is connected to a multi-channel ARINC 429 DME, channel 2 of
Directed freq 2
that DME is tuned.
DME Channel Mode Selections
This configuration setting allows you to set the format for DME tuning data output.
Table 6-28 DME Channel Mode Selections
King serial King Serial DME tuning data
Parallel 2x5 2 of 5 parallel DME tuning.
Parallel BCD Shifted BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) parallel DME tuning
Parallel slip Slip-code parallel DME tuning
2 of 5 parallel DME tuning, compatible with the following DME units:
Narco 890/891 Narco DME 890 and 891
ARC (Cessna)

Rev. N Page 6-38
6.6.13 ARINC 453/708 Configuration (Software v3.00 or Later)
Access the ARINC 453/708 Configuration page by touching the ARINC 708 key from the GTN Setup
page. This page allows you to select the external weather radar device.
Figure 6-24 ARINC 453/708 Configuration Page

External Weather Radar
This selection allows the user to configure the GTN for the appropriate ARINC 708 weather radar.
Selecting one of the three radars will also configure ARINC Output 3 to Radar Format 1.
NOTE
When the following configurations are selected, ARINC Out 3 is formatted automatically
to Radar Format 1. Digital Radar must be enabled.
Table 6-29 External Weather Radar Selections

Off No external radar device is selected.
Selection of this option configures the GTN ARINC 708 display input for the
ART 2000
ART 2000/ART 2100 radars.
RS 181A
RS 181A radar.
RS 811A
RS 811A radar.

Rev. N Page 6-39
6.6.14 Discrete Configuration (Software v4.00 or Later)
Access the Discrete Configuration page by touching the Discretes key from the GTN Setup page. This
page allows for customized pin assignment of discrete inputs and outputs on the P1001 and P1002
connectors.
Figure 6-25 Discrete Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-40
To assign a new discrete function to a particular pin, select the label and choose the function from the drop
down menu. Each can only be assigned one pin.
Figure 6-26 Discrete Configuration Menu

If at any time it is desired to return to the default discrete pin configuration, select “Set to Default” which is
found on the menu bar. The GTN will prompt a message stating that the configuration will be overwritten
with the default settings. Touch OK to return the settings to their default configuration values, otherwise,
touch Cancel.
A list of input and output discrete functions can be found in section 5.2.8 and section 5.2.9, respectively.

Rev. N Page 6-41
6.6.15 Navigation Features Configuration
Access the Navigation Features Configuration page by touching the Navigation Features key on the GTN
Setup page. This page allows you to configure settings related to user defined waypoints and radius-to-fix
(RF) procedure legs.
Figure 6-27 Navigation Features Configuration Page

Mark On Target (Software v4.00 or Later)
Table 6-30 Mark On Target Selections
Additional user interface for handling mark on target waypoints will be
Enabled present. This is applicable to installations that have the MARK ON TARGET*
discrete input connected.
Additional user interface for handling mark on target waypoints will not be
Disabled (default) present. This is applicable to installations that do not have the MARK ON
TARGET* discrete input connected.
RF Procedure Legs (Software v6.00 or Later)

Table 6-31 RF Procedure Leg Selections
Enabled Procedures that contain RF legs will be available to load.
Disabled (default) Procedures that contain RF legs will not available to load.

Rev. N Page 6-42
6.6.16 Ownship Configuration (Software v5.10 or Later)
Access the Ownship configuration page by touching the Ownship key from the GTN Setup page. This
page allows for the customization of the ownship used on the moving map during flight. Touching the
Color Ownship key will color the ownship magenta, which allows for enhanced visibility on the map
display.
Figure 6-28 Ownship Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-43
6.7 GTN Options Page
The following sections describe pages that are accessed from the GTN Options page. To access the GTN
Options page, touch the GTN Options key from the Configuration Mode page as shown in figure 6-1.
Figure 6-29 GTN Options Page
NOTE
The feature unlock card should be provided to the customer after the GTN installation.

Rev. N Page 6-44
6.7.1 Terrain (TAWS/HTAWS) Configuration Page
TAWS/HTAWS Configuration
Access the Terrain Configuration page by touching the Terrain key on the GTN Options page. Section
6.6.10 contains information on configuring the airframe type. This page allows you to select the Terrain
configuration, configure the TAWS/HTAWS audio, and select the airport criteria. To enable TAWS, a
TAWS-A Enablement Card or TAWS-B Enablement Card is needed. To enable HTAWS, a Helicopter
TAWS Enablement Card is needed. For enablement card part numbers, see section 4.6.
Figure 6-30 Terrain Configuration Page Figure 6-31 Terrain Configuration Page
(Fixed Wing Installations) (Rotorcraft Installations)
When the optional TAWS feature is enabled, the GTN will provide Class B TAWS (TAWS-B) or Class A
TAWS (TAWS-A) functionality. This section describes how to activate the TAWS or HTAWS feature in
the GTN.
NOTE
If enabling TAWS/HTAWS on the GTN, the audio output from the GTN must be connected
to an unswitched and unmuted input on the audio panel. Turn off the GTN prior to the
following steps.
1. Turn the GTN off by pulling the GPS/NAV circuit breaker.
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a TAWS-A Enablement Card,
TAWS-B Enablement Card, or Helicopter TAWS Enablement Card.
3. Enter configuration mode by applying power (closing the circuit breaker) to the GTN while
holding the HOME key.
4. Go to the Terrain page from the GTN Options page. Touch the TAWS A key to enable Class A
TAWS, the TAWS B key to enable Class B TAWS, or the HTAWS key to enable HTAWS.
5. A window will appear with “Enable TAWS-A/B (or HTAWS)? This will consume a feature unlock
key when selected.” Touch Yes to enable TAWS-A, TAWS-B, or HTAWS.
6. When the TAWS/HTAWS feature is activated, the TAWS A, TAWS B, or HTAWS key will be lit
green as shown in figure 6-30 or figure 6-31.

Rev. N Page 6-45
TAWS Audio
Access the Audio Clips page by touching the Audio Clips key on the Terrain Configuration page as shown
in figure 6-30 or figure 6-31.
Figure 6-32 Audio Clips Page

For TAWS-A and TAWS-B, select which message is heard for cautions and warnings. The audio clips for
HTAWS are not configurable. The Audio Clips page for HTAWS is only used to sample the audio clips.
Table 6-32 Audio Clips Selections
Description Selections
GSD Caution [1] “Glideslope”
“Don’t Sink”
NCR Caution
“Too Low Terrain”
ECR Caution [1] “Terrain Terrain”
EDR Caution “Sink Rate”
FIT Flap Caution [1] “Too Low Flaps”
FIT Gear Caution [1] “Too Low Gear”
PDA Caution “Too Low Terrain”
FIT Speed Caution [1] “Too Low Terrain”
FIT Takeoff Caution [1] “Too Low Terrain”
“Obstacle Ahead” x2
IOI Caution
“Caution Obstacle” x2
“Obstacle Ahead” x2
ROC Caution
“Caution Obstacle” x2
“Wire Ahead” x2
ILI Caution
“Caution Wire” x2
“Wire Ahead” x2
RLC Caution
“Caution Wire” x2

Rev. N Page 6-46
Description Selections
“Terrain Ahead” x2
ITI Caution
“Caution Terrain” x2
“Terrain Ahead” x2
RTC Caution
“Caution Terrain” x2
“Obstacle Ahead Pull Up” x2
IOI Warning
“Obstacle” x2 “Pull Up” x2
“Obstacle Ahead Pull Up” x2
ROC Warning
“Obstacle” x2 “Pull Up” x2
“Wire Ahead Pull Up”
ILI Warning x2
“Wire” x2 “Pull Up” x2
“Wire Ahead Pull Up” x2
RLC Warning x 2
“Wire” x2 “Pull Up” x2
“Terrain Ahead Pull Up” x2
ITI Warning
“Terrain” x2 “Pull Up” x2
“Terrain Ahead Pull Up” x2
RTC Warning
“Terrain” x2 “Pull Up” x2
ECR Warning [1] “Tone Tone Pull Up”
TAWS-A: “Tone Tone Pull Up”
EDR Warning
TAWS-B: “Pull Up”
VCO Caution “Five Hundred”
[1] Available in TAWS-A installations only.
TAWS Settings
Configure TAWS Settings from the Terrain Configuration page, as shown in figure 6-30 or figure 6-31.
Runway Surface
Select the applicable runway surface type. The selections are Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, and Water.
Runway Length
Enter the minimum runway length by touching the distance key using the keypad. The range is 0 to 
25,000 ft.
Approach Airspeed (TAWS-A Installations Only)
Enter the appropriate approach airspeed for the aircraft from the aircraft specifications. The range is 1 to
300 knots.
MAX Flap Extension Speed (TAWS-A Installations Only)
Enter the maximum airspeed at which the flaps can be safely deployed in flight. The range is 1 to 300
knots.
MAX Gear Extension Speed (TAWS-A Installations Only)
Enter the maximum airspeed at which the landing gear can be safely deployed in flight. The range is 1 to
300 knots.
Flap Position Discrete (TAWS-A Installations Only)
The FLAP POSITION* discrete can be configured for “Active for Landing” or “Active for Non-Landing”
depending on the electrical characteristics of the flap position switch.

Rev. N Page 6-47
Landing Gear Position Discrete (TAWS-A Installations Only)
The LANDING GEAR POSITION* discrete can be configured for “Active for Landing” or “Active for
Non-Landing” depending on the electrical characteristics of the landing gear position switch.
NOTE
For TAWS-A installations, the following settings must also be configured in addition to the
aforementioned TAWS Settings on the Terrain Configuration page.
 Radio Altimeter format configured for an ARINC 429 input port

 Radio Altimeter configured as “Connected” on the Main System Configuration page
 Landing Gear Position and Flap Position discrete inputs configured on the Discrete
Configuration page
TAWS Alert Voice

Select the voice gender for TAWS alerts generated by the GTN.
NOTE
After selecting the TAWS Alert Voice gender, TAWS will not be available on the first power
cycle in normal mode until the internal audio database is verified by the GTN.

Rev. N Page 6-48
6.7.2 Chart Configuration Page
Access the Charts Configuration page by touching the Charts key on the GTN Options page. This page
allows you to select the which charts are installed on the GTN. Selections are None, FliteCharts, or
ChartView.
Figure 6-33 Chart Configuration Page
NOTE
A ChartView Enablement card is needed for ChartView.
The GTN can display Jeppesen charts using the optional ChartView feature, which must be activated. To
configure which Charts to display, touch either None, FliteCharts, or ChartView. If ChartView is selected,
it must be enabled as described below.
1. Turn the GTN off by pulling the NAV/GPS circuit breaker.
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a ChartView Enablement Card.
3. Enter configuration mode on the GTN by applying power to the GTN (closing the circuit breaker)
while holding the HOME key.
4. Go to the Charts page from the GTN Options page. Touch the ChartView key.
5. When prompted, touch Yes to enable ChartView.
6. When the ChartView feature is activated, the ChartView key will be lit green.
NOTE
Navigation or chart data must not be programmed on the ChartView Enablement card.

Rev. N Page 6-49
6.7.3 COM Transmit Power Configuration Page
Access the COM Transmit Power Configuration page by touching the COM key on the GTN Options
page. This page allows you to select the transmit power mode. Selections are Normal and 16W.
Figure 6-34 COM Transmit Power Configuration Page
NOTE
A 16W COM Enablement card is needed for 16W COM. COM software v2.11 
(P/N 006-B1061-05) or later is required for 16 watt COM installations in 14 volt aircraft.
When the optional 16W COM power is configured, the GTN COM will transmit with 16 watts rather than
the standard 10 watts. 16W COM transmit power should be enabled for aircraft certified to fly above
FL180.
NOTE
The 16W COM Enablement Card can only be used on one GTN (for dual GTN
installations a separate Enablement Card must be used on each GTN). A new 16W COM
Enablement Card must be used for each GTN that has the 16W COM feature activated.

Rev. N Page 6-50
To enable 16W COM transmit power:
1. Turn the GTN off by pulling the GPS/NAV circuit breaker.
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a GTN 7XX 16 Watt Enablement
Card.
3. Enter configuration mode by applying power to the GTN (closing the circuit breaker) while
holding the HOME key.
4. Go to the COM Transmit Power page from the GTN Options page. Touch the 16W key.
5. A window will appear with “Enable 16W COM? This will consume a feature unlock key when
selected.”
6. Touch Yes to enable 16W COM.
7. When the 16W COM feature is activated, the 16W key will be lit green,

Rev. N Page 6-51
6.7.4 Weather Radar Page (Software v3.00 or Later)
Access the Weather Radar page by touching the Weather Radar key on the GTN Options page.
Figure 6-35 Weather Radar Page
NOTE
A GTN 7XX Digital Radar Enablement Card is needed for digital radar.
Digital Radar
The Digital Radar option enables the GTN interface to ARINC 708 weather radars.
The GTN 7XX Digital Radar Enablement Card can only be used on one GTN (for dual GTN installations a
separate GTN 7XX Digital Radar Enablement Card must be used on each GTN).
To enable Digital Radar:
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a GTN 7XX Digital Radar
Enablement Card.
4. Go to the Weather Radar page from the GTN Options page. Touch the Digital Radar key.
5. When prompted, touch Yes to enable Digital Radars. When the feature is activated, the Digital
Radar key will be lit green.

Rev. N Page 6-52
GWX 70 Advanced Features
NOTE
A GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence Detection Card is needed for turbulence detection and a
GTN 7XX Radar Automatic Ground Clutter Suppression Enablement Card is needed for
ground clutter suppression.
The GTN 7XX can enable two Doppler radar features for the GWX 70: Turbulence Detection and Ground
Clutter Suppression.
The GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence Detection Enablement Card is only used on one GTN. For dual GTN
installations, a GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence Detection Dual Install Enablement Card is used for both
GTNs, or separate GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence Detection Enablement Cards can be used on each GTN.
To enable Radar Turbulence Detection:
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a GTN 7XX Radar Turbulence
Detection Enablement Card.
4. Go to the Weather Radar page from the GTN Options page. Touch the Turbulence Detection key,
as shown in figure 6-35.
5. When prompted, touch Yes to enable Turbulence Detection. When the feature is activated, the
Turbulence Detection key will be lit green.
The GTN 7XX Radar Automatic Ground Clutter Suppression Enablement Card is only used on one GTN.
For dual GTN installations, a GTN 7XX Radar Automatic Ground Clutter Suppression Dual Install
Enablement Card is used for both GTNs, or separate GTN 7XX Radar Automatic Ground Clutter
Suppression Enablement Cards can be used on each GTN.
To enable Ground Clutter Suppression:
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a GTN 7XX Radar Automatic
Ground Clutter Suppression Enablement Card.
4. Go to the Weather Radar page from the GTN Options page. Touch the Ground Clutter
Suppression key, as shown in figure 6-35.
5. When prompted, touch Yes to enable Ground Clutter Suppression. When the feature is activated,
the Ground Clutter Suppression key will be lit green.
6.7.5 Flight Simulator
This function is not supported at this time.

Rev. N Page 6-53
6.7.6 Search and Rescue
Access the Search and Rescue page by touching the Search and Rescue key on the GTN Options page.
Figure 6-36 Search and Rescue Configuration
NOTE
A GTN 6XX/7XX Search and Rescue Enablement Card is needed for Search and Rescue.
The GTN 6XX/7XX Search and Rescue Enablement Card is only used on one GTN. In dual GTN
installations, when Search and Rescue is enabled on one GTN, the enablement is automatically transferred
to the other GTN. The SAR status will display “Unlocked Remotely.” If the originally enabled GTN is
disconnected from the second GTN, then Search and Rescue is disabled on the GTN that was remotely
unlocked. The SAR status displays, “Unavailable – Remote Unlock Missing.”
To enable the Search and Rescue feature:
1. Power off the GTN.
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot.
3. Insert a GTN 6XX/7XX Search and Rescue Enablement Card.
4. Power on the GTN in configuration mode. See section 6.4.
5. Touch Search and Rescue key on GTN Options page. See figure 6-29.
6. Touch Search and Rescue key on Search and Rescue Configuration page.
7. When prompted, touch Yes to enable Search and Rescue. When this feature is activated, the
Search and Rescue key appears green and the SAR status displays “Unlocked On This Unit.”
8. Select the SAR Patterns to be used in normal mode: Parallel Track, Sector Search, Expanding
Square, and Orbit.

Rev. N Page 6-54
6.8 GTN Diagnostics Page
Access the GTN Diagnostics page by touching the GTN Diagnostics key on the Configuration Mode
page. The following sections describe the pages that are available on the GTN Diagnostics page.
Figure 6-37 GTN Diagnostics Page

6.8.1 ARINC Inputs Page
The ARINC Inputs Diagnostics page allows the display of ARINC 429 data that is being received over
each ARINC 429 port. Each port can be chosen for display by touching the Port key and toggling between
the input ports. Select a port to display. The GTN will then display the label, SSM, Data, and SDI for each
ARINC 429 input port. The data log can be paused by toggling the Pause key. Clear the data log by
touching the Clear Log key.
6.8.2 Serial Inputs Page
The Serial Inputs page allows the display of serial data that is being received and is useful for determining
if the GTN is receiving data on each connected port. Select the desired port by touching the key labeled
Port and selecting the RS-232 channel from the list. The data log can be paused by toggling the Pause key.
Clear the data log by touching the Clear Log key.
6.8.3 Discrete Pages
6.8.3.1 Discrete Inputs Page
The Discrete Inputs page displays the state of each discrete input of the GTN. To perform a checkout of all
discrete inputs, see section 6.10.3.
6.8.3.2 Discrete Outputs Page
The Discrete Outputs page displays the state of each discrete output of the GTN and allows the state to be
toggled. To perform a checkout of all discrete outputs, see section 6.10.4.
6.8.4 HSDB (Ethernet) Page
The HSDB (Ethernet) page displays the status of each HSDB port. This page displays whether or not each
port is receiving data and displays whether the port is connected or not connected. The configuration status
of each installed HSDB LRU is also displayed. See section 6.6.3 for HSDB port configuration instructions.

Rev. N Page 6-55
6.8.5 Main Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics Page
The Main Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics page allows the CDI connected to the main board (P1001) to be
ground checked and allows the interface to be verified. For the Main Indicator checkout procedure, see
section 6.10.1.
6.8.6 Analog Inputs Page
The Analog Inputs page displays the bus voltage setting for Lighting Bus 1 and Lighting Bus 2 as well is
the input voltage setting for each bus. It also displays synchro heading input diagnostics information such
as heading angle, heading valid status, AC voltage, and AC frequency.
6.8.7 Power Statistics Page
The Power Statistics page displays the number of times the GTN has powered up as well as the total
elapsed operating hours for the GTN.
6.8.8 WAAS Diagnostics Page
The WAAS Diagnostics page displays the WAAS engine status, including UTC date/time, current 
Lat/Lon, overall navigation status, oscillator temperature, and AGC voltage. This page also allows the
GPS/WAAS engine to be reset.
6.8.9 Temperatures Page
The Temperatures page displays the current, minimum, maximum, and average board temperatures for the
LED board, main board, display interface board, GPS/WAAS board, and COM board.
6.8.10 Error Log Page
The Error Log page allows the error log to be written to the SD card in the front slot. It also allows the error
log to be cleared.
6.8.11 Main Data Inputs Page
The Main Data Inputs page allows the data on ARINC 429, RS-232, and other electrical inputs to be
monitored. This is used for verifying electrical interfaces during installation and troubleshooting.
Information that is not being received by the GTN is dashed out.
6.8.12 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) Page
The VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics page allows the CDI connected to the NAV board (P1004)
to be ground checked and allows the NAV indicator interface to be verified. See section 6.10.2 for the
ground check.
6.8.13 Clear Config Module
CAUTION
This key should only be pressed if the intent is to clear all configuration settings. Touching
the Clear Config Module key resets all of the settings stored in the configuration module
to their defaults.

Rev. N Page 6-56
6.9 External Systems
The following section contains procedures for configuring remote-mount units that are connected to the
GTN. To configure external systems using the GTN, touch the External Systems key from the
Configuration Mode page.
Figure 6-38 External Systems Page

Rev. N Page 6-57
6.9.1 GDL 69/69A Interface Check
Figure 6-39 GDL 69/69A Configuration Page

If installed, the GDL 69/69A must be configured to match the installation, follow the steps below.
1. Access the GDL 69/69A Configuration page by touching the GDL 69 key on the External Systems
page.
2. Adjust the antenna gain and cable loss to match the installation. Refer to GDL 69 Series TSO
Installation Manual to determine the correct values.
3. Enable any GDL 69/69A Ethernet ports as required by the installation.
NOTE
The GDL 69/69A SiriusXM must be activated before use. If the SiriusXM has not been
activated, refer to GDL 69 Series TSO Installation Manual and GDL 69/69A SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions.

Rev. N Page 6-58
6.9.2 Stormscope® Page
NOTE
The Stormscope pages are only available if the WX-500 is connected to the 
RS-232 channel that is configured for the WX-500.
Figure 6-40 Stormscope Page

Rev. N Page 6-59
6.9.2.1 Stormscope Configuration Page
Access the Stormscope Configuration page by touching the Configure key on the Stormscope page, as
shown in figure 6-40. The L3 Communications WX-500 Stormscope configuration is reported by the 
WX-500 through RS-232 data.
Figure 6-41 Stormscope Configuration Page

Verify the Status field displays “Ok,” and that the other displayed parameters are correct based upon the
installation. See the configuration information in the WX-500 Installation Manual to determine the correct
configuration.
When a GTN is interfaced with a WX-500 Stormscope, the “Synchro” or “Serial” heading formats may be
used. If another heading format is used, lightning strike information is visible on the Weather page, but not
the Map page.

Rev. N Page 6-60
6.9.2.2 Stormscope Test Page
Access the Stormscope Test page by touching the Test key from the Stormscope page. This page shows
current strike activity, WX-500 status, and the heading supplied by the WX-500. The WX-500 mode may
be changed to Cell, Strike, Noise, Strike Test, Self Test, and Demo by touching the Menu key and
displaying the Stormscope Test Menu as shown in figure 6-43.
Figure 6-42 Stormscope Test Page

The strikes can be cleared from the display by touching the Clear Strikes key. The view can be changed
by touching the 360˚ key or the Arc key.
Verify that the WX-500 mode can be changed. Refer to the WX-500 manual for specific installation test
procedures for the WX-500, using this page to view strike data, change the WX-500 mode, view WX-500
status, trigger count, and heading.

Rev. N Page 6-61
6.9.2.3 Stormscope Download Data Page
Access the Stormscope Download Data page by touching the Download Data key on the Stormscope
page, as shown in figure 6-40. This page shows raw data downloadable from the WX-500. Optional sets of
data include WX-500 software version, configuration data, environment data, and fault log data.
Verify that the configuration data is correct as intended. To request which packet of data to display, touch
the key underneath “Data to Display” and select a data type from the menu.
Figure 6-43 Stormscope Test Menu Page

Rev. N Page 6-62
6.9.3 Traffic Test Page
Figure 6-44 Traffic Test Page

Access the Traffic Test page by touching the Traffic key on the External Systems page. The traffic page
displays the traffic system modes of operation and current traffic situation. The following pages are only
available if one of the ARINC 429 or RS-232 inputs configured is for a traffic format or the GDL 88 is
interfaced to the GTN.
Depending on the type of traffic system installed, the information displayed on the Traffic Test page can
vary.
6.9.3.1 Ryan TCAD
For Ryan TCAD, the Traffic Test page displays the following data:
 Current Shield Mode
 Altitude Filter - Normal, Above, Below and Unrestricted
 Barometric Pressure
By touching the Menu key, the traffic menu can be displayed. Under Traffic Audio, the mute duration
(9900B only) and traffic audio volume can be set and the TCAD can be toggled between voice and tone
alerts. Under Shield Setup, the shield settings can be configured for the various shield types. Also, Ground
Mode (9900BX only) and APPR Mode can be toggled.
6.9.3.2 Other Traffic Systems
For traffic systems other than Ryan TCAD, the Traffic Test page displays the following data:
 Altitude Filter - Normal, Above, Below, and Unrestricted
 Operating Mode - Standby, Operate, or TAS Fail
 Altitude
 Heading
 BARO Alt and RAD Alt status

Rev. N Page 6-63
6.9.4 GAD 42 Configuration
The GAD 42 can be configured by the GTN if an ARINC 429 input is connected to the GAD 42 and an
ARINC 429 output from the GTN is connected to the GAD 42.
Access the GAD 42 Configuration page by touching the GAD 42 key on the External Systems page. The
GAD 42 configuration page allows remote configuration of the GAD 42 Interface Adapter Unit. For
details on how to configure the unit, refer to section 5 of 
GAD 42 Installation Manual.
Figure 6-45 GAD 42 Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-64
6.9.5 Remote Transponder Configuration (GTX 32 or GTX 33 Only)
A remote transponder can be configured by the GTN via RS-232 if a transponder is configured for one of
the RS-232 ports. To configure the transponder, it must first be selected as present and the type of
transponder installed must be specified. For details, see section 6.6.4. Next, go to the External Systems
page and touch the XPDR key. This key displays a page which allows the remote transponder to be
configured.
NOTE
If the GTN is not communicating with the transponder, all of the editable fields for the
setup items shown in the following sections will be dashed out. If the fields are dashed out,
check the wiring and pin connections from the GTN to the transponder.
Figure 6-46 XPDR1 Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-65
6.9.5.1 Transponder Inputs and Outputs
Access the XPDR Input/Outputs page by touching the Inputs and Outputs key from the XPDR
Configuration page. The transponder RS-232 port inputs can be configured by the GTN. 
RS-232 Port 1 input for the transponder can only be set to Remote, and is the default for Port 1 input.
RS-232 Port 1 is used for control and remote configuring of the transponder.
Figure 6-47 XPDR Input/Outputs Page

6.9.5.2 RS-232 Configuration
The following outlines RS-232 port settings and describes the purpose of each setting. Select the correct
input/output setting based upon the installed interfaced equipment.
Table 6-33 RS-232 Port 1 Input
Remote The RS-232 port is configured for remote control by the GTN.
Table 6-34 RS-232 Port 1 Outputs
Remote RS-232 serial output remote data.
Remote + TIS RS-232 serial output remote data with TIS.

Rev. N Page 6-66
Table 6-35 RS-232 Port 2 Inputs
GTN Selection GTX 330 Equivalent Description
DEFAULT. The altitude code input is not from an RS-
OFF Off
232 source.
RS-232 serial air data information from air data
Airdata Format 1 ADC
computer plus altitude data.
RS-232 serial air data information from air data
Airdata Format 2 ADC no Alt
computer.
Altitude Format 1 Icarus Alt RS-232 reports serial altitude information.
RS-232 reports altitude information in 25-foot
Altitude Format 2 Icarus Alt 25 ft
increments.
Altitude Format 3 Shadin Alt RS-232 serial altitude from encoders.
Altitude Format 4 Shadin Alt 25 ft Reports altitude information in 25-foot increments.
RS-232 serial air data from air data computers, fuel/air
FADC Format 1 FADC w/Alt
data computers plus altitude data.
RS-232 serial air data from air data computers and fuel/
FADC Format 2 FADC No Alt
air data computers.
GPS GPS RS-232 ground speed from a GPS device.
Remote Remote RS-232 serial input remote data.
Table 6-36 RS-232 Port 2 Outputs

GTN Selection GTX 330 Equivalent Description
Default for channel 2. No unit is connected to the output
OFF Off
of this channel.
Altitude Format 1 Icarus Alt RS-232 serial altitude from an Icarus Instruments 3000.
REMOTE N/A RS-232 serial output remote data.
REMOTE w/TIS N/A RS-232 serial output remote data with TIS.
Table 6-37 Baud Rate Selections

Select the baud rate for each RS-232 channel.
9600 Sets the baud rate to 9600 Bd.
Table 6-38 Parity Selections

Select the parity for RS-232 channel 2.
Even Parity Sets the Parity to Even.
No Parity Sets the Parity to None.
Odd Parity Sets the Parity to Odd.

Rev. N Page 6-67
6.9.5.3 ARINC 429 Configuration (GTX 33 Only)
Configure the four ARINC 429 input ports and the two ARINC 429 output ports. Select the correct speed
for each port depending upon the installed interfaced equipment by touching the speed key and toggling
the high or low selection. Each port can be configured independently for the desired functions by selecting
the desired data format from the menu.
Table 6-39 ARINC 429 Speed Selections
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 Kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 Kb per second)
Select the correct Data In and Data Out settings for each port. The data selections are described below.
Table 6-40 ARINC 429 Input Selections

Channel Selection Description
All OFF No unit connected to this ARINC 429 input.
ADC NO ALT Temperature and speed information.
ADC w/ALT Altitude, temperature and speed information.
AFCS Selected altitude, baro setting, and pitch discretes.
AHRS Attitude and heading information.
Selected course, heading, temperature, joystick
EFIS/ADC NO ALT
waypoint and speed information.
1 Selected course, heading, temperature, joystick
EFIS/ADC w/ALT
through waypoint and speed information plus altitude data.
3 Standard GNSS output. Includes position, velocity,
GARMIN 743A
and integrity data.
Same as GPS with added ability of receiving phase
GARMIN DISPLAY
of flight data.
GARMIN TAS Traffic Advisory System discretes.
Selected waypoint information and GPS ground
GPS
speed recognition.
Airborne Data Link Processor. ADLP is available
4 ADLP only on channel 4. Not available with GTX software
v8.00 or later.

Rev. N Page 6-68
The GTX 33 receives one of the following sets of ARINC 429 data. The labels are chosen when selected in
ARINC 429 INPUT. The received data may be at either LOW or HIGH speed. The default is LOW. The
received data labels are as follows:
Table 6-41 AHRS Computer Labels

Label # Data
314 True Heading (degrees)
320 Magnetic Heading (degrees)
325 Roll Angle
365 Vertical Rate (feet/min)
Table 6-42 Air Data Computer Labels

Label # Data
203* Pressure Altitude (feet)
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet)
205 Mach Number
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots)
210 True Air Speed (knots)
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees)
212 Vertical Speed (feet/min)
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees)
* If ADC W/ALT or EFIS/ADC W/ ALT format selected.
Table 6-43 EFIS Display System Labels

Label # Data
100 Selected Course (degrees)
102 Selected Altitude (feet)
203* Pressure Altitude (feet)
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet)
205 Mach Number
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots)
210 True Air Speed (knots)
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees)
212 Vertical Speed (feet/min)
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees)
234 Barometric Setting (hPa)
235 Barometric Setting (“Hg)
314 True Heading
325 Roll Angle
* If ADC W/ALT or EFIS/ADC W/ALT format selected.

Rev. N Page 6-69
Table 6-44 GPS/FMS Navigation System Labels
Label # Data
310 GPS Latitude (degrees)
311 GPS Longitude (degrees)
312 Ground Speed (knots)
313 Track Angle (degrees)
Table 6-45 Garmin Display Labels

Label # Data
310 GPS Latitude (degrees)
311 GPS Longitude (degrees)
261 GPS Discretes
312 GPS Ground Speed (knots)
313 GPS Track Angle (degrees)
314 True Heading (degrees)
Table 6-46 Garmin TAS Label

Label # Data
274 TAS Discretes
Table 6-47 AFCS Labels

Label # Data
234 Barometric Setting (hPa)
235 Barometric Setting (“Hg)
271 Pitch Discretes
ARINC 429 Channel 1 defaults to Off. Each output port can be configured independently for the desired
function. Both ARINC 429 outputs send high speed ARINC 429 data.
Table 6-48 ARINC 429 Output Selections
DATA SOURCE: OFF, ADLP, GARMIN, GARMIN TAS, or GARMIN W/TIS.
CHANNEL 1 (DATA) DEFAULTS to OFF. ARINC 429 input channel 4 sets the ARINC 429 output
channel 1 to the same selection. [1]
DATA SOURCE: OFF, GARMIN, GARMIN TAS, or GARMIN W/TIS.
CHANNEL 2 (DATA) DEFAULTS to GARMIN W/TIS. Do not select GARMIN W/TIS if the aircraft
contains another traffic detection system.
[1] ADLP is not available with GTX software v8.00 or later.

Rev. N Page 6-70
The Garmin format is a data concentration function. The following data is sent out at specified intervals
using high speed ARINC 429 (100 kHz). The transmit data labels and their rates are as follows:
Table 6-49 ARINC 429 Labels
Label # Data Rate
100 Selected Course (degrees) 200 ms
203 Pressure Altitude (feet) 100 ms
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet) 100 ms
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots) 100 ms
210 True Air Speed (knots) 100 ms
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees) 100 ms
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees) 100 ms
314 True Heading 100 ms
320 Magnetic Heading (degrees) 100 ms
371 GA Equipment Identifier 500 ms
377 Equipment Identifier 500 ms
The following data is sent out in packets approximately every 0.5 seconds at high speed (100 kHz), in the
specified sequence.
Table 6-50 Additional ARINC 429 Labels
Label # Data
350 Fault Summary
274 Transponder Control
313 Own Aircraft Track Angle
357 (RTS) Request to Send
130 Intruder Range (0 – 8 sets)
131 Intruder Altitude (0 – 8 sets)
132 Intruder Bearing (0 – 8 sets)
357 (EXT) End of Transmission

Rev. N Page 6-71
6.9.5.4 Transponder Installation Settings Page
Access the XPDR Installation Settings page by touching the Installation Settings key from the XPDR
Configuration page.
Figure 6-48 XPDR1 Installation Settings Page

VFR Button Code
Input a VFR transponder code by touching the key and typing the selected code into the keypad. This field
has a range of 0000-7777.
NOTE
Avoid selecting code 7500 and all codes in the 7600-7777 range. These codes trigger
special indicators in automated facilities. An aircraft’s transponder code is used for ATC
tracking purposes, therefore exercise care when making routine code changes.
Aircraft Weight
Select the weight of the aircraft in which the transponder is installed.
Table 6-51 Aircraft Weight Selections
<15,500 LBS Configures the aircraft weight to less than 15,500 lbs.
>=15,500 LBS Configures the aircraft weight to equal to or greater than 15,500 lbs.
ROTORCRAFT Configures to rotorcraft use.
UNKNOWN Aircraft weight is unknown.
Auto Standby Delay
This is the number of seconds the aircraft must be on the ground before the transponder automatically
switches to GND mode when it has a means of determining the aircraft is on the ground. It has a range of 0
seconds to 99 seconds. The default value of 24 seconds is a nominal value for most aircraft. This value can
be changed depending on the types of operations the aircraft is expected to encounter.

Rev. N Page 6-72
Altitude Climb Rate for Airborne Transition
This is the climb rate that is required in order to transition from ground to airborne state. This field is
adjustable from 100 fpm to 9999 fpm. This field should be set to the typical vertical speed climb rate of the
aircraft. This number determines the rate of climb necessary for the GTN to assume lift-off for detecting an
airborne state. Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) to determine this value. If the POH does not
include aircraft climb rate information, use the default value of 300 fpm.
Air/Ground Logic
Select the source for the air/ground logic.
Table 6-52 Air/Ground Logic Selections
Auto Airborne Off This is not a valid setting.
Squat Switch The transponder is connected to a squat switch to determine airborne state.
The transponder is using GPS data to determine the airborne state. Only select
GPS Data
this setting if a GTX input port is configured to GPS.
Select this setting if a squat switch is not installed and no GTX input ports are
Altitude Data
configured for GPS.
Squat Switch Sense
The squat switch sense field may be set to either High or Low. If the air/ground logic field is set to squat
switch, the squat switch sense field is used to define the state of the squat switch input. If the squat sense
field is set to High, then when the squat switch input is high, the aircraft is considered to be on the ground.
If the squat sense field is set to low, then when the squat switch input is low, the aircraft is considered to be
on the ground.
Max Airspeed (GTX 33 Only)
Select the maximum true airspeed for the aircraft. The default is <= 150 KTS.
Table 6-53 Maximum Airspeed Selections
<= 75 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 75 knots TAS.
<= 150 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 150 knots TAS.
<=300 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds less than or equal to 300 knots TAS.
>1200 KTS Max aircraft operating speeds greater than 1200 knots TAS.
UNKNOWN Max aircraft speed is unknown.
Address Type (GTX 33 ONLY)
Select the method of entry of the aircraft address.
Table 6-54 Address Type Selections
US Tail N-Registration Number (GTN main software v3.00 or later)
Allows technician to enter the aircraft registration number in hexadecimal code
HEX ID
format.

Rev. N Page 6-73
Address (GTX 33 Only)
Enter the Aircraft Address. Enter the aircraft registration number in hexadecimal code format. The Octal
code for the Mode S Address is an 8-digit number that can be found on the aircraft registration certificate
or by visiting www.faa.gov and entering the N-number of the aircraft into the N-number inquiry section of
the website. Convert the Octal Mode S Address into hexadecimal format and enter the hex ID of the
aircraft. If the “Flight ID” is configured to SAME AS TAIL, ensure that the correct tail number appears in
the Flight ID field.
NOTE
The Octal Mode S Address can be converted to hexadecimal format with the use of a
scientific calculator. Microsoft Windows calculator can be used by selecting “scientific”
view and then by entering the octal code. With “Oct” selected on the calculator, enter the
Octal Mode S Address. Change the selection to “Hex,” and enter the displayed Hex code
into the address field on the GTN.
Figure 6-49 Microsoft Windows Calculator

Flight ID Type (GTX 33 Only)
For operation requiring the flight crew to enter an aircraft identification designator, select the page
identified as “Pilot Entry.” When this choice is selected and the crew enters the Flight ID correctly, the
flight number call sign for radio contact with ATC is the same flight identification that the GTX 33 Mode
S transponder replies to ATC radar interrogations.
Table 6-55 Flight ID Type Selections
Config Entry Allows technician to enter Flight ID while in configuration mode only.
Pilot Entry Allows pilot/technician to enter Flight ID in the GTN in normal mode.
If Address Type is US Tail, allows Flight ID to use the same number. This
Same As Tail setting is not available when the selected address type is HEX ID.
Selecting “Pilot Entry” allows the Flight ID to remain the same as that entered during the previous flight
until it is updated, the crew is not prompted to update the Flight ID. The selections “Same As Tail” and
“Config Entry” are fixed Mode S addresses.

Rev. N Page 6-74
Flight ID (GTX 33 Only)
Enter the flight ID number of the aircraft. This field allows 8 alphanumeric characters.
Aircraft Length (GTX 33 Only)
Sets the length of the aircraft to less than or equal to 15 meters (49 ft), less than or equal to 25 meters (82
ft), less than or equal to 35 meters (115 ft), less than or equal to 45 meters (148 ft), less than or equal to 55
meters (180 ft), less than or equal to 65 meters (213 ft), less than or equal to 75 meters (246 ft), less than or
equal to 85 meters (279 ft), or more than 85 meters (279 ft). Enter the aircraft’s minimum length category.
Aircraft Width (GTX 33 Only)
Sets the wingspan of the aircraft to less than or equal to 11.5 meters (38 ft), less than or equal to 23.0
meters (75 ft), less than or equal to 28.5 meters (94 ft), less than or equal to 33.0 meters (108 ft), less than
or equal to 34.0 meters (112 ft), less than or equal to 38.0 meters (125 ft), less than or equal to 39.5 meters
(130 ft), less than or equal to 45.0 meters (148 ft), less than or equal to 52.0 meters (171 ft), less than or
equal to 59.5 meters (195 ft), less than or equal to 67.0 meters (220 ft), less than or equal to 72.5 meters
(238 ft), less than or equal to 80.0 meters (262 ft), or more then 80.0 meters (262 ft). Enter the aircraft’s
minimum width category.
Enhanced Surveillance (GTX 33 Only)
Sets Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) to DISABLE or ENABLE. When EHS is set to DISABLE the
enhanced surveillance function is not available.
Surveillance Integrity Level (GTX 33ES Only)
The surveillance integrity level field sets the correct GPS integrity for the interfaced GPS receiver. The
field can be set to 1E-3, 1E-5, or 1E-7. When the GTX is interfaced with a GTN using the “+” RS-232
formats (i.e., GTX Mode S+, ADS-B+, etc.), this setting should be set to “1E-7.” In installations using the
standard GTX RS-232 formats (i.e., GTX Mode S, ADS-B, etc.), 1E-5 should be used.
The GPS INTEGRITY configuration field indicates the integrity of the GPS sensor that is connected to the
transponder. It is measured in errors per flight hour, 1E-3 being the worst and 1E-7 being the best rating.
This data is used in ADS-B transmissions.
Temperature Sensor Installed (GTX 33 Only)
This field determines if a temperature sensor is connected to the GTX 33. Select “Yes” if a temperature
sensor is connected to the transponder; select “No” if not.
CAUTION
The 1090 and UAT input settings in this section will affect future ADS-B features and
capabilities provided to aircraft which are ADS-B Version 2 compliant in accordance with
AC 20-165A. However, the effects of these settings may not be apparent until these
features are fully implemented. Please read the description carefully and set these
parameters based on the each particular aircraft’s ability to receive ADS-B data on the
1090 MHz and/or 978 MHz (UAT) band.
CAUTION
If 1090 Input and UAT Input are both set to YES, it is important that the aircraft actually
be equipped with equipment capable of receiving ADS-B on both bands along with the
capability to display from both bands simultaneously. Otherwise, a complete traffic
picture may not be provided by the ADS-B ground stations.

Rev. N Page 6-75
ADS-B Out (GTX 33ES Only, GTN Software v5.10 or Later)
This field controls the ADS-B out function of the transponder. The options are: Enable, Disable, and Pilot
Set.
1090 Input (GTX 33ES Only, GTN Software v3.00 or Later)
This field determines if the aircraft is equipped with 1090 MHz ADS-B In equipment. Select “Yes” if the
aircraft equipped with 1090 MHz ADS-B In equipment, select “No” if not.
UAT Input (GTX 33ES Only, GTN Software v3.00 or Later)
This field determines if the aircraft is equipped with 978 MHz (UAT) ADS-B In equipment or if the
owner/operator of the aircraft will be using a handheld UAT receiver for Traffic Information. Select, “Yes”
if equipped with 978 MHz (UAT) ADS-B In equipment, select “No” if not.
GPS Antenna Longitudinal Offset (GTX 33ES Only, GTN Software v3.00 or Later)
Enter the GPS antenna longitudinal offset distance, rounded to the nearest even meter from the nose of the
aircraft. This offset is configurable from 2m to 60m.
GPS Antenna Lateral Offset (GTX 33ES Only, GTN Software v3.00 or Later)
Enter the GPS antenna lateral offset distance, rounded to the nearest even meter from the centerline of the
aircraft (left or right, looking forward). This offset is configurable from 0 m to 6 m.

Rev. N Page 6-76
6.9.5.5 Transponder Audio Configuration
Access the XPDR Audio Configuration page by touching the XPDR key on the External Systems page
followed by touching the Audio Config key, as shown in figure 6-46.
Figure 6-50 XPDR1 Audio Configuration Page

Altitude Monitor
Select the desired audio type for the Altitude Monitor alert. The choices are Off, Tone, or Message.
Count Down Timer
Select the desired audio type for the Count Down Timer alert. The choices are Off, Tone, or Message.
TIS Alert
Select the desired audio type for TIS alerts. The choices are Off, Tone, or Message.
Voice Setting
Set the voice type to male or female.
Volume
Adjust the desired volume level for transponder audio. Volume is adjusted from 0 to +63 dB. Ensure the
volume level is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise environments.
Test Tone (GTN Software v5.10 or Later)
Select the desired test tone. The choices are 500Hz Tone or Tone. Touching the triangle will play the
selected test tone.
Test Audio (GTN Software v5.10 or Later)
Select the desired test audio. The choices are Leaving Altitude, Traffic, Timer Expired or Traffic Not
Available. Touching the triangle will play the selected test audio.

Rev. N Page 6-77
6.9.5.6 Transponder In Air Test (GTN Software v5.10 or Later)
Touching the Force Airborne Test key on the XPDR Configuration page enables the transponder in air
test. See figure 6-46.
The transponder in air test forces the transponder into “airborne” mode during the next power cycle. This
enables the transponder to be checked for proper airborne operation.
6.9.6 Audio Panel Configuration
NOTE
For configuration and software compatibility information, see section 6.6.2.
6.9.6.1 Audio Terminology
Table 6-56 Audio Terminology

Term Definition
Unswitched inputs. These inputs are typically warnings, and cannot be
ALERT
unselected by the user.
The second crewmember is considered the COPILOT The COPILOT typically
COPILOT sits in the front right seat in fixed-wing aircraft, and in the front left seat in
rotorcraft.
Refers to aircraft occupants who can transmit on radios. i.e., PILOT and
CREW COPILOT. In certain installations, each crew member may be able to
individually select radios.
Intercom Communication System - This refers to the distribution of
ICS
microphone audio for each occupant in the aircraft.
Passenger Address - This refers to a crewmember broadcasting audio to the
PA Passengers either through headsets or speakers outside of the ICS
distribution.
Occupants considered passengers are not able to transmit or select
PASSENGERS individual radios, and are treated as a group in that each PASSENGER hears
the same audio.
The first crewmember is considered the PILOT. The pilot is typically the front
PILOT left-seat for airplanes. This crew position will always hear Selected Audio
(SA).
Push-To-Talk - This refers to keyed microphone transmissions. An input must
PTT
be activated before the microphone audio is transmitted.
For a crewmember, the Primary Radio is the radio selected for transmission.
PRIMARY RADIO A Push-to-talk (PTT) by a crewmember will transmit over the PRIMARY
RADIO.
Selected Audio - This refers to the combination of audio sources selected by
SA
the crewmember. Note that Alerts are separate from Selected Audio.
SECONDARY For a crewmember, any radio selected for monitoring that is not selected for
RADIOS transmission is considered a Secondary Radio.
When music audio is muted due to an audio interruption such as ICS or
SOFT MUTE alerts, Soft Mute feature allows music audio to fade in gradually to the original
volume setting after muting.

Rev. N Page 6-78
Term Definition
Sidetone refers to the audio spoken into the microphone by an occupant.
Many half-duplex radios provide sidetone audio to the radio's received audio
output. When transmitting on these radios, it is not desired for the Audio
SIDETONE
Panel to provide the sidetone to the headset since this is usually provided by
the transceiver. For PA and Telephone audio, sidetone distribution may be
adjusted.
6.9.6.2 GMA 35 Audio Panel Settings
To configure the audio panel, go to the External Systems page and touch the Audio Panel key. Touch the
Configure key to access configuration settings for audio routing, volume, and miscellaneous options.
Touching the Connected Radios key allows the radios which are connected to the audio panel to be
configured.
NOTE
All references to the GMA 35 also apply to the GMA 35c.
Figure 6-51 Audio Panel Page

Rev. N Page 6-79
On the Audio Panel Configuration page, when a GMA 35 software loader card is inserted, there is a key
labeled Set to Default Config, which will command the audio panel settings back to the factory default
configuration. Throughout the next sections, the default settings are noted. If it is desired to set all audio
panel settings back to the default, touch the Set to Default Config key. A prompt will appear with “Set
Audio Panel to Default Configuration?”. Touch OK to acknowledge the prompt, as shown in figure 6-52.
Figure 6-52 Audio Panel Default Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-80
6.9.6.2.1 Audio Panel Configuration Settings
Figure 6-53 Audio Panel Configuration Page

Intercom
Mute PASS to CREW intercom during alerts
Select “True” to mute passenger audio during alerts or select “False” to allow passenger audio to be
audible to the crew during alerts. True is the default selection.
Mute PASS to CREW intercom during selected audio
Select “True” to mute passenger audio during selected audio or select “False” to allow passenger audio to
be audible to the crew during selected audio. False is the default selection.
Passengers hear selected audio
Select True to allow passengers to hear selected audio. Select “False” to disable selected audio routing to
the passengers. False is the default selection.
Receiver 5 is Passenger (GTN Software v5.10 or Later)
Select “True” to enable RCVR 5 for the fifth passenger headset. Select “False” to only allow four
passenger headsets. False is the default selection.
Passenger Address
Disable PA functionality
Select “True” to disable the passenger address function. Select “False” to enable the PA functionality.
False is the default selection.
Music
Mute PASS music during intercom
Select “True” to mute passenger music while the passengers are hearing microphone audio from an
occupant. Select “False” to have passenger music to continue playing during ICS audio. True is the default
selection.

Rev. N Page 6-81
Alerts
Passengers hear alerts
Select “True” to have passengers to hear alert audio. Select “False” to disable alert audio routing to the
passengers. False is the default selection.
Secondary Radios
Mute secondary radios on primary radio reception
Select “True” to have all secondary COM audio muted upon receiving primary COM audio. Select “False”
to have secondary COM audio play simultaneously with primary COM audio reception. False is the default
selection.
Sidetone
Audio Processor generates COM1 internal sidetone
Select “True” to have the audio panel provide COM1 sidetone in installations in which the COM1 radio
does not provide sidetone audio. Select “False” to have the COM1 radio generate its own sidetone. False is
the default selection.
does not provide sidetone audio. Select “False” to have the COM2 radio generate its own sidetone. False is
the default selection.
does not provide sidetone audio. Select “False” to allow the COM3 radio generate its own sidetone. False
is the default selection.
COM 1/2 Connections
COM 1 is connected as COM 2
Select “True” if COM1 is connected as COM2 and select “False” if COM1 is connected as COM1. A
setting of “True” allows the GTN to be connected to the COM2 port, but appear to the pilot as COM1.
False is the default selection.
Speaker
Ambient Noise Mic On
Select “True” to enable the ambient noise sensor that is built into the GMA 35. Select “False” to disable
the noise sensor. The ambient noise sensor allows the GMA 35 to adjust the volume of the speaker based
upon the ambient noise environment. The ambient noise sensor is mounted internal to the GMA 35, with
no external wiring. False is the default selection.
Headset (GTN Software v5.00 or Later)
Ambient Noise Mic On
Select “True” to enable the ambient noise sensor of the microphone in the pilot’s headset. Select “False” to
disable the noise sensor. The ambient noise sensor allows the GMA 35 to adjust the volume of the headsets
based upon the ambient noise environment as detected through the pilot’s microphone. No additional
wiring is necessary. False is the default selection.

Rev. N Page 6-82
6.9.6.2.2 Volume Configuration Settings
Use the following procedure when adjusting volumes in the GMA 35 to provide the best audio results. This
procedure allows the signal levels in the audio wires to be large so that they are more resistant to noise
interference. When audio levels can be controlled at the audio source and the GMA 35 has an input gain
control for the audio source, perform the following procedure:
1. Adjust the source audio level to the minimum and the audio panel input gain control to the
minimum.
2. Adjust the volume settings on the audio panel for normal operation.
3. Increase the audio source level until the desired audio level is reached or the audio source is close
to the maximum specified input level for the audio panel input.
4. If the audio from the audio source is not loud enough, increase the audio panel input gain until the
desired audio level is reached. Repeat this setup for each audio source and audio panel input with
adjustable gains.
5. If the audio source does not have adjustable gain then adjust the gain for the audio panel input until
the desired audio level is reached. For volume adjustments on the GMA 35, increasing the gain to
+96 will increase the volume, and decreasing the gain to -96 will decrease the volume.
6. If the audio panel input does not have adjustable gain then adjust the audio source gain until the
desired audio level is reached. Refer to the audio source manufacturer’s installation documentation
for volume adjustment instructions. For the volume settings described below, higher gain values
increase volume and lower gain values decrease volume.
Figure 6-54 Audio Panel Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-83
Input Volume
Alert 1 thru 4 input audio volume
These settings allow the unswitched alert input audio to the GMA 35 to be adjusted. This setting is
configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Failsafe warn input audio volume
This setting allows the failsafe warn audio input to the GMA 35 to be adjusted. This setting is configurable
from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Marker volume
This adjusts the marker beacon volume output to the crew headsets. This setting is configurable from -96
to +96. The default is 0. This setting adjusts the maximum allowable volume range in GTN normal mode.
Music 1 and Music 2
This adjusts the volume of the 2 music inputs to the GMA 35. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0. This setting adjusts the maximum allowable volume range in GTN normal mode.
Telephone
This adjusts the telephone input volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Bluetooth Telephone and Music (GTN Software v6.00 or Later)
These settings adjust the Bluetooth telephone and music input audio to the GMA 35c. It is configurable
Audio Clips
This adjusts the audio clip input volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Speaker Volume
Pilot PA
This setting adjusts the pilot passenger address to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from
-96 to +96. The default is 0.
Copilot PA
This setting adjusts the copilot passenger address to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable
Crew Audio
This setting adjusts the crew audio to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0.
Alert Audio Sum
This setting adjusts the alert audio to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0.
Squelch Threshold
COM 1-3
These settings adjust the signal strength required to break squelch for each input. These are configurable
from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break
squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.

Rev. N Page 6-84
NAV 1 and NAV 2
These settings adjust the signal strength required to break squelch on the NAV 1 and NAV 2 inputs. These
are configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal
levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal
levels.
RCVR 3-5
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the RCVR 3, RCVR 4, and RCVR 5
inputs. These are configurable from -96 dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high
signal levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low
signal levels.
FAILSAFE WARN
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the FAILSAFE WARN input. This is
configurable from -96 dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to
break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
RING1 (Software v2.00)
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the RING1 input. This is configurable
from -96 dB to 0dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break squelch.
Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
ALERT 1-4
These settings adjust the signal strength required to break squelch on the ALERT1-4 inputs. These are
configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal
levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal
levels.
Other GMA 35 Configuration Settings
Marker Beacon high sense threshold
The marker high sensitivity threshold configures the marker beacon signal strength that is required to
activate the marker beacon signal in marker high sense mode. This is adjustable from -31 to +31. A value
of -31 will cause the marker beacon signal to activate at lower signal strength; therefore the beacon signal
will remain active for a longer period of time while on approach. A value of +31 will require the marker
beacon signal strength to be much stronger to activate, which results in the marker beacon activating for a
very short duration while flying directly over the marker beacon. The default value is 0.
Marker Beacon low sense threshold
The marker low sensitivity threshold configures the marker beacon signal strength that is required to
activate the marker beacon signal in marker low sense mode. This is adjustable from -31 to +31. A value of
-31 will cause the marker beacon signal to activate at a lower signal strength, therefore the beacon signal
will remain active for a longer period of time while on approach. A value of +31 will require the marker
beacon signal strength to be much higher to activate, which results in the marker beacon activating for a
very short duration while flying directly over the marker beacon. The default value is 0.
Marker external lamp lighting offset
When external marker lamps are connected to the GMA 35, this setting allows the lighting level to be
adjusted up or down. It applies an offset to the lighting input that the marker lamps are tracking. If the
lamps are too bright, adjust this number down; if the lamps are too dim, adjust this number up. This setting
is configurable from -31 to +31. The default is 0.

Rev. N Page 6-85
6.9.6.2.3 Discrete Configuration (GTN Software v5.10 or Later)
Access Audio Panel Discrete Configuration page by touching the Discretes key on the Audio Panel page.
The discrete input pin J3501-16 can be configured for either Pilot PTC or Pilot ICS. The discrete input pin
J3502-30 can be configured for either Copilot PTC or Copilot ICS. When configured as Push-To-
Command (PTC), these inputs allow the pilot and copilot to enter voice commands while pressing the
appropriate PTC key. When configured as ICS keys, these inputs allow the pilot and copilot MIC audio to
be heard on the intercom system (ICS) while pressing the appropriate ICS key.
The discrete input pin J3502-14 can be configured for either Passenger Isolate or Passenger ICS. When
configured for Passenger Isolate, touching the Passenger Isolate key will toggle the intercom isolation
state of the passengers. When configured as Passenger ICS, this input allows the audio from all passenger
mics to be heard on the intercom system (ICS) while pressed.
Figure 6-55 Audio Panel Discrete Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-86
6.9.6.2.4 Connected Radios to GMA 35 Configuration
Access the Audio Panel Connected Radios page by touching the Connected Radios key on the Audio
Panel page. Compare the interfaced radios in the aircraft to the GMA 35 Pin function list in section 5 to
determine which radios are connected to the applicable pins in the GMA 35.
Figure 6-56 Audio Panel Connected Radios Page
NOTE
After configuring radios on this page, wait 30 seconds before removing power from the
GTN and GMA 35 to ensure the GMA is configured properly.
The following radios can be configured as “Present” or “Not Present”:

 COM 2
 COM 3
 NAV 1
 NAV 2
 RCVR 3
 RCVR 4
 RCVR 5 (Unavailable if configured for a fifth passenger)
 TEL
 Music 1
 Music 2
 Marker Beacon

Rev. N Page 6-87
For RCVR 3, RCVR 4, and RCVR 5, the type of radio must also be configured. For each connected RCVR
source, select the type of radio.
Table 6-57 Connected Radio Selections
ADF 1 An Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is connected to the RCVR input.
ADF 2 A second Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is connected to the RCVR input.
DME 1 Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is connected to the RCVR input.
DME 2 A second Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is connected to the RCVR input.
AUX An Auxiliary radio is connected to the RCVR input.
6.9.6.3 GMA 350 Audio Panel Configuration
To configure the audio panel, touch the Audio Panel key on the External Systems page. To enable the
display of marker beacon annunciations from the GMA 350 touch the Marker Beacon Display key.
Figure 6-57 Audio Panel Page

6.9.7 GDL 88 Page (Software v3.00 or Later)
Access the GDL 88 page by touching the GDL 88 key on the External Systems page.
NOTE
GDL 88 system software v2.00 or v2.01 required for GTN software versions prior to v5.00.
NOTE
GDL 88 system software v2.05 or later required for GTN software v5.00 or later.

Rev. N Page 6-88
NOTE
GDL 88 system software v3.00 or later and GTN software v5.10 or later required for
rotorcraft-specific features.
Figure 6-58 GDL 88 Page

Rev. N Page 6-89
6.9.7.1 GDL 88 Diagnostics
Access the GDL 88 Diagnostics page by touching the GDL 88 key on the External Systems page, followed
by the Diagnostics key.
Figure 6-59 GDL 88 Diagnostics Page

System Information
This page displays general information such as unit type and serial number of the GDL 88. It also displays
information about the Main Board, GPS/WAAS board, and the RF Board. Power Statistics and
Temperature Statistics are also displayed. This page is named “System Status” in units using GTN
software versions prior to 5.10.
Error Log
This page displays the option of writing any errors found with the GDL 88 to an SD card or clearing the
error log.
System Status
This page displays a list of GDL 88 and ADS-B faults. A description of each fault and troubleshooting
procedure can be found in GDL 88 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual. This page is named “Faults” in
units using GTN software versions prior to 5.10.
Discrete Inputs
This page displays the state of the GDL 88’s discrete input pins.
Discrete Outputs
This page displays the state of the GDL 88’s discrete output pins.
GPS/SBAS Data
The WAAS Diagnostics page displays the WAAS engine information and PPS status information. For
GDL 88 units with an internal WAAS engine, this page allows the GDL 88 internal WAAS engine to be
reset.

Rev. N Page 6-90
External Data
This page displays air data and control panel data.
ARINC Inputs
The ARINC Inputs Diagnostics page allows the display of ARINC 429 data that is being received over
each GDL 88 ARINC 429 port. Each port can be chosen for display by touching the Port key and toggling
between the input ports. Select a port to display. The GTN will then display the label, SSM, Data, and SDI
for each GDL 88 ARINC 429 input port. This is useful for determining if the expected labels are being
received and also for troubleshooting incorrect or swapped wiring to the input ports. The data log can be
paused by toggling the Pause key. Clear the data log by touching the Clear Log key.
Serial Inputs
The Serial Inputs Diagnostics page allows the display of serial data that is being received and is useful for
determining if the GDL 88 is receiving data on each connected port. Select the desired port by touching the
Port key and selecting the RS-232 channel (or RS-422 channel for GDL 88 software v3.00 or later) from
the list. The data log can be paused by touching the Pause key. Clear the data log by touching the Clear
Log key. This page is named “RS-232 Inputs” in units using GTN software versions prior to 5.10.
HSDB (Ethernet)
The HSDB Ethernet Diagnostics page allows the status of each HSDB port to be displayed. This page
displays whether or not each port is receiving data and displays whether the port is connected or not
connected. The configuration status of each installed HSDB LRU is also displayed.

Rev. N Page 6-91
6.9.7.2 GDL 88 Configuration
Access the GDL 88 Configuration page by touching the GDL 88 key on the External Systems page. The
GDL 88 Install Tool is used to configure GDL 88 settings for a specific installation. Changes made in the
configuration pages are immediately committed to the GDL 88.
Figure 6-60 GDL 88 Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-92
6.9.7.2.1 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration - Aircraft Information
The aircraft page allows configuration of aircraft information and settings.
Figure 6-61 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration Page - Aircraft Information

ICAO Address
Allows the entry of the aircraft assigned ICAO address code in eight octal digits. This code can be found in
the aircraft registration certificate or the N-number inquiry page of http://registry.faa.gov/aircraftinquiry/.
NOTE
Correct entry of the assigned aircraft ICAO address into the GDL 88 is critical.
Aircraft Call Sign

Allows the entry of the aircraft call sign. Typically, this is the US registration number (N-number).
Selections: A-Z, 0-9, #, and trailing space. If the call sign is not available, “#” should be entered.
Mode 3/A VFR Code
Allows the entry of the VFR transponder code. Selections: 0000-7777.
NOTE
Enter only valid VFR codes. The code must match the VFR code configured on the
transponder. This is typically 1200 for US-registered aircraft.

Rev. N Page 6-93
Aircraft Category
Allows the selection of the aircraft emitter category for which the GDL 88 is installed. Select Light for
aircraft with maximum gross weight less than 15,500 lbs. Selections: No Aircraft Type Info, Light, Small,
Large, High Vortex Large, Heavy, Highly Maneuverable, Rotorcraft, Glider/Sailplane, Light than Air,
Parachutist/Skydiver, Ultra Light/Hang Glider, Unmanned Aerial Vehicle, Space Vehicle, Surface
Emergency Vehicle, Surface Service Vehicle.
Aircraft Length
Allows the entry of the length of the aircraft. Selections: 1 to 300 feet.
Aircraft Width
Allows the entry of the width (wingspan) of the aircraft. Selections: 1 to 300 feet.
Stall Speed
Allows the entry of the stall speed. Selections: 30 to 100 knots.
ADS-B Transmit
Allows the selection of enabling or disabling the GDL 88 UAT transmitter. Selections: Enable, Disable.
NOTE
The GDL 88 is capable of transmitting ADS-B messages while in configuration mode.
Ensure the aircraft assigned ICAO 24-bit address is entered prior to enabling the GDL 88
UAT transmitter.
FIS-B Processing
Allows the selection of enabling or disabling the processing of Flight Information Service Broadcast 
(FIS-B). Selections: Enabled, Disabled.
Internal GPS/SBAS
Allows the selection of whether to utilize the GDL 88's internal GPS/SBAS receiver as a GPS source for
GDL 88 models that have an internal GPS/SBAS receiver. Selections: Enabled, Disabled.
Transponder Interrogation
Allows the selection of enabling or disabling the transponder interrogation control panel interface.
Selections: Enabled, Disabled.
UAT Call Sign ID Logic
Allows the configuration of whether the Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code) is transmitted in the 
UAT ADS-B Out message. Selections, Enabled, Disabled.
Equipment Status Annunciator (GTN Software v6.00 or Later)
Allows the configuration or whether a single or dual light annunciator will be used to indicate the GDL 88
status to the pilot.
Air/Ground Discrete
The GDL 88 AIR/GROUND discrete input is active-low, and can be configured to interpret whether the
aircraft is airborne or on the ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open. Selections: Not
Installed, Active for Ground, Active for Airborne.

Rev. N Page 6-94
Pressure Altitude Broadcast Inhibit Switch
This allows the configuration of whether the GDL 88 is interfaced with an external switch for controlling
pressure altitude reporting. Selections: Installed, Not Installed.
Anonymous Mode
NOTE
If a Mode S Transponder is installed with the GDL 88, the UAT anonymity feature must be
disabled as to prevent two different aircraft addresses from being transmitted
(Transponder Mode S address and the GDL 88 temporary address).
Allows the configuration of whether the UAT anonymity feature is available. Consult the aircraft operator
for guidance on whether this feature should be enabled. Selections: Unavailable, Display Available,
Switch Available.
6.9.7.2.2 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration - GDL 88 Antenna Configuration
The antenna page allows configuration of UAT/1090, GDL 88 GPS/SBAS, and External GPS/SBAS
antenna settings.
Figure 6-62 GDL 88 Antenna Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-95
UAT/1090 Antenna
Allows control of whether the Top Antenna is enabled. Selections: Enabled (default), Disabled.
Allows the control of whether the GDL 88 antenna self-tests are performed. Selections: Enabled, Disabled.
GDL 88 GPS/WAAS Antenna (GDL 88/88D with GPS/SBAS Only)
These settings indicate the horizontal placement of the GDL 88 GPS/WAAS antenna on the aircraft. Enter
the GDL 88 GPS/WAAS antenna longitudinal offset distance rounded to the nearest foot from the nose of
the aircraft (0 to 250 feet), and the lateral offset as measured in feet (left or right, looking forward) from the
centerline of the aircraft (0 to 30 feet).
External GPS/SBAS Source Antenna
These settings indicate the horizontal placement of the external GPS source(s) GPS/WAAS antenna(s) on
the aircraft. For each source, enter the GPS/WAAS antenna longitudinal offset distance rounded to the
nearest foot from the nose of the aircraft (0 to 250 feet), and the lateral offset as measured in feet (left or
right, looking forward) from the centerline of the aircraft (0 to 30 feet).

Rev. N Page 6-96
6.9.7.3 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration - GDL 88 Audio Configuration
This page configures the GDL 88 analog audio output volume level and voice type.
Figure 6-63 GDL 88 Audio Configuration Page

Volume Level
Allows the control of volume level.
Voice Gender
Allows the selection of gender of voice. Selections: Male, Female
Run Audio Test
This key will run an audio test of the GDL 88.

Rev. N Page 6-97
6.9.7.4 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration - GDL 88 Port Configuration
This page allows the configuration of the RS-232, RS-422, ARINC 429, and HSDB (Ethernet) ports.
Figure 6-64 GDL 88 Port Configuration Page

RS-232 Configuration
Allows the configuration of the RS-232 input and output ports.
Input Selections: Disabled, Airdata Format 1, Altitude Format 1, Altitude Format 2, Altitude Format 3,
GNS 1, GNS 2, GTX Mode C #1, GTX Mode C #2, GTX Mode S #1, GTX Mode S #2, SL Mode C
Format 1 #1, SL Mode C Format 2 #1, SL Mode C Format 2 #2, Traffic Format 4. .
GDL 88 software v3.10 or later: GTX 3000 Format #1, GTX 3000 Format #2.
GDL 88 software v3.20 or later: ADS-B+ In Format 2 #1, ADS-B+ In Format 2 #2.
GDL 88 software v3.30 or later: Legacy Traffic w/Alt.
Output Selections: Disabled, GNS 1, GNS 2, GTX Mode C #1, GTX Mode C #2, GTX Mode S #1, GTX
Mode S #2, Traffic Format 4.
GDL 88 software v3.10 or later: GTX 3000 Format 1 #1, GTX 3000 Format 2 #2.
GDL 88 3.30 or later: Legacy Traffic w/Alt
RS-422 Configuration (GDL 88 Software v3.00 or Later)
Allows the configuration of the RS-422 input and output ports.
Input Selections: Connext Format 1, Legacy ADS-B
Output Selections: Connext Format 1, Legacy ADS-B

Rev. N Page 6-98
ARINC 429 Configuration
Allows the configuration of the ARINC input and output ports.
Input Selections: Off, Airdata #1, Airdata #2, Airdata/Heading No Alt, Airdata/Heading w/Alt, Heading,
Radio Altimeter, TCAS II TA/RA, Traffic Format 1, Traffic Format 2, Traffic Format 3, Traffic Format 5.
(Traffic Format 5 is reserved for future use.)
Output Selections: Disabled, Traffic Out
Speed Selections: Low, High
HSDB (Ethernet)
Allows the configuration of the status of different LRUs. Selections: Enabled, Disabled
Set To Default Config (GTN Software v5.00 or Later)
This key allows the GTN to set the GDL 88 back to the default configuration.
6.9.8 GSR 56 Configuration (Software v3.00 or Later)
If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed, connected and enabled the GSR 56 Configuration page can
be accessed by touching the GSR 56 key on the External Systems page.
Figure 6-65 GSR 56 Configuration Page

Rev. N Page 6-99
Phone
Select this option to enable the telephone features of the GSR 56.
SMS
Select this option to enable the SMS text messaging features of the GSR 56.
Position Reporting
Select this option to enable the position reporting features of the GSR 56.
Connext Weather
Select this option to enable the data link weather features of the GSR 56.
RUDICS Number
Ensure that the RUDICS Number setting is 0088160000576. If the RUDICS Number setting is incorrect,
touch Restore Defaults.
SMS SCA
Ensure that the SMS SCA number setting is 881662900005. If the SMS SCA number setting is incorrect,
touch Restore Defaults.
Default Internat’l Code
Touch to enter the international code for your calling area.
Restore Defaults
Touch to restore the defaults of the RUDICS and SMS SCA number.

Rev. N Page 6-100
6.9.9 Weather Radar Configuration (Software v3.00 or Later)
The Weather Radar Configuration page is accessed by touching the Weather Radar key on the External
Systems page. Depending on the type of weather radar installed, the information displayed on the Weather
Radar page can vary.
Figure 6-66 GWX 68/7X Page

Configuration
Pitch Trim
Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the pitch axis. Selections: -4.00° to +4.00° in 0.01°
increments. (GWX 68/70 only)
Roll Trim
Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the roll axis. Selections: -4.00° to +4.00° in 0.01°
increments. (GWX 68/70 only)
Return Bins
Specifies the number of range bins used to encode the data for one radar spoke. The default for this value is
512. Selections: 500 to 2048. (GWX 68/70 only)
Radar Mode
Commands the ARINC 708 weather radar in Standby, Test, or On mode. (ARINC 708 Radars only)
Display
Specifies whether the GTN is radar display #1 or #2. (ARINC 708 Radars only)
Calibration
Commands the ARINC 708 weather radar into calibration mode. (ARINC 708 Radars only)

Rev. N Page 6-101
Attitude Data (GWX 68/70 Only)
Source
Displays the source of attitude data that is currently being used by the GWX 68 weather radar. Selections:
None, HSDB, A429 or Gyro.
Radar Pitch
Displays the current pitch value being received by the GWX weather radar from the stabilization source
identified above.
Radar Roll
Displays the current roll value being received by the GWX weather radar from the stabilization source
identified above.
STATUS
This shows the internal status being reported by the weather radar.
 A green light indicates that the item is functioning correctly.
 A red light indicates that the weather radar is indicating a failure of that item.
 No light (blank) indicates that no data is being received from the weather radar.
Calibration (ARINC 708 Radars Only)
NOTE
The settings in this window can only be adjusted if Calibration Mode is On.
Roll Trim
Specifies the offset angle being used by the GWX for the roll axis. Selections: -4.00° to +4.00° in 0.01°
increments.
Gain
Specifies the gain of the radar. Selections: -31.5° to 0.0°, in 0.5° increments.
Tilt
Sets the tilt of the radar. Selections: 15.00°U to 15.00°D, in 0.25° increments.
Azimuth
Displays the antenna azimuth angle reported by the radar.
Stabilization
Displays whether radar stabilization is on or off, as reported by the radar.
Pitch Angle
Displays the attitude stabilization source pitch angle, as reported by the radar.
Roll Angle
Displays the attitude stabilization pitch angle, as reported by the radar.
400Hz Ref
Displays the attitude stabilization source reference voltage, as reported by the radar.
Range
Displays the range reported by the radar.

Rev. N Page 6-102
6.10 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode)
The following checks are done in Configuration Mode. For instructions concerning entering Configuration
Mode, see section 6.4.
6.10.1 Main Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics
NOTE
If the GTN is interfaced to an electronic HSI and the main indicator analog output is not
used, this check is not required.
Figure 6-67 Main Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics Page

If the GTN is interfaced to an analog indicator on the main CDI/OBS, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Main Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics page by touching the Main Indicator (Analog)
key on the GTN Diagnostics page.
2. Verify correct operation of the lateral deviation, flag and TO/FROM flag using the corresponding
selections.
3. Verify correct operation of the vertical deviation and flag using the corresponding selections.
4. Verify correct operation of the OBS knob using the SELECTED COURSE display. At 30°
increments around the OBS card, ensure that the indicated value is within 2° of the value set on the
indicator. If the resolver is not within 2°, calibrate the resolver as described in section 6.6.5.

Rev. N Page 6-103
6.10.2 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics Page
Figure 6-68 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics Page

If the GTN is interfaced to an analog indicator on the VOR/ILS Indicator output, perform the following
steps:
1. Access the VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) page by touching the VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) key
on the GTN Diagnostics page.
2. Verify correct operation of the lateral deviation, flag and TO/FROM flag using the corresponding
selections.
3. Verify correct operation of the vertical deviation and flag using the corresponding selections.
4. Verify correct operation of the OBS knob using the SELECTED COURSE display. At 30°
increments around the OBS card, ensure that the indicated value is within 2° of the value set on the
indicator. If the resolver is not within 2°, calibrate the resolver as described in section 6.6.12.

Rev. N Page 6-104
6.10.3 Discrete Inputs Page
Figure 6-69 Discrete Inputs Page

If the GTN is connected to external switches, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Discrete Inputs page by touching the Discrete Inputs key on the GTN Diagnostics
page.
2. For each external switch that is connected, exercise the switch and check the ACTIVE or
INACTIVE indication on the screen correlating to the appropriate switch input, and ensure it is
displayed correctly.

Rev. N Page 6-105
6.10.4 Discrete Outputs Page
Figure 6-70 Discrete Outputs Page

If the GTN is connected to external annunciators/systems, perform the following steps:
1. Access the Discrete Outputs page by touching the Discrete Outputs key on the GTN Diagnostics
page.
2. For each annunciator output that is connected to an external system or annunciator, toggle the
output ACTIVE (corresponding box is filled green and displays ACTIVE) and INACTIVE
(corresponding box is not filled green and displays INACTIVE) by touching the key
corresponding to the output. Verify that the appropriate external annunciator illuminates when the
output is set to ACTIVE and extinguishes when the output is set to INACTIVE. If the output is not
connected to an annunciator but provides an input to another system, verify that the other system
receives the signal.

Rev. N Page 6-106
6.10.5 HSDB Provisional Wiring Checkout
Figure 6-71 HSDB Diagnostics Page

If provisional wiring has been installed for the GTS 8XX, GDU 620, or other Garmin LRU to interface via
HSDB, follow the procedure below to ensure it has been installed correctly.
1. Access the GTN Diagnostics page from the Configuration Mode home page.
2. Touch the HSDB (Ethernet) key. The HSDB Diagnostics page will be displayed.
3. Ensure any LRUs connected via HSDB are powered on and properly configured.
4. For each Ethernet port that has HSDB wiring connected to it, ensure that the port status displays
“Connected” and “Receiving.”
5. If the previous step did not perform correctly, check the electrical connections and configuration
setup.
6.10.5.1 Crossfill Check (If Dual GTNs Installed)
Turn on both GTN units in the aircraft. On each GTN unit:
1. Access the Interfaced Equipment page, as shown in figure 6-7, from the GTN Setup page. Verify
that the setting for Cross-Side Navigator is set to “Present.”
2. Touch the Back key until the Configuration Mode page is displayed.
3. Access the HSDB Port Utilization page, as shown in figure 6-6, from the GTN Setup page. Touch
the HSDB (Ethernet) key and ensure that the ports that are configured as connected, display
“Connected.”
4. Touch the Back key until the Configuration Mode page is displayed.
5. Touch the GTN Diagnostics key.
6. Access the HSDB Port Status page, as shown in figure 6-71, from the GTN Diagnostics page.
Touch the HSDB (Ethernet) key. For the port that the cross-side GTN is connected to, check the
Ethernet Port Status and ensure that “Connected” is displayed under Connection and “Receiving”
is displayed under Data.
7. If the previous steps do not perform correctly, check the electrical connections and configuration
setup.

Rev. N Page 6-107
6.10.6 TAWS/HTAWS Audio Check (TAWS/HTAWS Enabled Units Only)
Figure 6-72 Audio Configuration Page

The TAWS/HTAWS audio volume has an initial default of 80% of the maximum volume value. The
TAWS/HTAWS volume needs to be set so as to ensure that aural alerts are audible under all anticipated
noise conditions. For this test, the audio panel should be turned on.
1. Access the Audio configuration page by touching the Audio key on the GTN Setup page.
2. The selected volume level can be checked by touching Test Sound and then touching Test Tone
from Select Test Sound menu. Touch the white triangle to hear the test message.
3. Evaluate the TAWS/HTAWS audio messages for acceptable volume and intelligibility during both
low and high cockpit noise levels (idle descent at low speed and high power at Vmo/Vne).
4. Readjust the volume as needed to ensure the TAWS/HTAWS audio messages will be heard in all
anticipated cockpit noise conditions.

Rev. N Page 6-108
6.10.7 GAD 42 Configuration Page Check
Figure 6-73 GAD 42 Configuration Page

This check verifies that the GTN is interfaced with the GAD 42.
1. Access the GAD 42 Configuration page by touching the GAD 42 key on the External Systems
page.
2. Verify that Status is ACTIVE.
3. Change any of the options to a different number.
4. Verify that after changing one of the options the STATUS field changes to SENDING then changes
back to ACTIVE. If the entry reverts to the previous number when ACTIVE is displayed, then
refer to the latest revision of GAD 42 Installation Manual.

Rev. N Page 6-109
6.10.8 Lighting Bus Interface Check
CAUTION
When 14 VDC or 28 VDC lighting buses are connected to the GTN, connection of the
aircraft lighting bus to the incorrect input pins can cause damage to the GTN. Always
start this test with the dimming bus at the lowest setting, and slowly increase the
brightness. If it is noticed that the LIGHTING level displayed on the GTN does not
increase as the lighting is increased in brightness, verify that the wiring is correct before
proceeding.
Figure 6-74 Lighting Configuration Page

The display and key backlighting on the GTN can track an external lighting/dimmer bus input and use it to
vary the display and key backlight levels accordingly. This check verifies that the interface is connected
correctly.
1. Access the Lighting Configuration page by touching the Lighting key on the GTN Setup page. For
installations using the Enhanced Lighting Configuration, touch Day Mode Operation after
touching the Lighting key. Ensure the Day/Night switch is in the “Day” position (if installed).
2. Touch the Source key to change the source to Lighting Bus 1 or 2.
3. Touch the Minimum Level key to set the lighting bus to its minimum setting of 0.05%.
4. Slowly vary the lighting bus level that is connected to the GTN. Verify that the Source Input Level
value displayed on the configuration screen tracks the lighting bus setting. Continue to maximum
brightness and verify proper operation.

Rev. N Page 6-110
6.10.9 Altitude Encoder or Air Data Computer Check
Figure 6-75 Main Data Inputs Page

The GTN can receive altitude data from an external source. This check verifies that the GTN is receiving
data from these sources. Ensure that the GTN is powered on and in configuration mode. If the following
steps do not perform correctly, check the electrical connections (appendix D) and configuration setup
(section 6.6.2) for the interfaced altitude encoder/ADC.
1. Access the Main Data Inputs page by touching the Main Data Inputs key on the GTN Diagnostics
page.
2. If there are multiple altitude sources providing data to the GTN, remove power from all but one
source.
3. Verify pressure altitude is being displayed and agrees with the active altitude source.
NOTE
After applying power to an altitude source it may take several minutes to warm up.
During the warm-up period the Pressure Altitude display on the GTN will be dashed out.
4. If there are multiple altitude sources, remove power from the currently active source and apply
power to another source that has not been checked.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 until all available sources have been checked.

Rev. N Page 6-111
6.10.10 AHRS/IRU Interface Check
The GTN can receive heading data from an external source. This check verifies that the GTN is receiving
data from these units. Ensure the GTN is powered on and in configuration mode. If the following steps do
not perform correctly, check the electrical connections and configuration setup for the interfaced AHRS/
IRU.
1. Access the Main Data Inputs page, as shown in figure 6-75, by touching the Main Data Inputs
key on the GTN Diagnostics page.
2. Scroll to the Heading Data Display on the list.
NOTE
If a Sandel EHSI or an ARINC 429 EFIS is also installed, ensure that it is turned off so
that it does not supply heading to the GTN. Verify that the HDG field displays valid
heading data.
3. Remove power from the heading source and verify that the magnetic heading field is dashed out.

Rev. N Page 6-112
6.11 Ground Checks (Normal Mode)
For the following checks, cycle power on the GTN and power it up in normal mode.
6.11.1 Display of Self-Test Data
Following normal power-up, the database page is displayed, followed by the Instrument Panel Self-Test
page. Touching Continue displays the Instrument Panel Self-Test page. During this time, the electrical
outputs are activated and set to the values listed below. Touch Continue to acknowledge the self test page.
This is not a required check, although this page can be useful for troubleshooting installation problems.
Table 6-58 Self-Test Data
Parameter Self-Test Value
Course Deviation Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
Glideslope/Vert. Deviation Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
Annunciators All On
Bearing to Waypoint (RMI) 135°
The GTN displays the OBS value (149.5° if interfaced to an HSI with
Selected Course (OBS)
driven course pointer).
Desired Track 149.5° (Displayed as 150°)
Items below are not displayed on the INSTRUMENT PANEL SELF-TEST page
Distance to Go 10.0 nautical miles
Time to Go 4 minutes
Active Waypoint GARMN
Groundspeed 150 knots
Present Position N 39°04.05’, W 94°53.86’
Waypoint Alert Active
Phase of Flight En Route
Message Alert Active
Leg/OBS Mode Leg Mode
GPS Integrity Invalid
Flight Director commands 0° bank (level flight) for 5 seconds;
commands increasing right bank at 1°/second for 5 seconds;
Roll Steering (if applicable) commands 5° right bank for 5 seconds; commands decreasing right
bank at 1°/second for 5 seconds, until command is 0° bank again.
This cycle repeats continuously.

Rev. N Page 6-113
6.11.2 Signal Acquisition Check
NOTE
At the start of this test, all other avionics should be turned off and the GTN powered on in
normal mode.
Ensure the GTN is able to acquire sufficient satellites to compute a GPS position. From the Home page,
touch the System key and then touch the GPS Status key. Under GPS Solution, ensure that a 3D Fix or 3D
Diff Fix is obtained. If the unit is unable to acquire satellites, move the aircraft away from obstructions
which might be shading GPS reception. If the situation does not improve, check the GPS antenna
installation.
NOTE
After installation, the initial acquisition of position can take up to 20 minutes. Subsequent
acquisitions will not take that long.
Once GPS position information is available, perform the following steps:

1. On the GPS Status page, verify that the LAT/LON agree with a known reference position.
2. While monitoring the GPS Status page, turn on other avionics one at a time and check the GPS
signal reception to make sure it is not affected (no significant signal degradation).
3. Before proceeding with the VHF COM interference check, ensure that any connected equipment is
transmitting and/or receiving data from the GTN and is functioning properly.
6.11.3 VHF COM Interference Check
It is known that certain non-aviation radios, including marine transceivers, can interfere with civil aviation
navigation and surveillance equipment including the Garmin GTN. When installing GTN equipment, it is
the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the GTN modification is compatible with all previous
aircraft modifications. Garmin recommends that whenever a GTN is installed in an aircraft that has been
modified with non-aviation radios, particular care should be exercised to verify that these do not interfere
with proper function of the GTN. Special care should also be taken to ensure that there is no interference
with the GTN if non-aviation radios are installed in an aircraft after a GTN has been installed. If
interference is found, it can be addressed by relocating antennas, rerouting cables, using filters to attenuate
unintentional harmonic frequency transmissions, or using various other techniques for elimination of the
interference. It may be necessary to remove or replace the interfering radio with a model that does not
interfere with the proper functioning of the GTN.
If you are testing a transmitter from a non-aviation device, each frequency must be verified by transmitting
for at least 30 seconds on each channel. The interference check must be completed on all IFR installations.
Once the Signal Acquisition Test has been completed successfully, perform the following steps:
1. View the GPS Status page and verify that at least 7 satellites have been acquired by the GTN.
2. Verify that the GPS “LOI” flag is out of view.
3. Select 121.150 MHz on the COM transceiver to be tested.
4. Transmit for a period of 35 seconds.
5. Verify that the GPS “LOI” flag does not come into view.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the following frequencies:

Rev. N Page 6-114
25 kHz COM Channel Spacing
121.15 MHz 131.22 MHz
121.17 MHz 131.25 MHz
121.20 MHz 131.27 MHz
121.22 MHz 131.30 MHz
121.25 MHz 131.32 MHz
131.20 MHz 131.35 MHz
8.33 kHz COM Channel Spacing

For VHF radios with 8.33 kHz channel spacing, in addition to the above listed frequencies, include the
following:
121.185 MHz 130.285 MHz
121.190 MHz 131.290 MHz
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for all remaining COM transceivers installed in the aircraft.
8. If aircraft is TCAS-equipped, turn on the TCAS system and verify that GPS position remains valid
(if position is lost, the status on the GPS Status page will change to “ACQUIRING”).
9. If aircraft is SATCOM-equipped, use the SATCOM system and verify that GPS position remains
valid (if position is lost, the status on the GPS Status page will change to “ACQUIRING”).
If the GPS “LOI” flag comes into view, see section 4.11.1 for options to improve performance.
6.11.4 VHF NAV Checkout (GTN 750 Only)
While on the Map page, touch the CDI key on the display to select VOR/LOC mode, which is indicated by
a green “VLOC” annunciation on the bottom center of the display. Check the VOR reception with ground
equipment, operating VOT or VOR, and verify audio and Morse code ID functions (if possible). Tune a
Localizer frequency and verify the CDI needle and NAV flag, and VDI needle and GS flag operation.
6.11.5 VHF COM Checkout (GTN 750 Only)
6.11.5.1 Antenna Check
The antenna check is optional; however, it is encouraged to be completed. The antenna VSWR can be
checked using an inline wattmeter in the antenna coax using frequencies near both ends of the band. The
VSWR should be < 2:1. A VSWR of 2:1 will cause a drop in output power of approximately 12%.
6.11.5.2 Receiver/Transmitter Operation
Tune the unit to a local VHF frequency and verify the receiver output produces a clear and understandable
audio output. Verify the transmitter functions properly by contacting another station and getting a report of
reliable communications.

Rev. N Page 6-115
6.11.6 TAWS/HTAWS System Check (TAWS/HTAWS Enabled Units Only)
While on the ground, turn on the GTN following normal power-up procedures. Also turn on the audio
panel.
NOTE
A 3D GPS position fix is required to conduct this check.
NOTE
HTAWS requires a helicopter specific, higher resolution terrain database. Without the
database, HTAWS will indicate a failure.
1. Touch the Terrain key.

2. On the Terrain page, touch the Menu key and select Test TAWS/HTAWS.
3. Wait until the TAWS/HTAWS self-test completes (10-15 seconds) to hear the TAWS/HTAWS
system status aural message.
 The aural message “TAWS/HTAWS System Test OK” will be annunciated if the 
TAWS/HTAWS system is functioning properly
 The aural message “TAWS/HTAWS System Failure” will be annunciated if the 
TAWS/HTAWS system is NOT functioning properly
 If no audio message is heard, then a fault exists within the audio system and the 
TAWS/HTAWS capability must be considered non-functional

Rev. N Page 6-116
6.12 Interface Checkout
This section describes the checks that must be carried out to verify that systems interfacing to the GTN are
communicating properly. Only those interfaces that are connected to the GTN must be verified.
6.12.1 Honeywell (Bendix/King) EFS40/50 Interface Check
If a Honeywell EFS40/50 has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as described in
this section.
1. Cycle power to GTN #1 and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self-
Test page. See section 6.11.1.
2. Ensure that GPS1 data is displayed by pressing the 1-2 key on the EFS40/50 control panel.
3. While the GTN is displaying the self test page, verify that the EFS40/50 is displaying data from
the GPS source. Note that vertical deviation will not be displayed.
 Course Deviation: Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
 Active Waypoint: GARMN
 Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation (only if installation is set up to display GPS
vertical deviation)
4. On the GTN verify that an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
5. Using a VOR test set verify that the CDI deviation on the EFS40/50 is displayed correctly.
6. Cycle power to the second GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the self test page.
7. Switch to GPS2 data by pressing the 1-2 key on the EFS40/50 control panel and repeat steps 3
through 5 with the second GTN.
6.12.2 Sandel SN 3308 Interface Check
If a Sandel EHSI has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as described in one of the
following sections, as appropriate for the installation.
6.12.2.1 One GTN/One SN 3308
1. Cycle power to the GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self-
2. Ensure that the SN3308 is receiving valid heading. The Vertical Deviation Indication will not be
displayed unless the SN3308 is receiving valid heading.
3. While the GTN is displaying the self-test page, verify that the SN3308 is displaying the following
data from the GPS source.
 Vertical Deviation: Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
5. Acknowledge the self test on the GTN by touching the Continue key.
6. Select VOR/LOC on the GTN and verify that the SN3308 displays NAV 1 or NAV 2 (depending
on what navigation source the GTN is).
7. Using a VOR test set verify that the CDI deviation on the SN3308 is displayed correctly.

Rev. N Page 6-117
6.12.2.2 Two GTNs/One SN3308
The checkout for two GTNs also applies to one GTN 6XX and one GTN 7XX.
1. Remove power from GTN #2.
2. Cycle power to the GTN #1 and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the self-test page. See
section 6.11.1.
3. Select GPS1 as the navigation source by pressing the NAV key on the SN3308.
4. Ensure that the SN3308 is receiving valid heading.
NOTE
The Vertical Deviation Indication will not be displayed unless the SN3308 is receiving
valid heading.
5. While GTN #1 is displaying the self test page, verify that the SN3308 is displaying the following
data from GPS1.
6. On GTN #1 verify that an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
7. Acknowledge the self test on GTN #1 by touching the Continue key.
8. Select VOR/LOC on GTN #1 and verify that the SN3308 displays NAV 1 or NAV 2 (depending on
what navigation source the GTN is).
10. Remove power from GTN #1 and apply power to GTN #2 and acknowledge the prompts until it
gets to the self test page. See section 6.11.1.
11. Select GPS2 by pressing the NAV key on the SN3308.
12. Repeat steps 5-9 with the GTN #2 with power removed from GTN #1.

Rev. N Page 6-118
6.12.2.3 Two GTNs/Two SN3308s
1. Remove power from GTN #2.
2. Cycle power to GTN #1 and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self
Test page.
3. Select GPS1 as the navigation source by pressing the NAV key on the SN3308. Verify that GPS1 is
displayed on the SN3308.
4. Ensure that the SN3308 is receiving valid heading.
NOTE
valid heading.
5. While GTN #1 is displaying the self test page, verify that the SN3308 is displaying the following
data from GPS1.
6. On GTN #1 verify that an OBS value is displayed (and not dashed out).
7. Acknowledge the self test on GTN #1 by touching the Continue key.
8. Select VLOC on GTN #1 and verify that the SN3308 displays NAV 1 or NAV 2 (depending on
which navigation source the GTN is).
10. Remove power from GTN #1 and apply power to GTN #2 and acknowledge the prompts until it
gets to the Instrument Panel Self Test page
11. Select GPS2 by pressing the NAV key on the SN3308.
12. Repeat steps 4-9 with the second GTN.
13. Perform the same procedure for the second SN3308. Ensure that SN3308 #2 is receiving valid
heading by ensuring the vertical deviation indication is being displayed.
14. Repeat steps 5-12 for SN3308 #2.

Rev. N Page 6-119
6.12.2.4 Sandel SN3500/4500 Interface Check
If a Sandel SN3500/4500 EHSI has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as
described in this section.
1. Cycle power to the GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the self test page. See
section 6.11.1.
2. Ensure that the SN3500/4500 is receiving valid heading.
NOTE
valid heading.
3. While the GTN is displaying the self test page, verify that the SN3500/4500 is displaying data
from the GPS source.
5. Acknowledge the self test on the GTN by touching the Continue key.
6. Select VOR/LOC on the GTN and verify that the SN3308 displays NAV 1 or 
NAV 2 (depending on what navigation source the GTN is).
7. Ensure that the NAV1 (or NAV2) indication does not have a red line through it.
6.12.3 EHSI Deviation Scaling (If HSI/CDI is Driven by the GTN via ARINC 429 Data)
If the GTN has an ARINC 429 connection to an EFIS display, proper scaling of the EFIS CDI and VDI
must be verified.
1. Cycle power to the GTN and acknowledge the prompts until it gets to the Instrument Panel Self
2. With the Instrument Panel Self Test page displayed on the GTN, look at the EHSI/EFIS and verify
that the lateral deviation is not flagged and is half-scale left.
3. With the Instrument Panel Self Test page displayed on the GTN, look at the EHSI/EFIS and verify
that the vertical deviation is not flagged and is half-scale up.
NOTE
If the deviations are not as described, the EHSI/EFIS does not scale the GTN deviations
properly and cannot be certified for GPS-based guidance. Contact Garmin for further
assistance.

Rev. N Page 6-120
6.12.4 ARINC 429 Traffic System Interface Check
If a Garmin GTS 8XX Traffic system, L3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch sensor or a
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 810 TAS/KMH 820 IHAS has been connected to the GTN via ARINC
429, the traffic interface should be verified as described in this section.
1. Go to the Traffic page on the GTN from the home page.
2. Verify that NO DATA is not displayed in yellow on the center of the traffic page.
3. Verify that the traffic system mode can be changed from STBY to OPER.
4. Switch the traffic system mode to STBY, and then run the traffic self test from the Menu.
5. Verify that the traffic system executes a self test and a self-test pattern is displayed on the GTN
traffic display.
6. Restart the GTN in configuration mode.
7. Access the Traffic page from the External Systems page and verify that there is data displayed in
the altitude field.
6.12.5 Stormscope Interface Check
If an L3 Communications WX-500 Stormscope has been connected to the GTN, the Stormscope interface
should be verified as described in this section.
1. Got to the Weather page by touching the Weather key on the Home page.
2. Touch the Stormscope key.
3. Verify that “Lightning Failed” is not displayed in yellow on the center of the page.
6.12.6 GMX 200/MX20 Interface Check
If a Garmin GMX 200 or MX20 has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as
described in this section.
1. Ensure that the GTN has a valid GPS position.
2. Create and activate a flight plan on the GTN.
3. Verify that the RTE and POS data flags are not displayed on the GMX 200/MX20.
4. Verify that the flight plan is displayed on the GMX 200/MX20 using the flight plan (FPL)
function.
6.12.7 GDL 69/69A Interface Check
If a Garmin GDL 69 has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as described in
section 6.12.7.1. If a Garmin GDL 69A has been connected to the GTN, the interface should be verified as
described section 6.12.7.1 and section 6.12.7.2. Each of these procedures involves verifying that the
satellite signal is acquired and tracked. Locate the aircraft where there is a clear view of the southeastern or
southwestern sky. SiriusXM Satellite Radio satellites are located above the equator over the eastern and
western coasts of the continental United States.
NOTE
The following sections only verify the correct interface of GDL 69/69A to the GTN. It does
not activate the GDL 69 SiriusXM satellite radio. Complete instructions for activating the
XM satellite radio can be found in GDL 69/69A Series SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
Activation Instructions.

Rev. N Page 6-121
6.12.7.1 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Weather Checkout Procedure
1. With the GTN running in the normal mode, go to the External LRUs page (in the System page
group) then touch the More Info key next to the GDL 69.
2. Verify that the Data Radio ID field has a valid ID. For a GDL 69A, the Audio Radio ID field
should also display a valid ID.
3. Verify that at least one subscribed weather product turns green on the GDL 69 status page. This
may take several minutes. This will indicate that the weather products are being received.
During SiriusXM activation, “Detecting Activation” will be displayed in the SERVICE CLASS field on
the XM Information page, and “Aviator” or “Aviator Pro” will be displayed once the SiriusXM signal is
detected.
6.12.7.2 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Audio Checkout Procedure
1. Go to the Music page from the Services page.
NOTE
If the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio subscription has not been activated, audio is
available only on Channel 1. If the audio subscription has been activated, audio should be
available on multiple channels.
2. Ensure that the GDL 69A audio is not muted.
3. Set audio panel to route music to the headsets.
4. Verify that audio can be heard over the headsets. Adjustment of the volume may be required.
6.12.8 VOR RMI/OBI Interface Check
The GTN RMI/OBI output can be used to drive an RMI (or OBI) navigation indicator. This check verifies
that the RMI/OBI is receiving data from the GTN. If the following steps do not perform correctly, check
the electrical connections and configuration setup. The aircraft heading system must be operating properly
in order for the RMI needle to point correctly.
1. Apply power to the GTN.
2. If installed, set the RMI select switch to the VOR/LOC position.
3. Tune a local VOR station, or use a simulated signal from an approved VOR Test System.
4. Verify that the RMI needle swings and points toward the VOR station.
6.12.9 DME Interface Check (GTN 750 Only)
If the GTN is set up to remotely channel a DME, verify the interface.
1. Select a VOR/ILS channel that corresponds to (1) a DME station within a 40 nautical mile range,
or (2) the frequency of a DME ground tester.
2. Verify that the DME locks on to the signal and a valid distance, ground speed and time are
displayed.
3. Tune an invalid VOR station. Verify that the DME changes to an invalid station.
6.12.10 Magnetic Compass Check
A compass swing should be carried out at completion of installation in accordance with AC 43.13-1B,
chapter 12, section 3, paragraph 12-37.

Rev. N Page 6-122
6.12.11 EMI/RFI Check
After installing the GTN and verifying that all interfaces to external equipment are working correctly, a
brief EMI/RFI check must be conducted. This check will verify that the GTN does not produce
unacceptable interference in other avionics systems, and other avionics systems do not produce
unacceptable interference in the GTN.
1. Start the aircraft engines and switch to aircraft power.
2. Turn on all avionics except the GTN.
3. With the GTN switched off, verify that all existing avionics systems are functioning properly.
4. Turn the GTN on and verify that all existing avionics systems continue to function properly.
5. Keep the GTN switched on and remove power from all other avionics systems.
NOTE
Removing power from systems interfaced to the GTN will cause the associated system
flags on the GTN to be displayed. This is normal behavior and does not constitute a test
failure.
6. Turn the display brightness level up to 100%.

7. Apply power to the other avionics systems one at a time and verify that the system functions
properly without any unacceptable interference caused by the GTN.
8. Wait for the system to begin functioning normally before applying power to the next system.
9. Once all of the systems are powered up, transmit on the COM over several different frequencies.
10. While transmitting, verify that the other aircraft systems function normally.
6.12.12 GDL 88 Interface Check
When testing the GDL 88, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed view of the sky. If
the GDL 88 is installed and connected to the GTN, check the operation as follows:
1. Start all GTNs in Configuration Mode as described in section 6.4.
2. Access the GDL 88 page from the External Systems page.
3. Touch the Diagnostics key followed by the GPS/SBAS Data key.
4. Verify that the GDL 88 is receiving valid position source data.
5. Verify that the status of the External PPS connection(s) is valid.
If a TAWS/HTAWS system is installed in addition to the GDL 88, check the operation as follows:
6. Access the GDL 88 Discrete Input page on the GDL 88 Diagnostics page.
7. Verify the Audio Inhibit #1* discrete input indicates Active when the TAWS/HTAWS system is
playing audio, and Inactive otherwise. See section 6.10.6.

Rev. N Page 6-123
6.12.13 GSR 56 Iridium Check
NOTE
When testing the GSR 56, the aircraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed
view of the sky.
NOTE
For additional information on using the GSR 56 features refer to GTN 725/750 Pilot’s
Guide.
NOTE
To use the position reporting feature of the GSR 56, a short burst data (SBD) Iridium
account is required. To use the phone feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium voice account is
required. To use the SMS feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium SMS account is required. To
use the weather feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium RUDICS account is required. For more
information on how to subscribe to the services offered by the GSR 56, refer to the GSR 56
Satellite Radio Installation Manual.
If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GTN, check the operation as follows:
1. Ensure that the GTN is in normal mode.
2. If position reporting is enabled, go to the Iridium page in the Utilities page group and touch
Position Reporting. Verify that the Reporting Status is not Unavailable.
3. If the Iridium phone is enabled, go to the Iridium Phone page in the Iridium page group. Verify that
the Phone Status is not Unavailable.
4. Verify that a phone call can be placed.
NOTE
The following steps should only be completed if CONNEXT Weather is enabled. In order
to receive weather updates, the GSR 56 being tested must be registered and the
registration access code must be entered into the GSR 56 using the GTN.
5. Go to the Connext page in the Weather page group.
6. Verify that the Connext settings can be found by touching the Menu key.
7. If the GSR 56 is registered, touch the Menu key and select the CONNEXT Data Request option
under CONNEXT settings. Verify that weather is displayed on the map. Refer to 
GTN 725/750 Pilot’s Guide for information on requesting CONNEXT data.

Rev. N Page 6-124
6.12.14 ARINC 708 Weather Radar Interface Check
This section verifies that the heading interface between the GTN 7XX and ARINC 708 weather radar is
functional.
1. Start the GTN in normal mode. If there are dual GTN 7XXs, start both in normal mode.
2. On each GTN 7XX, go to the Home page, touch Weather and then Radar.
3. On one GTN, touch the Mode key and select Standby mode and wait for the warm-up to complete.
4. Touch the Mode key again and select Test mode.
5. Verify that the radar begins sweeping and the test pattern is shown.
WARNING
Aircraft should be outdoors and personnel should not be in front of the weather radar
when it is radiating (i.e., when Weather or Ground mode is selected on the GTN).
6. If stabilization is supplied to the radar, turn the radar to Weather mode and turn stabilization on in
the weather menu. Verify that STAB On is displayed in the upper right corner or the radar display.
If STAB INOP is displayed, verify that stabilization is being supplied to the weather radar R/T.
7. Set the mode to off by touching the Mode key.
NOTE
If only one GTN is installed, the following steps do not have to be carried out.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 for the second GTN 725/750.
9. On each GTN touch the Mode key and select Standby and wait for the warm-up to complete.
10.On each GTN touch the Mode key again and select Test mode.
11.On GTN #1, touch the Zoom Out key to increase the range of the radar display. Verify that the
range on GTN #1 changes and the range on GTN #2 does not change.
12. On GTN #2, touch the Zoom Out key to increase the range of the radar display – select a different
zoom level than GTN #1. Verify that the range on GTN #2 changes and the range on GTN #1 does
not change.
13. On each GTN, set the mode to off by touching the Mode key.
6.12.15 Ryan TCAD Traffic System Interface Check
If a Ryan TCAD has been connected to the GTN, the traffic interface should be verified by performing the
following steps with the GTN started in normal mode:
1. Access the Traffic page from the GTN Home page.
2. Verify that “NO DATA” is not displayed in yellow on the center of the traffic pages.
3. Using the “Shield Setup” from the Traffic menu, verify that the shield mode can be changed.

Rev. N Page 6-125
6.12.16 GWX 68/70 Weather Radar Interface Check
This section verifies that the heading interface between the GTN 7XX and the GWX 68/70 weather radar is
functional.
1. Start the GTN in normal mode.
2. On the Home page, touch the Weather key, followed
by Radar.
3. Touch the Mode key and select Standby mode and wait
for the warm-up to complete.
4. Touch the Mode key again and select Test mode.
5. Verify that the GWX 68/70 begins sweeping and the
test pattern is shown.
6. If supported by the installation, verify that stabilization
is on (STAB On is displayed in the upper right corner
of the radar display).
7. Set the mode to off by touching the Mode key.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for the second GTN 7XX (if
installed).
Figure 6-76 GWX 68 Weather

Radar Page
6.12.17 TIS (Garmin GTX 33/330) Interface Test

If a Garmin GTX 33/330 sensor has been connected to the GTN and configured for TIS traffic, the traffic
interface should be verified as described in this section.
1. Select the Traffic Map on the GTN.
2. Verify that TIS FAIL is not displayed in the upper left corner under Traffic Status, and that NO
DATA (yellow) is not displayed over the ownship symbol.
3. On the upper left corner of the Traffic Map page verify that the status of the traffic system is either
TIS Standby or TIS Operating/Unavailable (i.e., TAS should not be displayed).
The following additional steps should only be completed if the GTN is controlling the traffic system.
1. Pull the transponder circuit breaker and verify each of the air data fields contain a red X.
2. If a squat switch (or airspeed switch) is connected to the GTX, ensure that it is in AIR mode.
3. Alternately touch the Standby key and Operate key to change the mode of the traffic system. It
may take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes.
4. Verify that the mode of the traffic system can be changed.

Rev. N Page 6-126
6.12.18 Transponder Interface Check
If the GTN is interfaced to a GTX 32/33 remote transponder or a GTX 327/328/330 configured as a remote
transponder, the following checks must be completed.
1. With the GTN unit running in normal mode and the transponder powered on, go to the Home page
and ensure there is no red X over the transponder data field on the top right of the screen.
2. Ensure that a code can be entered into the code field. Enter a code using the keypad and then touch
Enter. Ensure the code that was entered is displayed in the transponder data field.
3. If dual transponders are installed, select transponder 2 and perform steps 1 and 2 for the second
transponder as well. Also pull the transponder 1 circuit breaker and ensure the transponder 1 data
field contains a red X rather than the transponder 2 data field to verify that the wiring is not
crossed. (i.e., transponder 1 is incorrectly connected to transponder 2 circuit breaker.)
4. Repeat the preceding steps for the second GTN.

Rev. N Page 6-127
6.13 Flight Checks
All GTN functions that cannot be adequately tested on the ground will require a flight check. Even if all
functions can be verified on the ground, a flight check is recommended as final installation verification.
Verify system operation as described in the following sections.
NOTE
The analog deviation (LEFT/RIGHT and UP/DOWN), TO/FROM, and FLAG (lateral and
vertical) outputs to a CDI or HSI should be verified in flight with potential sources of
electrical noise such as autopilot, flaps, gear, heater blowers, etc. operating. Lateral
deviation and flags may be checked with either GPS or VOR/ILS, and vertical deviation
and flags must be checked with glideslope. Verify that the flags are hidden at the correct
times, and that the flag is in view at the correct times.
6.13.1 GPS Flight Check
1. Verify that GPS position is not lost during normal aircraft maneuvering (e.g., bank angles up to 30
degrees and pitch angles associated with take-off, departures, approaches, landing and missed
approaches as applicable). If GPS position is lost, a “Loss of GPS Navigation” message will be
displayed.
2. Enter and activate a flight plan on the GTN by pressing the Direct-To button and entering a
waypoint. Fly the flight plan and verify that the display of flight plan data is consistent with the
CDI indication (deviation, TO/FROM…) in the pilot’s primary field of view.
6.13.2 VHF COM Flight Check (GTN 750 Only)
To check the communications transceiver, maintain an appropriate altitude and contact a ground station
facility at a range of at least 50 nautical miles. Contact a ground station in close proximity. Press the COM
volume knob to select manual squelch and listen for any unusual electrical noise, which would increase the
squelch threshold. If possible, verify the communications capability on both the high, low and mid bands
of the VHF COM band. It may be required by the governing regulatory agency to verify operation of the
COM transmitter and receiver at the extents of a ground facility’s service volume (e.g., FAA AC 23-8A).
6.13.3 VOR Flight Check (GTN 750 Only)
1. Tune a local VOR station within 50 miles.
2. Verify the audio IDENT and voice quality have no objectionable electrical interference such as
magneto noise.
3. Verify the Morse code decoder IDs the station (95% probability).
4. Fly to and from the station.
5. Verify NAV flag, TO/FROM flag, and CDI are operational.
It may be required by the governing regulatory agency to verify operation of the VOR receiver at the
extents of a ground facility’s service volume (e.g., FAA AC 23-8A).
6.13.4 ILS Flight Check (GTN 750 Only)
1. Tune an ILS at the local airport.
2. Verify the AUDIO IDENT and AUDIO QUALITY have no objectionable electrical interference
such as magneto noise.
3. Verify the Morse code decoder IDs the station (95% probability).
4. Fly the approach.
5. Verify NAV flag, GS flag, and CDI and VDI are operational.

Rev. N Page 6-128
6.13.5 Autopilot Flight Check
1. Enter and activate a flight plan on the GTN. For the GTN, ensure that GPS is selected on the CDI.
Engage the autopilot in the GPSS mode, if available. Verify that the autopilot flies the course.
2. Disengage the autopilot and fly off course. Re-engage the autopilot (in GPSS mode) and verify
that it correctly intercepts the course and continues to fly it.
3. Turn off the autopilot GPSS but leave the autopilot engaged in NAV mode. Verify that it maintains
the current course.
4. (GTN 750 Only): Reselect the GPSS mode on the autopilot. Press the CDI key to select VLOC on
the GTN. Verify that the GPSS mode disengages.
5. For autopilots that provide vertical guidance, fly a vertically coupled LPV approach. Ensure the
autopilot correctly flies the approach.
6. Deviate from the glideslope by using control wheel steering, or by disengaging the autopilot.
Ensure the autopilot correctly follows the approach guidance once re-engaged.
6.13.6 TAWS/HTAWS Audio Flight Check (TAWS/HTAWS-equipped Units Only)
The TAWS/HTAWS volume needs to be loud enough to ensure that aural alerts are audible under all
anticipated noise environmental conditions. This check verifies that TAWS/HTAWS aurals can be heard
during flight, but the ambient noise conditions under which it is verified are not worst-case. Consequently,
the “Five Hundred” callout should be louder than is required for the conditions under which it is verified.
1. Set up for an approach to the airport.
2. During the approach, at approximately 500 ft AGL, the “Five Hundred” callout will occur. Verify
that “Five Hundred” can be easily heard and understood.
6.14 Database Check
1. Check the navigation database to ensure it is current. The database information is displayed during
the unit display start-up sequence. To check the database:
2. Turn off the GTN and then turn it on. The GTN will go through its normal start-up sequence.
3. Wait for the Navigation Database page to be displayed.
4. Verify that the expiration date displayed has not passed.
If the database has expired, then remove the SD card and update the navigation database as described in
section 6.15 and section 1.13.
6.15 Data Card Replacement
CAUTION
Handle the data cards carefully. Do not touch the connector edge of the data card.
To replace the data card:

1. Ensure that the GTN is turned off.
2. Remove the data card by pressing the card until it disengages and then pull the card to extract from
the unit.
3. With the label facing right, insert the new data card by pushing the card straight into the slot and
press until it is inserted fully.

Rev. N Page 6-129
6.16 Software Loading
NOTE
A GTN Software Loader Card must be created. All RS-232 and ARINC 429 ports should
be set to off prior to installing a version of the GTN main board software that is older than
what is currently installed.
The GTN comes pre-loaded with software. However, to ensure that the latest software is loaded it is
recommended that software from a current GTN Downloadable Software SD Card, P/N 010-01000-( ), be
loaded into the GTN. For dual GTN installations the software loading procedures below must be carried
out on each GTN. See section 6.4 for instructions pertaining to entering configuration mode.
NOTE
The GTN is capable of software loading for other Garmin avionics, such as the GMA 35,
GDL 88, GWX 68/70, and GDL 69/69A. Refer to the appropriate product's installation
manual or service bulletin for instructions.
6.16.1 Creating a GTN Software Loader Card
NOTE
The application to create a loader card requires Windows 2000, XP, Vista, or Windows 7.
There is no Mac support at this time.
1. Go to the Dealer Resource Center at Garmin’s website.

2. Download the GTN System software to your PC.
3. Ensure that you have an SD card reader connected to the PC. Insert the GTN Downloadable
Software SD Card in the card reader.
4. Run the executable file that was downloaded and follow the prompts on the screen to create the
software loader card.
5. After the card has been created, select Finish to complete the process.
6. Eject the card from the card reader. The GTN software loader card is now ready to use.

Rev. N Page 6-130
6.16.2 GTN Software Loading
Figure 6-77 Updates Page

1. Remove power from the GTN.
2. Insert the correct GTN Loader Card into the SD card slot.
3. Restore power to the GTN. The Configuration Mode page should now be displayed.
4. Touch the Updates key to display the software updates that are available. The updates page
displays the version that is installed on the unit and the version installed on the loader card.
5. Verify that the available GTN software updates are being displayed by ensuring that “GTN
Software Updates” is displayed on the key in the upper left corner of the display.
6. To update the GTN with all software available, touch the Select All key or touch to select or
deselect which software to update. A green checkmark will be displayed next to each item of the
list that will be updated.
7. To begin the software update, touch the Update key on the bottom of the display.
8. The GTN will display the prompt, “Start GTN Software Updates?” Touch OK to allow the GTN to
go through the update process.
9. When the updates are finished, the GTN will display “Update Complete!”. When finished, remove
power from the GTN and remove the software loader card. Reinsert the database card into the SD
card slot.

Rev. N Page 6-131
6.16.3 GMA 35 Software Loading
When loading software to the GMA 35, update all of the listed applicable software updates and then cycle
power to the GTN and GMA 35. Return to the GMA 35 software update page and verify that all of the
versions on the GMA 35 match those available on the card. Additional updates may appear after the initial
software loading; these need to be installed as well.
NOTE
Prior to updating the GMA 35 to a version of software compatible with the GTN software,
the version numbers of the GMA software may not be listed. See section 6.6.2 for GMA 35
software version compatibility.
6.17 Documentation Checks

6.17.1 Flight Manual Supplement
If the installation needs a Flight Manual Supplement (FMS), sample versions can be found at the Dealer
Resource Center at Garmin’s website.

Rev. N Page 6-132
7 CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS
Maintenance of the GTN 725 or GTN 750 is “on condition” only. For regulatory periodic functional
checks, refer to approved aircraft maintenance manuals or manual supplements for actual aircraft
maintenance requirements.

Rev. N Page 7-1
APPENDIX A ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM
For RTCA/DO-160F Environmental Qualification Forms (EQFs) visit the Dealer Resource Center at
Garmin’s website. The GTN 725 and GTN 750 use the same EQF, P/N 005-00533-13.

Rev. N Page A-1
APPENDIX B GTN DATA FORMAT
B.1 RS-232 Aviation Data Format
B.1.1 Electrical Interface
The output signals are compatible with RS-232C. Data is generated at 9600 baud with a word length of 8
bits, one stop bit, and no parity.
B.1.2 General Output Format
The GTN RS-232 data has the following general format.
STX ASCII start-of-text character (02 hex)
t1s Type 1 output sentences (see following paragraphs for description)
t2s One or more type 2 output sentences (see following paragraphs for description)
ETX ASCII end-of-text character (03 hex)
B.1.3 Aviation Output Sentence Type 1
The Type 1 output sentences have the following general format.
id item designator (single ASCII alphabetic character)
dddd item data (1 to 10 printable ASCII characters)
CR ASCII carriage return character (0D hex)
LF ASCII line feed character (0A hex)*
Each Type 1 sentence is output by the GTN approximately once every second.
The track, desired track, and bearing to waypoint angles, and the magnetic variation are output according
to the current mode of the GTN (automatic magnetic heading, magnetic variation computed at last known
position; true heading, magnetic variation of E00.0°; or user-defined magnetic heading, magnetic variation
as entered by user).

Rev. N Page B-1
Table B-1 describes the Type 1 output sentence item designator (id) and item data (dddd) fields. If data for
these sentences is invalid or unavailable, dashes (“-”) are used to fill in all non-blank character positions.
Table B-1 Type 1 Output Sentence Format

Data (10 bytes)
Ident (1 byte) Description
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
a a a a a
z Current GPS altitude in feet *
s d d m m h h Current latitude, where:
s N (north) or S (south)
A dd degrees
mm minutes
hh hundredths of minutes
s d d d m m h h Current longitude, where:
s E (east) or W (west)
B ddd degrees
mm minutes
hh hundredths of minutes
C d d d Track in whole degrees
D s s s Ground speed in knots
E d d d d d Distance to waypoint in tenths of nautical miles

s n n n n Cross track error, where:
G s L (left) or R (right) of course
nnnn error in hundredths of nautical miles
I d d d d Desired track in tenths of degrees

c c c c c Active waypoint identifier (will be blank filled on
K
right if less than 5 characters in identifier)
L d d d d Bearing to active waypoint in tenths of degrees
s d d d Magnetic variation, where:
Q s E (east) or W (west)
ddd tenths of degrees
- - - - f NAV valid flag status, where:
S
f - N (NAV flagged) or - (NAV valid)
- - - - - - - - - Warnings status, only data transmitted are dashes
T
(-). Used to indicate end of Type 1 sentences.
d d d d d d Distance to destination waypoint in tenths of
l (lower case Lima)
nautical miles.
* The altitude is not output if the RS-232 port is configured as “Aviation Output 2.”
* The line feed character is not output if the RS-232 port is configured as “Aviation Output 2.”

Rev. N Page B-2
B.1.4 Aviation Output Sentence Type 2
The GTN Type 2 output sentence has the following general format.
id item designator (3 ASCII characters)
seq sequence number (1 binary byte)
wpt waypoint identifier (5 ASCII characters)
lat waypoint latitude (3 binary bytes)
lon waypoint longitude (4 binary bytes)
mvar magnetic variation at waypoint (2 binary bytes)
LF ASCII line feed character (0A hex)
Each waypoint in the route being navigated by the GTN has a Type 2 sentence output by the GTN
approximately once every second.
If no route is being navigated by the GTN (i.e., the active route is empty), the following Type 2 sentence is
output approximately once every second.
id item designator (3 ASCII characters; route sequence number is “01”)
seq sequence number (1 binary byte; last waypoint flag is set; route sequence number is 1)
LF ASCII line feed character (0A hex)

Rev. N Page B-3
Table B-2 describes the Type 2 output sentence item designator (id), sequence number (seq), waypoint
identifier (wpt), waypoint latitude (lat), waypoint longitude (lon), and magnetic variation at waypoint
(mvar) fields.
Table B-2 Type 2 Output Sentence Format

Format
Field Byte Description
76543210
1 ASCII character “w” (77 hex)

id Two ASCII numeric characters representing route
2-3
sequence number of waypoint (01 to 31)
x l a n n n n n x undefined
l 1 if last waypoint in route
seq 1 a 1 if active to waypoint
nnnnn route sequence number of waypoint
(unsigned binary)
Destination waypoint identifier (will be blank filled on
wpt 1-5
right if less than 5 characters in identifier)
s d d d d d d d s 0 (north) or 1 (south)
1 ddddddd latitude degrees (unsigned binary)
x x m m m m m m xx undefined
lat 2 mmmmmm latitude minutes (unsigned binary)
x h h h h h h h x undefined
3
hhhhhhh hundredths of latitude minutes
(unsigned binary)
1 s x x x x x x x s 0 (east) or 1 (west)
xxxxxxx undefined
2 d d d d d d d d dddddddd longitude degrees (unsigned binary)
x x m m m m m m xx undefined
lon 3
mmmmmm latitude minutes (unsigned binary)
x h h h h h h h x undefined
4 hhhhhhh hundredths of latitude minutes
(unsigned binary)
Two's complement binary in 16ths of degrees.
mvar 1-2
Easterly variation is positive. MSB output first.

Rev. N Page B-4
B.2 GTN RS-232 Fuel/Air Data Input Format
The input signals are compatible with RS-232C. Data is input at 9600 baud with a word length of 8 bits,
one stop bit, and no parity. One message is received per second.
B.2.2 Altitude Format 3 Sentence
The Garmin GTN is capable of receiving the following 17-byte message from Shadin Altitude Encoders,
Altitude Serializers, and Altitude Converters.
RMS<sp><+/->12345T<+/->12ul<CR>
Where:
RMS ASCII characters
<sp> space (0x20)
<+/-> sign indicator (0x2b[“+”] or 0x2d[“-”])
12345 altitude in feet
T ASCII character
<+/-> sign indicator
12 sensor temperature
ul checksum of bytes 1 through 14 in hex ASCII (i.e., “FA”)
<CR> carriage return (0x0d)
NOTE
Checksum is calculated by adding each byte in the message (1 through 14).
B.2.3 Altitude Format 1 Sentence
The Garmin GTN is capable of receiving the following 10-byte message from the Icarus Altitude
Serializer.
ALT<sp>12345<CR>
Where:
ALT ASCII characters
<sp> space (0x20)
12345 altitude in feet
<CR> carriage return (0x0d)

Rev. N Page B-5
B.2.4 Fuel Format 2 Sentence
The Garmin GTN is capable of receiving the following 55-byte message from the Shadin Fuel Flow
Indicator.
<STX>K0543.2<sp>0100.0<sp>0040.0<sp>0060.0<sp>0123.4<sp>0045.4<sp>0078.0<sp>123<ETX>
Where:
<STX> start-transmit character (0x02)
K units designation (i.e., Gallons, Liters, Kilograms, B[pounds])
0543.2 total fuel remaining (i.e., ASCII-coded decimal format: 0x30, 0x35, 0x34, 0x33, 0x2e,
0x32)
<sp> space (0x20)
0100.0 fuel flow rate, total (formatted as for total fuel remaining)
0040.0 fuel flow rate, engine one (or asterisks[“”], in the case of single engine aircraft)
0060.0 fuel flow rate, engine two (asterisks, in the case of single engine aircraft)
0123.4 fuel used, total
0045.4 fuel used, engine one (asterisks, in the case of single engine aircraft)
0078.0 fuel used, engine two (asterisks, in the case of single engine aircraft)
123 checksum (of bytes 2 through 51)
<ETX> end-transmit character (0x03)
NOTE
Checksum is calculated by adding each byte in the message (2 through 51), such that
carries are discarded to give a one byte result. The ASCII-coded decimal representation of
that byte is given, ranging from 0 (0x30, 0x30, 0x30) to 255 (0x32, 0x35, 0x35).

Rev. N Page B-6
B.2.5 Fuel Format 1 Sentence
The Garmin GTN is capable of receiving the following 13-byte message from the ARNAV or Electronics
International (“EI”) Fuel Flow Indicators.
<STX>G0245100550<ETX>
Where:
<STX> start-transmit character (0x02 hex)
G units designation (i.e., Gallons, Imperial gallons, Liters, Kilograms, B[pounds])
0245 total fuel remaining in reverse order (i.e., ASCII-coded decimal format: 0x30, 0x32,
0x34, 0x35)
1 fuel remaining checksum (modulo 10 sum of four “total fuel remaining” digits)
0055 total fuel flow rate in reverse order
0 fuel flow checksum
NOTE
Fuel remaining and fuel flow are [ 10] when units designation is gallons or imperial
gallons. For example, 0245 gallons indicates 542 gallons; 0245 liters indicates 5420
liters. Checksum is the modulo 10 sum of the four fuel flow decimal digits, converted to an
ASCII numerical character (e.g., checksum for “5678” would be ASCII “6”).

Rev. N Page B-7
B.2.6 FADC Format 1/Airdata Format 1 Sentence
The Garmin GTN is capable of receiving the following message strings from the Shadin Fuel/Air Data or
Air Data Computer.
SHADIN “z” FORMAT
<STX>
ZA012<CR><LF> “ZA” (ASCII characters); “012” represents indicated Air Speed (knots)
ZB345<CR><LF> “ZB” (ASCII characters); “345” represents true Air Speed (knots)
ZC678<CR><LF> “ZC” (ASCII characters); “678” represents Mach Speed (thousandths)
ZD<+/->9012<CR><LF> “ZD” (ASCII characters); sign; “9012” represents pressure altitude (tens of
feet)
ZE<+/->3456<CR><LF> “ZE” (ASCII characters); sign; “3456” represents density altitude (tens of
feet)
ZF<+/->78<CR><LF> “ZF” (ASCII characters); sign; “78” represents outside air temperature
(Celsius)
ZG<+/->90<CR><LF> “ZG” (ASCII characters); sign; “90” represents true air temperature
(Celsius)
ZH123<CR><LF> “ZH” (ASCII characters); “123” represents wind direction (degrees from
north)
ZI456<CR><LF> “ZI” (ASCII characters); “456” represents wind speed (knots)
ZJ<+/->78<CR><LF> “ZJ” (ASCII characters); sign; “78” represents rate of turn (degrees per
second)
ZK<+/->901<CR><LF> “ZK” (ASCII characters); sign; “901” represents vertical speed 
(tens of ft/minute)
ZL234<CR><LF> “ZL” (ASCII characters); “234” represents heading (degrees from north)
ZM5678<CR><LF> “ZM” (ASCII characters); “5678” represents fuel flow, right 
(tenths gallons/hour) [1]
ZN90123<CR><LF> “ZN” (ASCII characters); “90123” represents fuel used, right 
(tenths gallons) [1]
ZO4567<CR><LF> “ZO” (ASCII characters); “4567” represents fuel flow, left 
ZP89012<CR><LF> “ZP” (ASCII characters); “89012” represents fuel used, left (tenths gallons)
[1]
ZQ345<CR><LF> “ZQ” (ASCII characters); “345” represents error log/reason indicator
ZR678<CR><LF> “ZR” (ASCII characters); “678” represents checksum
<ETX>
[1] Not available from Air Data Computer
Where:
<CR> carriage-return character (0x0d)
<LF> line-feed character (0x0a)
<+/-> sign indicator (0x2b[“+“] or 0x2d[“-”])

Rev. N Page B-8
NOTE
Checksum is calculated by adding each byte in the message (including all characters from
<STX> up to and including the error log/reason indicator), such that carries are
discarded to give a one byte result. The ASCII-coded decimal representation of that byte
is given, ranging from 0 (0x30, 0x30, 0x30) to 255 (0x32, 0x35, 0x35).

Rev. N Page B-9
SHADIN “G” FORMAT
<STX>
GA012<CR><LF> “GA” (ASCII characters); “012” represents indicated Air Speed (knots)
GB345<CR><LF> “GB” (ASCII characters); “345” represents true Air Speed (knots)
GC678<CR><LF> “GC” (ASCII characters); “678” represents Mach Speed (thousandths)
GD<+/->9012<CR><LF> “GD” (ASCII characters); sign; “9012” represents pressure altitude (tens
of feet)
GE<+/->3456<CR><LF> “GE” (ASCII characters); sign; “3456” represents density altitude (tens of
feet)
GF<+/->78<CR><LF> “GF” (ASCII characters); sign; “78” represents outside air temperature
(Celsius)
GG<+/->90<CR><LF> “GG” (ASCII characters); sign; “90” represents true air temperature
(Celsius)
GH123<CR><LF> “GH” (ASCII characters); “123” represents wind direction (degrees from
north)
GI456<CR><LF> “GI” (ASCII characters); “456” represents wind speed (knots)
GJ<+/->78<CR><LF> “GJ” (ASCII characters); sign; “78” represents rate of turn (degrees per
second)
GK<+/->901<CR><LF> “GK” (ASCII characters); sign; “901” represents vertical speed (tens of
ft/minute)
GL234<CR><LF> “GL” (ASCII characters); “234” represents heading (degrees from north)
GM5678<CR><LF> “GM” (ASCII characters); “5678” represents fuel flow, right (Twin only)
GN90123<CR><LF> “GN” (ASCII characters); “90123” represents fuel used, right (Twin only)
(tenths gallons) [1]
GO4567<CR><LF> “GO” (ASCII characters); “4567” represents fuel flow, left (or Single)
(tenths gallons/hour)
GP89012<CR><LF> “GP” (ASCII characters); “89012” represents fuel used, left (or Single)
(tenths gallons)
GQ001<CR><LF> “GQ” (ASCII characters); “001” represents error log/reason indicator
(001 = temp. sensor error, 000 = no errors)
GR6789.0<CR><LF> “GR” (ASCII characters); “6789.0” represents fuel remaining (gallons)
[1]
Ga<+/->1234<CR><LF> “Ga” (ASCII characters); sign; “12.34” represents barometric corrected
altitude (tens of feet)
Gb56.78<CR><LF> “Gb” (ASCII characters); “56.78” represents current barometric pressure
setting (inches Hg)
G*901<CR><LF> “G*” (ASCII characters); “901” represents checksum
<ETX>
[1] Not available from Airdata Computer
Where:

Rev. N Page B-10
NOTE
discarded to give a one byte result. The ASCII-coded decimal representation of that byte
is given, ranging from 0 (0x30, 0x30, 0x30) to 255 (0x32, 0x35, 0x35).

Rev. N Page B-11
SHADIN S FORMAT
<STX>
SA012<CR><LF> “SA” (ASCII characters); “012” represents indicated Air Speed
(knots)
SB345<CR><LF> “SB” (ASCII characters); “345” represents true Air Speed (knots)
SC678<CR><LF> “SC” (ASCII characters); “678” represents Mach Speed
(thousandths)
SD<+/->9012<CR><LF> “SD” (ASCII characters); sign; “9012” represents pressure altitude
(tens of feet)
SE<+/->3456<CR><LF> “SE” (ASCII characters); sign; “3456” represents density altitude
(tens of feet)
SF<+/->78<CR><LF> “SF” (ASCII characters); sign; “78” represents outside air
temperature (Celsius)
SG<+/->90<CR><LF> “SG” (ASCII characters); sign; “90” represents true air temperature
(Celsius)
SH123<CR><LF> “SH” (ASCII characters); “123” represents wind direction (degrees
from north)
SI456<CR><LF> “SI” (ASCII characters); “456” represents wind speed (knots)
SJ<+/->78<CR><LF> “SJ” (ASCII characters); sign; 78” represents rate of turn (degrees
per second)
SK<+/->901<CR><LF> “SK” (ASCII characters); sign; “901” represents vertical speed
(tens of ft/minute)
SL234<CR><LF> “SL” (ASCII characters); “234” represents heading (degrees from
north)
SM5678<CR><LF> “SM” (ASCII characters); “5678” represents fuel flow, right (tenths
gallons/hour)
SN90123<CR><LF> “SN” (ASCII characters); “90123” represents fuel used, right
(tenths gallons)
SO4567<CR><LF> “SO” (ASCII characters); “4567” represents fuel flow, left (tenths
gallons/hour)
SP89012<CR><LF> “SP” (ASCII characters); “89012” represents fuel used, left (tenths
gallons)
SQ345<CR><LF> “SQ” (ASCII characters); “345” represents error log/reason
indicator
SR67890<CR><LF> “SR” (ASCII characters); “67890” represents fuel remaining
(tenths gallons)
SS123<CR><LF> “SS” (ASCII character); “123” represents ground speed (knots)
ST456<CR>LF> “ST” (ASCII character); “456” represents track (degrees)
SU789012<CR><LF> “SU” (ASCII character); “789012” represents distance to waypoint
(hundredths nautical miles)
SV<E/W>345<CR><LF> “SV” (ASCII character); “E” represents East, “W” represents West;
“345” represents magnetic variation (tenths degrees)
SW<N/S>67 8901<CR><LF> “SW” (ASCII character); “N” represents North, “S” represents
South; “67 8910” represents current latitude (degrees, minutes,
hundredths of minutes)

Rev. N Page B-12
SX<E/W>234 5678<CR><LF> “SX” (ASCII character); “E” represents East, “W” represents West;
“234 5678” represents current longitude (degrees, minutes,
hundredths of minutes)
SY<L/R>90<CR><LF> “SY” (ASCII character); “L” represents Left, “R” represents Right;
“90” represents drift angle (degrees)
Sa<+/->1234<CR><LF> “Sa” (ASCII character); sign; “1234” represents barometric
corrected altitude (tens of feet)
Sb56.78<CR><LF> “Sb” (ASCII character); “56.78” represents current barometric
pressure setting (inches Hg)
S*901<CR><LF> “S*” (ASCII character); “901” represents checksum
<ETX>
Where:
NOTE
discarded to give a one byte result. The ASCII-coded decimal representation of that byte is
given, ranging from 0 (0x30, 0x30, 0x30) to 255 (0x32, 0x35, 0x35).

Rev. N Page B-13
B.3 RS-232 NMEA Radio Control Format
The I/O signals are compatible with RS-232C. Data is generated at 9600 baud with a word length of 8 bits,
one stop bit, and no parity.
The data format for the serial communication is:
Baud rate 9600
Data bits 8
Stop bits 1
Parity None
B.3.2 Message Formats
All messages conform to the NMEA 0183 proprietary message format as follows. All characters will be
standard ASCII characters. No binary data characters are used.
“$” Start of message character, ASCII “$” (024h)
“P” Proprietary message identifier
“GRM” Garmin company identifier
c Message class identifier; identifies a message as either a COM or NAV message. The
COM portion of the GTN uses “C,” while the NAV portion uses “V.”
nn Message identifier; two-digit number in ASCII characters
d.....d Message data characters defined for each message.
chksum Message checksum, including message identifier (nn) through data characters (d.....d).
The two-digit checksum is generated by adding all values of valid characters together,
ignoring carry (if any). This value is converted into two encoded hex characters (30h-3Fh)
[1]
<CR> ASCII carriage return (0Dh)
<LF> ASCII line feed (0Ah)
The maximum message length, including the start of message character (“$”) and the end of message
<CR><LF> sequence, is 25 bytes.
Note:
[1] Encoded hex: each character consists of 4 bits of data placed in the low order nibble +30h. For
example, the 8-bit value 5Fh would be encoded as two characters with values of 35h and 3Fh,
which map to the ASCII characters “5” and “?”, respectively.

Rev. N Page B-14
B.3.3 Message Output Rate
The GTN will output the COM transceiver status at a 1 Hz rate.
B.3.4 Input Messages
B.3.4.1 Request Data Output
This message input is used to request an output message to be sent by the GTN. Message data may be
specified. There are a two important things to keep in mind.
1. The GTN will flag the specified message for output when it receives the request. There will be a
lag between the time the message is flagged for output and the time it is actually output. If another
request for the same message is received in this period, then the previous request will be lost. The
amount of lag depends on the number of messages that are consecutively flagged for output.
2. Use of unsupported output identifiers will not generate a communication error message.
Message format (NAV requests):
“V” Message class. This is a NAV request
“24” Message identifier
ii Output identifier of requested message, two ASCII characters. 29 = Request NAV audio
40 = Request NAV Volume. 41 = Request NAV Status
“000” Reserved
Message format (COM requests):
“C” Message class. This is a COM request
ii Output identifier of requested message, two ASCII characters. 02 = Request COM audio
volume. 03 = Request COM software version. 13 = Request COM status. 14 = Request
GTN software version
d Message sub-id; set to (ASCII) 1 for request COM audio volume, 0 otherwise
“00” Reserved
Example messages:
$PGRMV2429000<chksm><CR><LF>
Request the GTN to send the current NAV audio configuration.
$PGRMC0613000<chksm><CR><LF>
Request the GTN to send the current COM status.

Rev. N Page B-15
B.3.4.2 Set Standby COM Frequency and Transceiver Function
This message is used to set the standby COM frequency as well as the COM transceiver function.
Message format:
“C” Message class. This is a COM message
mk Standby COM frequency
m = desired frequency in MHz in hexadecimal, where M = desired frequency - 30h, with
desired frequency in range of 118 to 136 MHz
k = desired frequency in kHz, where k = (desired frequency / 25 kHz) + 30h, with desired
frequency in range of 000 to 975 kHz in 25 kHz steps
a Transceiver function: N = normal, M = monitor, 0 = unchanged
o 8.33 kHz offset: (ASCII) 0 = 25 kHz frequency (.000); 1 = first 8.33 kHz channel offset
(.005); 2 = second 8.33 kHz channel offset (.010); 3 = third 8.33 kHz channel offset (.015)
Example messages:
$PGRMC01KFM2<chksm><CR><LF>
This example command would set the standby COM frequency to 123.565 MHz and place the COM radio
in monitor mode. This is interpreted by noting that the ASCII “G” corresponds with 47h + 30h = 77h,
which converted to decimal equals 119 for the MHz portion. The kHz portion converts ASCII “F” to 46h, -
30h yields 16h, x25 kHz steps = 550 kHz, add 3 8.33 channels = 565 kHz.
NOTE
The GTN will check input frequencies for validity. An RS-232 serial error message output
will be generated if the frequency is invalid, or an 8.33 kHz frequency is requested when
the GTN is in 25 kHz channel spacing mode.
B.3.4.3 Set COM Volume Level and Audio Control Parameters

This message is used to set the volume level or the headphone output, and various audio control
parameters.
Message format:
n Data type: (ASCII) 1 = headphone, 4 = sidetone level, 9 = RF squelch
vv Volume level: 00-FFh; two encoded hex characters (30h-3Fh)
Example message:
$PGRMC0211=<chksm><CR><LF>
Set the speaker output volume to 1Dh out of FFh (“=” = 3Dh, -30h = Dh).

Rev. N Page B-16
B.3.4.4 Select Squelch Override
This message is used to turn the manual squelch on and off.
Message format:
n Squelch test: (ASCII) 0 = automatic; 1 = manual override (displays “SQ”)
Example message:
Set the squelch to normal operation.
B.3.4.5 COM Keypad Input
This message is used to press keys as though the display was on the main COM screen.
Message format:
p Key press: F = flip/flop key; M = MON key
Example message:
$PGRMC19M<chksm><CR><LF>
Toggle the standby frequency monitor mode.

Rev. N Page B-17
B.3.4.6 Set Standby NAV Frequency
This message is used to set the standby NAV.
Message format:
“V” Message class. This is a NAV message
mk Standby VOR/LOC frequency:
m = desired frequency in MHz in hexadecimal, where m = desired frequency - 30h, with
desired frequency in range of 108 to 117 MHz
k = desired frequency in kHz, where k = (desired frequency / 25 kHz) + 30h, with desired
frequency in range of 000 to 975 kHz in 50 kHz steps, or the even numbers from 30h to
56h
“0” Reserved, data in this field will be ignored
Example message:
$PGRMV28?P0<chksm><CR><LF>
This example command would set the standby VOR frequency to 111.800 MHz. This is interpreted by
noting that the ASCII “?” corresponds with 3Fh, +30h = 6Fh, converted to decimal equals 111 for the MHz
portion. The kHz portion converts ASCII “P” to 50h, -30h yields 20h, x 25 kHz steps = 800 kHz.
NOTE
The GTN will check input frequencies for validity. An RS-232 serial error message output
will be generated if the frequency is invalid.

Rev. N Page B-18
B.3.4.7 Set NAV Audio Mode
This message is used to change the current NAV audio mode. There are two possible settings for this
mode. The first is IDENT, which will suppress the voice portion of the NAV audio signal and emphasize
the Morse code station identifier. The second choice is VOICE, which will emphasize voice signal and
suppress the Morse code station identifier (unit will display “ID” in the upper-left corner of the NAV
page).
This message is available in both normal and test modes.
Message format:
“V” Message class. This is a GTN NAV message
a NAV audio mode. I = IDENT, V = VOICE
Example message:
$PGRMV31I<chksm><CR><LF>
Set the current NAV audio mode to IDENT.
B.3.4.8 Set NAV Volume Level
This message is used to set the volume level for the NAV mixed audio.
Message format:
“V” Message class. This is a GTN NAV message
vv Volume level: 00-FFh; two encoded hex characters (30h-3Fh)
Example message:
$PGRMV431=<chksm><CR><LF>
Set the NAV volume to 1Dh out of FFh (“=” = 3Dh, -30h = Dh).
B.3.4.9 NAV Keyboard Input
This message is used to press keys as though the display was on the main NAV screen.
Message format:
p Key press: F=flip/flop key
Example message:
$PGRMV44F<chksm><CR><LF>
Flip-flops the NAV active and standby frequencies.

Rev. N Page B-19
B.3.5 Output Messages
B.3.5.1 COM Transceiver Status
This message is used to output the current status of the COM. It will be output at the configured message
rate (1 Hz) or whenever the status changes.
Message format:
mk Active frequency: m= MHz
m = desired MHz frequency - 30h, ranging from 118 to 136 MHz, (i.e., 76h to 88h, A2h);
k = (kHz offset / 25 kHz) +30h, ranging from 000 to 975 kHz in 25 kHz steps
mk Standby frequency: m= MHz
m = desired MHz frequency - 30h, ranging from 118 to 136 MHz, (i.e., 76h to 88h, A2h);
k = (kHz offset / 25 kHz) +30h, ranging from 000 to 975 kHz in 25 kHz steps
a Transceiver status:
I = Intercom (no other status applicable)
R = Normal receive
M = Monitor receive
T = Transmit active
S = Stuck mic
F = COM failure
s Squelch setting: (ASCII) 0 = automatic; 1 = manual override (“SQ” shown in upper-left
corner of COM active frequency)
hh COM channel spacing: (ASCII) 25 = 25 kHz mode; 83 = 8.33 kHz mode
o Active frequency 8.33 kHz offset: (ASCII) 0 = 25 kHz frequency (.000); 1 = first 8.33 kHz
channel offset (.005); 2 = second 8.33 kHz channel offset (.010); 3 = third 8.33 kHz
channel offset (.015)
o Standby frequency 8.33 kHz offset: (ASCII) 0 = 25 kHz frequency (.000); 1 = first 8.33
kHz channel offset (.005); 2 = second 8.33 kHz channel offset (.010); 3 = third 8.33 kHz
channel offset (.015)
Example message:
$PGRMC01G4LFR08303<chksm><CR><LF>
Active frequency is 119.100 MHz, the standby frequency is 124.565 MHz, unit is receiving, squelch is
automatic, and the unit is in 8.33 kHz mode.
NOTE
This message is output at a nominal one second rate, or faster whenever the transceiver
function or status changes.

Rev. N Page B-20
B.3.5.2 COM Volume Level
This message is used to output the COM volume level.
Message format:
“1” Headphone volume
vv Volume level: 00-FFh; use encoded hex (30h-3Fh)
Example message:
The headphone volume level is 30h out of FFh.
B.3.5.3 COM Software Version
This message is used to output the COM module software version.
Message format:
vvvv Software version in ASCII
Example message:
COM software version is 01.00.

Rev. N Page B-21
B.3.5.4 COM Radio Status
This message is used to output the COM status.
Message format:
a COM needs service; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = COM transmit capabilities not reliable
b COM status; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = COM functions not available
c Push-to-Talk key stuck; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Stuck
d Remote transfer stuck; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Stuck
e Remote tune up stuck; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Stuck
f Remote tune down stuck; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Stuck
g COM TX power limited; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Transmit power limited
h COM locked out; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Active frequency locked at 121.500 MHz
Example message:
GTN is running and ready to accept serial input, Push-to-Talk is stuck on, and COM is locked to 121.500
MHz.
B.3.5.5 NAV Receiver Status
This message is sent to indicate to the host that the GTN is running and ready to accept data on the serial
port, along with the current status of alerts. It will be sent once upon startup, when requested by the host,
and when an alert status changes.
This message is only available in normal mode.
Message format:
a VLOC needs service; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Lateral course guidance not reliable
b VLOC status; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = VLOC and Glideslope course guidance not available
c Glideslope needs service; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Vertical course guidance not reliable
d Glideslope status; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Glideslope course guidance not available
e NAV remote transfer stuck; (ASCII) 0 = OK, 1 = Stuck
Example message:
GTN is running and ready to accept serial input, and glideslope guidance is unavailable.

Rev. N Page B-22
B.3.5.6 Decoded Station Identifier
This message outputs the decoded station identifier received on the NAV voice channel. This message will
be output even if the station identifier has not been decoded yet. In this case, the message will be flagged as
invalid. The validity of this message does not depend on the current NAV audio mode. The decoding is
done automatically regardless of this setting.
Message format:
v Valid flag.
0 = identifier is not valid
V = decoded station identifier is valid
iiiii Decoded station identifier, five characters long. If the decoded identifier is less than five
characters in length, then the trailing characters will be filled in with spaces. Identifiers are
restricted to using ASCII character 0-9 and A-Z
Example message:
$PGRMV25VISLE<sp><chksm><CR><LF>
The decoded station identifier is valid and is ISLE.
B.3.5.7 Communications Error
This message is used to indicate a communications error.
Message format (NAV error):
e Error code: (ASCII)
0 = Input message checksum error
1 = Unknown message
2 = Error or mismatch in message data
Message format (COM error):
e Error code: (ASCII)
0 = Input message checksum error
1 = Unknown message
2 = Error or mismatch in message data
Example messages:
Received an unknown NAV message
Received a COM message with an invalid checksum.

Rev. N Page B-23
B.3.5.8 NAV Receiver Status
This message is used to output the current status of the NAV receiver. It will be output at the configured
rate, and will output faster than the configured rate when the NAV receiver status changes.
Message format:
mk Active NAV frequency: m = MHz, where m + 30h = desired MHz frequency in the range
of 108 to 117 MHz
k = desired frequency in kHz, where k = desired frequency / 25 kHz) + 30h, with desired
frequency in range of 000 to 950 kHz. Valid NAV frequencies only lie on 50 kHz
boundaries (i.e. 108.00, 108.05, 108.10, etc.)
mk Standby NAV frequency: m = MHz, where m + 30h = desired MHz frequency in the range
of 108 to 117 MHz
k = desired frequency in kHz, where k = desired frequency / 25 kHz) + 30h, with desired
frequency in range of 000 to 950 kHz. Valid NAV frequencies only lie on 50 kHz
boundaries (i.e. 108.00, 108.05, 108.10, etc.)
“N” Reserved
Example message:
$PGRMV28E4?PN<chksm><CR><LF>
Active NAV frequency is 117.100 MHz, Standby NAV frequency is 111.800 MHz.
B.3.5.9 NAV Audio Mode
This message is used to output the current NAV audio mode. There are two possible settings for this mode.
The first is IDENT, which will suppress the voice portion of the NAV audio signal and emphasize the
Morse code station identifier (unit will display “ID” in the upper-left corner of the NAV page). The second
choice is VOICE, which will emphasize voice signal and suppress the Morse code station identifier.
Message format:
a NAV audio mode
I = IDENT
V = VOICE
Example message:
$PGRMV29I<chksm><CR><LF>
The current NAV audio mode is IDENT.

Rev. N Page B-24
B.3.5.10 NAV Volume Level
This message is used to output the NAV volume level.
Message format:
vv Volume level: 00-FFh; use encoded hex (30h-3Fh)
Example message:
The headphone volume level is 30h out of FFh.
Table B-3 Input Message Summary

Class Ident Description Response
Set Standby COM Frequency and Transceiver
C 01 COM transceiver status
Function
C 02 Set COM audio Items COM audio status
C 03 Set squelch override COM transceiver status
C 06 Request COM data COM status
V 24 Request data output NAV status
Set standby VOR/LOC frequency and receiver
V 28 NAV receiver status
function
V 31 Set NAV audio mode NAV audio mode
V 43 Set NAV volume level NAV volume level
V 44 NAV keypad input NAV receiver status
Notes: Class: C = COM message, V = NAV message
Table B-4 Output Message Summary

Class Ident Description Output Rate
C 01 COM transceiver status 1 Hz or status change
C 02 COM volume level Upon request or status change
C 03 COM SW version Upon request
C 05 COM message error As needed
At startup, upon request, or
C 13 COM radio status
status change
C 14 Unit display information Upon request
V 25 Decoded station identifier 1 Hz or status change
V 27 Communications error When error detected
V 28 NAV receiver status 1 Hz or status change
V 29 NAV audio mode 1 Hz or status change
V 40 NAV volume level Upon request or status change
V 41 NAV receiver status Upon request or status change
Message includes the “$” start of message character and the <CR> <LF> end of message
Notes:
sequence.

Rev. N Page B-25
APPENDIX C MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
C.1 Drawing List
The following drawings are included in this section.
Figure C-1 Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure C-2 Mounting Rack Installation
Figure C-3 Panel Cutout Detail
Figure C-4 Mounting Rack Tab Alignment Detail
Figure C-5 Connector Layout Detail

Rev. N Page C-1
.892 [22.65]
6.250 [158.75] 6.300 [160.02]

BEZEL RACK
"A"
1.820 [46.23] "B"

10.410 [264.41] TO COAXES
11.264 [286.11] TO D-SUB STAIN RELIEFS
1.000 [25.40]
GTN 750 SHOWN
.125 [3.17]
Ø.213 [Ø5.41]
100° CSK INSIDE RACK
2.385 [60.57] (5 PER SIDE)
6.010 [152.65]
6.000 [152.40]
TO .025"
BEZEL
DIMPLES
3.811 [96.80]
2.220 [56.39]
"C" 1.970 [50.04]
8.000 [203.20] .349 [8.86]

TO .025"
DIMPLES
[1] WEIGHT
UNIT UNIT & CONN KIT [2]
GTN 725 [3] 3.16 [80.3] 4.05 [102.9] 2.20 [55.9] 6.1 lb [2.80 kg] 7.7 lb [3.52 kg]
[4] 3.17 [80.5] 4.11 [104.4] 2.11 [53.6] 8.6 lb [3.91 kg]
GTN 750 [3] 3.17 [80.5] 4.40 [111.8] 1.86 [47.2] 7.4 lb [3.38 kg] 9.3 lb [4.24 kg]
[4] 3.18 [80.8] 4.42 [112.3] 1.81 [46.0] 10.2 lb [4.63 kg]
NOTES:
[1] DIMENSIONS: INCH [mm]
[2] CG LOCATION INCLUDES CONNECTOR KIT, MOUNTING RACK, AND BACK PLATE ASSY.
[3] VALUES WITH MOUNTING RACK 115-01294-00.
[4] VALUES WITH MOUNTING RACK 115-01294-A0.
Figure C-1 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. N Page C-2
211-60234-08
SCREW, 4-40 x .25 (4X) 1
330-00053-01
BNC CONNECTOR 1
211-63234-08
SCREW, 4-40 X .25 2
330-00053-02
BNC/TNC CONNECTOR 1
212-00022-00
SHOULDER WASHER 1
115-01294-00
2 GTN 7XX MOUNTING RACK
330-00053-01
1 BNC CONNECTOR
253-00421-00
1 CHASSIS GASKET
125-00221-10
1 GTN 7XX BACKPLATE
371-00014-01
1 FAN
011-02326-0X
211-60234-23 2 CONNECTOR KIT
1 4 SCREW, 4-40 x 1.375 (4X)
NOTES:
1 PART OF 011 -02246-00 (GTN 725, BLACK) AND 011 -02246-02 (GTN 750, BLACK, GRAY, AND NV) KITS. SEE TABLE FOR KIT CONTENT DIFFERENCES .
2 REFERENCE 010-00819-50 (GTN 725, BLACK), 010-00820-50 (GTN 750, BLACK), 010-00820-A0 (GTN 750, HELO, BLACK), 010-00890-50 (GTN 750, GRAY), AND
010-01060-A0 (GTN 750, NV, HELO, BLACK) KITS.
3 SEE TABLE FOR KIT REFERENCE INFORMATION .
4 TORQUE 4.5 – 5.2 IN-LBS
5 UNIT AND INSTALLATION KIT PART NUMBER CONTAINS THE UNIT, CONNECTOR KIT, BACKPLATE KIT, AND MOUNTING RACK.
BACKPLATE KIT
CONTENT DIFFERENCES
UNIT AND 5 QTY QTY

UNIT DESCRIPTION CONNECTOR KIT 2 BACKPLATE KIT 2 MOUNTING RACK 2 WASHER BNC CONNECTOR (EACH)
INSTALLATION KIT (EACH)
GTN 725 010-00819-50 011-02326-00 011-02246-00 115-01294-00 1 0
GTN 750 (BLACK) 010-00820-50 011-02326-02 011-02246-02 115-01294-00 3 2
GTN 750 (HELO, BLACK) 010-00820-A0 011-02326-02 011-02246-02 115-01294-A0 212-00022-00 3 330-00053-01 2
GTN 750 (GRAY) 010-00890-50 011-02326-02 011-02246-02 115-01294-00 3 2
GTN 750 (NV, HELO, BLACK) 010-01060-A0 011-02326-02 011-02246-02 115-01294-A0 3 2
Figure C-2 Mounting Rack Installation

Rev. N Page C-3
OPTION 1:
STACK CUTOUT
(RACK INSTALLED
FROM FRONT OF
AIRCRAFT PANEL)
GTN 6XX
GTN 7XX
6.32
OPTION 2:
RADIO CUTOUT
(RACK INSTALLED
FROM FRONT OF
AIRCRAFT PANEL)
6.07 GTN 7XX
6.32
OPTION 3:
RADIO CUTOUT
(RACK INSTALLED
FROM BACK OF
AIRCRAFT PANEL
ONLY)
MAXIMUM AIRCRAFT 6.00 GTN 7XX

PANEL THICKNESS
IS .125 INCH.
6.25
NOTES, ALL OPTIONS:

1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
2. IF THE FRONT LIP OF THE MOUNTING RACK IS BEHIND THE SURFACE OF THE AIRCRAFT
INSTRUMENT PANEL, THE UNIT CONNECTORS MAY NOT FULLY ENGAGE.
3. TOLERANCE: ±0.03 INCHES.
Figure C-3 Panel Cutout Detail

Rev. N Page C-4
GTN 7XX Mounting Rack
GTN 6XX Mounting Rack
During installation of the mounting racks,

ensure edge of the tab (bottom flange of
the rack) is flush with the face of the
instrument panel
Tabs
Figure C-4 Mounting Rack Tab Alignment Detail

Rev. N Page C-5
Figure C-5 Connector Layout Detail

Rev. N Page C-6
APPENDIX D INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS
D.1 Drawing List
The following drawings are included in this section:
Figure D-1 System Interface Diagram
Figure D-2 GTN 750 Typical Installation
Figure D-4 Power Lighting Configuration Interconnect
Figure D-5 Antenna Interconnect
Figure D-6 Main Indicator Interconnect
Figure D-7 Autopilot Interconnect
Figure D-8 Traffic Interconnect
Figure D-9 Transponder Interconnect
Figure D-10 Dual GTN to Single GDU Interconnect
Figure D-11 ARINC 429 EFIS Interconnect
Figure D-12 GDL 69/69A Interconnect
Figure D-13 GTN - Audio Panel Interconnect
Figure D-14 Air Data/IRU/AHRS RS-232 Interconnect
Figure D-15 Air Data/IRU/AHRS ARINC 429 Interconnect
Figure D-16 GAD 42 Interconnect
Figure D-17 VOR/ILS Indicator Interconnect
Figure D-18 RMI OBI Interconnect
Figure D-19 WX-500 Interconnect
Figure D-20 GTN 750 - DME Interconnect
Figure D-21 GTN 750 - Remote DME Interconnect
Figure D-22 GTN 750 - Parallel 2 of 5 DME Tuning Interconnect
Figure D-23 GTN 750 - Parallel Slip Code DME Tuning Interconnect
Figure D-24 Heading Synchro Interconnect
Figure D-25 GPS Annunciator Interconnect
Figure D-26 NAV Source Select Annunciator Interconnect
Figure D-27 TAWS/HTAWS Interconnect
Figure D-28 Switches Interconnect
Figure D-29 GDL 88/88D Interconnect - Single GTN
Figure D-30 GDL 88/88D Interconnect - Dual GTNs
Figure D-31 GSR 56 Interconnect
Figure D-32 Weather Radar Interconnect
Figure D-33 Radar Altimeter Interconnect
Figure D-34 Flight Stream 210 Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-1
GTN 7XX
CONNECTOR P1001
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS MAIN CDI/HSI
AIRCRAFT LIGHTING BUS LIGHTING BUS TO/FROM (GPS/VOR/ILS)
VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
EXTERNAL INSTRUMENTATION TIME MARK OUT
SUPERFLAGS
STORMSCOPE RS-232 IN MAIN OBS

RS-232 OUT
ARINC 429 IN TRAFFIC
FUEL/AIR DATA DISCRETES
OR RS-232 IN
SERIALIZER SWITCHES SWITCHES/
ARINC 429 IN ANNUNCIATORS
ANNUNCIATORS
ARINC 429 OUT
FLIGHT CONTROL
SYSTEM ILS/GPS APPROACH RS-232 OUT EXTERNAL MAP
LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS DISPLAY
VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
SUPERFLAGS RS-232 IN
TRANSPONDER
RS-232 OUT
GNS 400W/500W RS-232 IN RS-232 IN GSR 56

SERIES CROSSFILL RS-232 OUT RS-232 OUT
GTN 7XX
CONNECTOR P1002
GARMIN
GTN 6XX/7XX ETHERNET IN DISCRETES
(CROSSFILL) ETHERNET OUT
GARMIN ETHERNET IN ETHERNET IN

WEATHER RADAR ETHERNET OUT ETHERNET OUT
OTHER GARMIN LRUs
GTN 750
CONNECTOR P1003
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND
AUDIO PANEL
COM MIC AUDIO MICROPHONE
COM MIC KEY
COM REMOTE TRANSFER COM REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH
COM MIC AUDIO
COM AUDIO
COM REMOTE TUNE UP COM REMOTE TUNE
SWITCHES
ANALOG AUDIO COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN
GTN 750
CONNECTOR P1004
VLOC AUDIO
CDI/HSI
LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS (VOR/ILS ONLY)
TO/FROM
RMI VOR OBI VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
SUPERFLAGS
VOR OBS
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND
VLOC COMPOSITE OUT
NAV ILS ENERGIZE
ARINC 429
EFIS/EHSI
NAV ARINC 429 IN SERIAL DME CLOCK/DATA KING SERIAL
NAV ARINC 429 OUT DME REQUEST COMMON TUNED DME
PARALLEL TUNED PARALLEL DME TUNING NAV REMOTE TRANSFER NAV REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH
DME NAV DME COMMON
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
GTN 7XX
CONNECTOR P1006
COM ANTENNA
GTN 750
CONNECTOR P1007
NAV ANTENNA
GTN 750
CONNECTOR P1008
Figure D-1 System Interface Diagram

Rev. N Page D-2
GTN 750
NAVIGATION
P1001 INDICATOR
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT 68 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 +TO FLAG
MAIN +FROM OUT 30 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 G/S+ FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H GND 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E GND 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G GND 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
FAN
FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) 59 RED
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW
5
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2
5
NAV/GPS
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 ESSENTIAL BUS
AIRCRAFT POWER 20 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT 7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 77 GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 78
LIGHTING BUS 1 HI 18 TRANSPONDER
LIGHTING BUS 1 LO 17 TO AIRCRAFT
LIGHTING BUS 2 LO 42 LIGHTING BUS
LIGHTING BUS 2 HI 61
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 GROUND
s
P1003 COM

AIRCRAFT AUDIO PANEL
AIRCRAFT GND 38
AIRCRAFT GND 40
500 O COM AUDIO HI 7 COM 1 AUDIO HI
500 O COM AUDIO LO 18 COM 1 AUDIO LO
s
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20
COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 COM 1 MIC AUDIO HI
COM MIC 1 KEY 11 COM 1 MIC KEY OUT
s
P1001
AUDIO OUT HI 4 HI ALERT 1
AUDIO OUT LO 23 LO AUDIO IN
s
RS-232 OUT 2 7 RS-232 IN

RS-232 IN 2 26 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 GND 2 45
s
P1004 s
500 O VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 NAV 1 AUDIO HI

500 O VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 NAV 1 AUDIO LO
s
AIRCRAFT GND 60
AIRCRAFT GND 61
AIRCRAFT GND 62
AIRCRAFT POWER 51
AIRCRAFT POWER 52
P1006
GPS/WAAS
GPS/WAAS ANTENNA ANTENNA
P1007
COM
COM ANTENNA
ANTENNA
P1008
NAV
NAV ANTENNA ANTENNA

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-3
NOTES
ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED (SEE POWER AND LIGHTING
1 INTERCONNECT FOR POWER AND GROUND GAUGES).
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: S SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT GTN 750, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A
CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
THIS DIAGRAM PROVIDES AN OVERVIEW OF A TYPICAL GTN 7XX INSTALLATION. REFER TO

4 APPROPRIATE INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT.
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH THE
5 CONFIGURATION MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO
P1001.
6 AIRCRAFT POWER MUST BE 11-33 VDC.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-4
GTN 725
NAVIGATION
P1001
INDICATOR
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 CDI+ R
s
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 NAV- FLAG
s
s
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H GND 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR E GND 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR G 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
FAN
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
5
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2 GPS
5
AIRCRAFT POWER 20 5A
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 78
LIGHTING BUS 1 LO 17 TO AIRCRAFT TRANSPONDER
LIGHTING BUS 2 LO 42 LIGHTING BUS
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 GROUND
s
AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI 4 HI ALERT 1

AUDIO OUT LO 23 LO AUDIO IN
RS-232 OUT 2 7 RS-232 IN

RS-232 IN 2 26 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 GND 2 45
s
P1006
GPS/WAAS
GPS/WAAS ANTENNA ANTENNA

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-5
NOTES
ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED (SEE POWER AND LIGHTING
1 INTERCONNECT FOR POWER AND GROUND GAUGES).
AT GTN 725, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A
THIS DIAGRAM PROVIDES AN OVERVIEW OF A TYPICAL GTN 7XX INSTALLATION. REFER TO

4 APPROPRIATE INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT.
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH THE
P1001.
6 AIRCRAFT POWER MUST BE 11-33 VDC.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-6
GTN 7XX
P1001 8
NAV/GPS
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 20 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS

3 7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 77 20 AWG GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 78
5
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2
4
LIGHTING BUS 1 LO 17 TO AIRCRAFT
LIGHTING BUS 2 LO 42 LIGHTING BUS 6
10
9 FAN
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
DAY
11 DAY/NIGHT* n
NIGHT
P1004
AIRCRAFT POWER 51 20 AWG

AIRCRAFT POWER 52
3 AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 61 20 AWG GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 62
7
P1003 COM ESSENTIAL BUS
20 AWG (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 30
18 AWG (14 VDC) 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 43
3
20 AWG (28 VDC) AIRCRAFT
18 AWG (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 38
AIRCRAFT GND 40

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-7
NOTES
1 ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
3 ALL POWER LEADS AND GROUND LEADS ARE REQUIRED.
4 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P1001 CONNECTOR.
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH

P1001.
OPTIONAL CONNECTION. LIGHTING CAN BE CONTROLLED BY THE INTEGRATED PHOTOCELL, A SINGLE

6 LIGHTING BUS, OR DUAL LIGHTING BUSES.
7 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN.
8 CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS “GPS” FOR THE GTN 725, AND “NAV/GPS” FOR THE GTN 750.
IF MODIFICATION OF THE HARNESS FROM THE FAN TO THE P1001 CONNECTOR IS NECESSARY, THE
9 MODIFIED LENGTH MUST NOT BE LONGER THAN 8”. THE FAN HARNESS PART NUMBER IS 320-00600-00
AND IS SUPPLIED AS PART OF THE GTN 7XX CONNECTOR KIT.
10 FAN SUPPLIED AS PART OF THE BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY.
THE DAY/NIGHT DISCRETE IS USED FOR INSTALLATIONS THAT UTILIZE THE ENHANCED LIGHTING
CONFIGURATION. SWITCH SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN. THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
11 FOR THIS DISCRETE INPUT. AN UNUSED DISCRETE MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. SEE
SECTION 6.6.7 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING DISCRETES AND THE ENHANCED LIGHTING
FUNCTION.
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-8
GPS/WAAS Antenna 1
SINGLE GTN INSTALLATION

GTN 725
P1006
GPS/WAAS
VOR/LOC/GS Antenna
COM Antenna
GTN 750
P1008
NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna 1
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS
COM Antenna
DUAL GTN 750 INSTALLATION

GPS/WAAS Antenna 1
GTN 750 #1
P1007
COM
P1006
VOR/LOC/GS
GPS/WAAS
Antenna
P1008
NAV 2
1
Splitter S
2
GTN 750 #2 COM Antenna

P1008
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. N Page D-9
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO, AND SINGLE ANTENNA
GTN 750 #1 VOR/LOC/GS

Antenna
P1008
NAV 2
1
Splitter S
VHF NAV RADIO WITH 2
SEPARATE G/S AND
VOR/LOC ANTENNA
PORTS G/S
G/S
Diplexer ANT
VOR
VOR/LOC
DUAL GTN/DUAL NAV ANTENNA INSTALLATION

COM Antenna
GPS/WAAS Antenna 1
GTN 750 #1
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS
G/S Antenna
P1008
NAV
VOR/LOC Antenna
2 3 4
1 G/S
Splitter S ANT Diplexer
2 VOR
GTN 750 #2 COM Antenna

P1008
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. N Page D-10
G/S Antenna
SINGLE GTN/DUAL NAV ANTENNA INSTALLATION VOR/LOC Antenna
3 4
G/S
ANT Diplexer
VOR
GTN 750 COM Antenna

P1008
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO AND DUAL ANTENNAS G/S Antenna
GTN 750 #1 2
3 4
VOR/LOC Antenna
P1008 G/S 1
ANT Diplexer Splitter S
NAV
VOR 2
VHF NAV RADIO WITH 1

SEPARATE G/S AND Splitter S
VOR/LOC ANTENNA 2
PORTS G/S
VOR/LOC
NOTES
THE GPS ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE MUST BE DOUBLE OR TRIPLE SHIELDED AND THE LOSS (INCLUDING
1 CONNECTORS) MUST USUALLY BE GREATER THAN 1.5 DB AND LESS THAN 6 DB.
2 GARMIN P/N 013-00112-00 (MINI-CIRCUITS SPLITTER P/N ZFSC-2-1B+) OR EQUIVALENT SHOULD BE USED.
3 COMANT DIPLEXER P/N CI 507 (OR EQUIVALENT) SHOULD BE USED.
THE DIPLEXER IS INSTALLED BACKWARDS FROM TRADITIONAL APPLICATIONS. WHEN A G/S AND VOR/
4 LOC ANTENNA IS INSTALLED, IT IS REQUIRED TO JOIN THE SIGNALS OF BOTH ANTENNAS WITH THE 
CI-507 DIPLEXER.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. N Page D-11
NAVIGATION
GTN 7XX INDICATOR
P1001
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 CDI+ R
s

s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG 50 NAV+ FLAG

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG 69 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT 13 NAV SUPERFLAG

NAV SUPERFLAG LO
s

s
MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT 32 GS SUPERFLAG

GS SUPERFLAG LO
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}

s
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
4 GPS ANNUNCIATE 15 GPS ANNC
4 VLOC ANNUNCIATE 52 NAV ANNC
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 ILS ENERGIZE
NOTES
AT THE GTN 7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THIS PIN FUNCTION IS CONFIGURABLE AS
4 DESCRIBED IN SECTION 6.6.14.
Figure D-6 Main Indicator Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-12
TO MAIN CDI
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT

MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT
AUTOPILOT
GTN 7XX
P1001
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 LAT DEV FLAG+

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 LAT DEV FLAG-
s
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 LAT DEV +LT
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 LAT DEV +RT
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 GS DEV FLAG+
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 GS DEV FLAG-
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 GS DEV +UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 GS DEV +DOWN
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 ARINC 429 IN A
4 ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 ARINC 429 IN B
s
5 GPS SELECT 74 GPS SELECT (GND=GPS)
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 ILS ENERGIZE (A/P IN)
NOTES
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT
A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4 SEE SECTION 6.6 FOR GTN CONFIGURATION SETUP INSTRUCTIONS.
Figure D-7 Autopilot Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-13
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO ARINC 429 TRAFFIC SOURCE
TRAFFIC ADVISORY
SYSTEM
GTN 7XX
4 P1001
A 48 A
ARINC 429 IN 1 ARINC 429 OUT
B 67 B
s
8 TRAFFIC TEST 75 TAS TEST IN

(OPTIONAL) 6
8 TRAFFIC STANDBY 76 STANDBY / OPERATE
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO RS-232 TRAFFIC SOURCE

TIS OR TCAD
RS-232 SOURCE
GTN 7XX
4
P1001
RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 SIGNAL GND
s
TYPICAL CONNECTIONS TO HSDB SOURCE
GTN 7XX HSDB SOURCE

4
P1002
7
A 13 A
ETHERNET IN 4 B ETHERNET OUT
B 14
A 4 A
ETHERNET OUT 4 B ETHERNET IN
B 5
s s

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-14
NOTES
4 ONLY ONE TRAFFIC SOURCE MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GTN 7XX.
5 SEE SECTION 6.6 FOR GTN 7XX CONFIGURATION SETUP.
THESE OPTIONAL DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED IF THE GTN 7XX IS CONFIGURED FOR
“+ EXTERNAL CONTROL.” IN THIS CASE, THE GTN 7XX WILL NOT CONTROL THE TRAFFIC ADVISORY
6 SYSTEM OPERATION. REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND
INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
7 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. SEE SECTION 4.7.2 FOR PART NUMBERS

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-15
TRANSPONDER
GTN 7XX #1
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27
RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8
RS232 RxD1
RS-232 GND 1 46
s
SIGNAL GROUND
SINGLE GTN/SINGLE TRANSPONDER WITH OR WITHOUT TIS
TRANSPONDER
GTN 7XX #1 #1
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS232 RxD1
RS-232 GND 1 46 SIGNAL GROUND
s
TRANSPONDER
#2
RS-232 IN 2 26 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 2 7 RS232 RxD1

s
SINGLE GTN/DUAL TRANSPONDERS WITH OR WITHOUT TIS

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. N Page D-16
TRANSPONDER
GTN 7XX #1
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS232 RxD1

s
GTN 7XX #2
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS232 TxD2
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS232 RxD2

s
DUAL GTNs/SINGLE TRANSPONDER WITH OR WITHOUT TIS

TRANSPONDER
GTN 7XX #1 #1
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS232 RxD1

s
TRANSPONDER
GTN 7XX #2 #2
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS232 RxD1

s
DUAL GTNs/DUAL TRANSPONDERS WITHOUT TIS

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. N Page D-17
TRANSPONDER
GTN 7XX #1 #1
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS232 RxD1

s
RS-232 IN 2 26
4 RS-232 OUT 2 7
RS-232 GND 2 45
s
GTN 7XX #2
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS232 TxD2
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS232 RxD2

s
TRANSPONDER
#2
RS232 TxD1
RS232 RxD1
SIGNAL GROUND
RS-232 IN 2 26 RS232 TxD2
4 RS-232 OUT 2 7 RS232 RxD2

s
DUAL GTNs/DUAL TRANSPONDERS WITH TIS

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. N Page D-18
GARMIN 7
TO EXISTING TRANSPONDER
GTN 7XX AIRCRAFT WIRING
P1001
S
TIME MARK IN A
TIME MARK OUT A 3
TIME MARK OUT B 22 TIME MARK IN B

s s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 ARINC 429 IN 1A

5
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 ARINC 429 IN 1B
s s
ARINC 743a GPS POSITION TO TRANSPONDER 8
NOTES
IF RS-232 PORT 1 IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN
4 LIEU OF PORT 1.
IF ARINC 429 PORT 1 IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ARINC 429 PORT MAY BE
5 CONNECTED IN LIEU OF PORT 1.
WHEN TIS IS USED IN THE AIRCRAFT DO NOT CONNECT ANOTHER TRAFFIC SYSTEM TO THE SAME GTN
6 7XX UNIT.
IF GTN TIME MARK OUTPUT IS ALREADY CONNECTED TO AIRCRAFT WIRING, SPLICE INTO THIS WIRING
7 FOR THE CONNECTION TO THE TRANSPONDER.
GPS POSITION CAN BE PROVIDED TO GARMIN TRANSPONDERS USING RS-232. GPS POSITION OVER
8 ARINC 429 (ARINC 743A) IS FOR USE WITH THIRD-PARTY TRANSPONDERS.
SEE SECTION 6.6.1 AND SECTION 6.6.2 FOR ARINC 429 AND RS-232 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS,
9 RESPECTIVELY.
TO PREVENT STALE/UNCHANGING DATA, ALTITUDE DATA RECEIVED BY THE GTX SHOULD NOT BE
10 OUTPUT FROM THE GTX TO OTHER LRUs.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. N Page D-19
GTN 7XX #1 P1002 P6201 GDU 620 7
6
4 ETHERNET IN 2A 15 13 ETHERNET OUT 1A
ETHERNET IN 2B 16 14 ETHERNET OUT 1B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 17 11 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 18 12 ETHERNET IN 1B
s s
P1001 P6202
RS-232 OUT 2 7 12 RS-232 IN 3
RS-232 GND 2 45 46 RS-232 GND 3
s s
TIME MARK OUT A 3 40 TIME MARK IN 1A
GPS 1
TIME MARK OUT B 22 41 TIME MARK IN 1B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 6 ARINC 429 IN 3A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 23 ARINC 429 IN 3B
s s
ARINC 429 IN 2A 47 3 ARINC 429 OUT 1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 66 20 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
P1004
8 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 7 ARINC 429 IN 4A

23 24 NAV 1
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B ARINC 429 IN 4B
s s
GTN 7XX #2
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 2A 47
4
ARINC 429 IN 2B 66
s
RS-232 OUT 2 7 13 RS-232 IN 4
RS-232 GND 2 45 47 RS-232 GND 4
s s
TIME MARK OUT A 3 42 TIME MARK IN 2A GPS 2

TIME MARK OUT B 22 43 TIME MARK IN 2B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 8 ARINC 429 IN 5A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 25 ARINC 429 IN 5B
s s
P1002 6 P6201
ETHERNET IN 2A 15 32 ETHERNET OUT 2A
ETHERNET IN 2B 16 33 ETHERNET OUT 2B
ETHERNET OUT 2A 17 30 ETHERNET IN 2A
ETHERNET OUT 2B 18 31 ETHERNET IN 2B
s s
SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 10 s 9
P1004 P6202
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 9 ARINC 429 IN 6A
8 23 26 NAV 2
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B ARINC 429 IN 6B
s s

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-20
NOTES
CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS
2 THAN 3.0".
3 IF ONLY ONE GTN 7XX IS INSTALLED, CONNECT AS SHOWN FOR GTN #1.
IF A TAWS-EQUIPPED GTN 7XX UNIT IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED AS GTN #1 – ONLY TAWS
ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN #1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO TAWS-EQUIPPED UNITS ARE
4 INSTALLED, THE TAWS-EQUIPPED UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE
CONNECTED AS GTN #1.
REFER TO MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT

5 INFORMATION.
6 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. SEE SECTION 4.7.2 FOR PART NUMBERS.
7 GDU 620 SOFTWARE V5.01 OR LATER IS REQUIRED FOR INTERFACE TO THE GTN.
8 P1004 CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE ON THE GTN 750.
SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* IS ONLY USED IN SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO V5.00. IN SOFTWARE V5.00 OR
9 LATER, THE SYSTEM ID IS SET VIA CONFIGURATION MODE. SEE SECTION 6.4 FOR MORE INFORMATION.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-21
GTN 7XX 6
ARINC 429 EFIS DISPLAY #
#1 1
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 1 A 48 LNAV TRANSMITTER A

4
ARINC 429 IN 1 B 67 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B

s
LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER A
P1004 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 NAV 1 RECEIVER A

7
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 NAV 1 RECEIVER B
s
NAV 2 RECEIVER A
NAV 2 RECEIVER B
ARINC 429 EFIS DISPLAY #

2
GTN 7XX 6
#2
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 1 A 48 LNAV TRANSMITTER A

4
ARINC 429 IN 1 B 67 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
s
LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER A
LRN/LNAV 1 RECEIVER B
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER A
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 LRN/LNAV 2 RECEIVER B

s
NAV 1 RECEIVER A
P1004 NAV 1 RECEIVER B
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 NAV 2 RECEIVER A

7
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B 23 NAV 2 RECEIVER B
s

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-22
NOTES
IF THE ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT (P1001 PINS -48 AND -67) IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, THE
4 ARINC 429 IN 2 PORT (P1001 PINS -47 AND -66) MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD.
REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT

5 INFORMATION.
6 SEE SECTION 6.6 FOR GTN 7XX CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
7 THESE OUTPUTS ARE USED ON THE GTN 750 ONLY.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-23
GTN 7XX GDL 69/69A
P1002
4 5
A 23 25 A
ETHERNET IN 3 ETHERNET OUT 1
B 24 24 B
A 25 23 A
ETHERNET OUT 3 ETHERNET IN 1
B 26 22 B
s s
6
NOTES
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GDL 69/69A TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF ETHERNET PORT 3. IF THERE ARE NO FREE PORTS ON
THE GTN 7XX, THE OTHER LRU CAN BE DISCONNECTED (EXCEPT GDU 620) FROM THE GTN 7XX AND THE 
4 GDL 69/69A CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE GTN 7XX IN ITS PLACE. THE DISCONNECTED LRU CAN BE
CONNECTED TO ETHERNET PORT 2, 3, OR 4 ON THE GDL 69/69A. SEE SECTION 6.6.3 FOR HSDB
ARCHITECTURE OPTIONS.
ETHERNET PORTS 2, 3, OR 4 MAY BE USED LIEU OF PORT 1. THE PORT THAT IS USED MUST BE ENABLED
6 IN CONFIGURATION MODE. REFER TO GDL 69 SERIES TSO INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
DETAILS.
Figure D-12 GDL 69/69A Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-24
AUDIO PANEL
GTN 7XX
P1003
2 500 COM AUDIO HI 7 COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO HI

500 COM AUDIO LO 18 COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO LO
MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO

6 MIC 1 TRANSMIT 11 COM 1/(COM 2) MIC KEY
MIC AUDIO LO 20 COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO LO
COM REMOTE
TRANSFER SWITCH
3 COM REMOTE TRANSFER 27
P1001
AUDIO OUT HI 4 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN HI
AUDIO OUT LO 23 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN LO
RS-232 OUT 2 7 RS-232 IN
9
RS-232 IN 2 26 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 GND 2 45
10 TAWS AUDIO INHIBIT IN 36 7
10 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT 35 8
P1004
10 500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO HI

500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO LO
NOTES
THE 500 OHM AUDIO OUTPUTS ARE BALANCED OUTPUTS, AND THE LO OUTPUTS MUST BE CONNECTED.
2 IF THE AUDIO PANEL DOES NOT HAVE A LO INPUT, THE LO OUTPUT SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO A
GROUND LUG AT THE AUDIO PANEL.
THE COM REMOTE TRANSFER INPUT MAY BE USED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION OF THE COM
3 TRANSMITTER. IF THE REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH IS ACTIVE FOR TWO SECONDS, THE ACTIVE COM
FREQUENCY WILL CHANGE TO 121.50 MHZ.

4 INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
SHIELDS FOR AUDIO CABLES SHOULD BE GROUNDED AT ONE END (WITH LEADS LESS THAN 3.0") AND
5 LEFT FLOATING AT THE OTHER END. IF SHIELDED AUDIO CABLE IS CARRIED THROUGH A DISCONNECT,
CARRY THE SHIELD GROUND THROUGH THE DISCONNECT ON A SEPARATE PIN.
CONNECTING TWO MICROPHONES TO MIC AUDIO HI/LO AT THE SAME TIME MAY RESULT IN WEAK OR
6 DISTORTED AUDIO. MIC ISOLATION RELAYS ARE RECOMMENDED SO THAT ONLY ONE MIC IS ACTIVE AT
A TIME.
Figure D-13 GTN - Audio Panel Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. N Page D-25
USE THE AUDIO INHIBIT IN DISCRETE INPUT TO INHIBIT GTN 7XX AURAL ALERTS WHEN A HIGHER
7 PRIORITY SYSTEM IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
USE THE AUDIO ACTIVE OUT DISCRETE OUTPUT TO INHIBIT AURAL ALERTS FROM LOWER PRIORITY
8 SYSTEMS WHENEVER THE GTN 7XX IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
9 FOR CERTAIN GARMIN AUDIO PANELS.
Figure D-13 Audio Panel Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. N Page D-26
MIXING AUDIO SIGNALS USING RESISTORS 4
BEFORE MODIFICATION AFTER MODIFICATION
EXISTING LRU AUDIO PANEL EXISTING LRU R AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED

LO AUDIO IN LO AUDIO IN
R
GTN 7XX
AUDIO OUT
s
NOTES
AT GTN 7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
BE LESS THAN 3.0". SHIELDS FOR AUDIO CABLES SHOULD BE GROUNDED AT ONE END ONLY AND LEFT
3 FLOATING AT THE OTHER END. IF SHIELDED AUDIO CABLE IS CARRIED THROUGH A DISCONNECT, CARRY
THE SHIELD GROUND THROUGH THE DISCONNECT ON A SEPARATE PIN.
IF AUDIO PANEL DOES NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED INPUT, AUDIO FROM THE GTN 7XX MUST
BE MIXED WITH AN EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM
4 EACH LRU. A TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS 390 Ω ¼ W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING
AUDIO SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
Figure D-13 Audio Panel Interconnect
Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. N Page D-27
GTN 7XX
ALTITUDE
P1001 ENCODER
4 RS-232 IN 2 26 RS-232 OUT HI

RS-232 GND 2 45 RS-232 OUT LO
s
FUEL/AIR
DATA
RS-232 IN 1 27 RS-232 OUT HI
4
RS-232 GND 1 46 RS-232 OUT LO
s
GARMIN
400W/500W Series
P4001
RS-232 OUT 3 6 42 GPS RS-232 IN 3

4 RS-232 IN 3 25 41 GPS RS-232 OUT 3
RS-232 GND 3 44
s PROVISIONAL ONLY
RS-232
RECEIVER
RS-232 OUT 1 8 RS-232 IN HI

4 RS-232 IN LO
RS-232 GND 1 46 s
AIR DATA COMPUTER
RS-232 OUT 4 5 RS-232 RXD

4 6
RS-232 IN 4 24 RS-232 TXD
RS-232 GND 3 44
s

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-28
NOTES
SEE SECTION 6.6.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL SETTINGS. RS-232 CHANNEL PORTS 1 TO 4 ARE SHOWN. ANY
4 AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED.

6 USED ONLY ON TAS 1000.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-29
GTN 7XX
AIR DATA
COMPUTER
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 1 A 48 TRANSMITTER A

4
ARINC 429 IN 1 B 67 TRANSMITTER B
s
GTN 7XX
IRU/AHRS
P1001
ARINC 429 IN 1 A 48 IRU/AHRS TRANSMITTER A

4 ARINC 429 IN 1 B 67 IRU/AHRS TRANSMITTER B
s
NOTES
SEE SECTION 6.6.1 FOR ARINC 429 CHANNEL SETTINGS. IF ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT IS BEING USED FOR
4 ANOTHER PURPOSE, THE ARINC 429 IN 2 PORT (P1001 PINS -47 AND -66) MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF
PORT 1.
Figure D-15 Air Data/IRU/AHRS ARINC 429 Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-30
GTN 7XX GARMIN GAD 42
4 5
P1001 P421
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 10 1 GPS ARINC 429 IN A
7
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 29 2 GPS ARINC 429 IN B
s
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 13 ARINC 429 OUT A

ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 14 ARINC 429 OUT B
s
P1004
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A 24 3 NAV ARINC 429 IN A

6 23 4
VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B NAV ARINC 429 IN B
s
NOTES
4 FOR GTN 7XX CONFIGURATION SETTINGS, SEE SECTION 6.6.
REFER TO GAD 42 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
5 CONFIGURE THE ARINC 429 BUS SPEED TO MATCH THE GTN 750 OUTPUT SPEED.
6 THESE CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY USED ON THE GTN 750.
IF THE ARINC 429 OUT 1 PORT (P1001 PINS -10 AND -29) IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, THE
7 ARINC 429 OUT 2 PORT (P1001 PINS -9 AND -28) MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF PORT 1.
Figure D-16 GAD 42 Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-31
GTN 7XX NAVIG ATION
INDICATO R
P1004
VOR/LOC +LEFT 5 +LEFT

VOR /LOC +RIGHT 6 +RIGHT
s
VOR /LOC +TO 1 +TO
VOR/LOC +FROM 2 +FROM
s
VOR /LOC +FLAG 3 NAV +FLAG
VOR /LOC -FLAG 4 NAV -FLAG
s
VOR /LOC SUPERFLAG 15 NAV SUPERFLAG
NAV SUPERFLAG LO
VOR/LOC COM POSITE OUT 8 VOR/LOC COM POSITE
s
ILS ENERGIZE 29 ILS ENERGIZE
GLIDESLOPE +UP 34 +UP

GLIDESLOPE +DOW N 55 +DOW N
s
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 32 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG

GLIDESLOPE -FLAG 53 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG
s
GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG 38 GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG

GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG LO
VOR OBS ROTOR H (GROUND) 10 OBS A /H

VOR OBS ROTOR C 9 OBS C
s
VOR OBS STATOR D 13 OBS D (COS HI)

VOR OBS STATOR E (GROUND) 11 OBS E (COS LO )
s
VOR OBS STATOR F 12 OBS F (SIN HI)

VOR OBS STATOR G (GROUND) 14 OBS G (SIN LO )
s
NOTES

4 INFORMATION.
THIS INTERCONNECT APPLIES ONLY WHEN IT IS DESIRED FOR A SEPARATE INDICATOR TO DISPLAY GTN
5 750 VOR/ILS INFORMATION REGARDLESS OF THE CDI BUTTON STATUS.
Figure D-17 VOR/ILS Indicator Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-32
RADIO MAGNETIC
INDICATOR
GTN 750
P1004
VOR OBI CLOCK 25 OBI CLOCK

s
VOR OBI DATA 27 OBI DATA

s
VOR OBI SYNC 26 OBI SYNC

s
NOTES

4 INFORMATION.
Figure D-18 RMI OBI Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-33
SINGLE GTN CONNECTION TO WX-500
GTN 7XX
L3 Communications
WX-500
P1001 P3 4
RS-232 OUT 4 5 8 RS-232 RX

5
RS-232 IN 4 24 20 RS-232 TX
RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s P2
5 RS-232 GROUND
DUAL GTN CONNECTIONS TO WX-500

GTN 7XX #1
L3 Communications
WX-500
P1001 P3 4
RS-232 OUT 4 5 8 RS-232 RX

5
RS-232 IN 4 24 20 RS-232 TX
RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s P2
5 RS-232 GROUND
GTN 7XX #2
7
P1001
RS-232 IN 4 24
5 RS-232 GND 3/4 44
s
NOTES

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-34
FOR WX-500 DATA TO BE DISPLAYED ON THE GTN 7XX MAP PAGE THE GTN 7XX MUST HAVE A DIGITAL
4 HEADING SOURCE, OR THE WX-500 MUST HAVE A SYNCHRO OR SERIAL HEADING SOURCE. A STEPPER
HEADING SOURCE WILL NOT ALLOW WX-500 DATA TO BE DISPLAYED ON THE MAP PAGE.
5 ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. SEE SECTION 6.6.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL SETTINGS.

WHEN CONNECTING TWO GTNS TO THE WX-500, CONFIGURE ONLY THE RS-232 INPUT PORT TO
7 LIGHTNING DETECTOR 1 AND NOT THE OUTPUT.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-35
DME TRANSCEIVER
GTN 750 #1
5 P1004
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18 CLOCK BUS

s
SERIAL DME-DATA 19 DATA BUS
s
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20 RNAV/CHANNEL REQ
s
NAV 1
DME COMMON 41
DME COMMON
NAV 2
GTN 750 #2 NAV SELECTION SW 6
5 P1004
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18
s
SERIAL DME-DATA 19
s
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20
s
DME COMMON 41
NOTES
AT THE GTN 750, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS

THE GTN 750 MUST BE CONFIGURED AT INSTALLATION TO OUTPUT KING SERIAL DME TUNING DATA
5 UNDER THE DME CHANNEL MODE. SEE SECTION 6.6 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
6 THE NAV SELECTION SWITCH IS ONLY REQUIRED IF TWO GTN 750s ARE INSTALLED.
Figure D-20 GTN 750 - DME Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-36
REMOTE DME
GTN 750 #1
P1004
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18 CLOCK BUS

s
SERIAL DME-DATA 19 DATA BUS
s
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20 DME REQUEST
s
DME COMMON 41
DME INDICATOR
GTN 750 #2
P1004
DME REQUEST
SERIAL DME-CLOCK 18
s DATA BUS
SERIAL DME-DATA 19
s CLOCK BUS
SERIAL DME-RNAV/CH REQ 20
s RNAV REQUEST
NAV 1 COMMON
DME COMMON 41 NAV 2 COMMON
NOTES

4 INFORMATION.
THE GTN 750 MUST BE CONFIGURED AT INSTALLATION TO OUTPUT DME TUNING DATA UNDER THE DME
5 CHANNEL MODE.
Figure D-21 GTN 750 - Remote DME Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-37
GTN 750
DME
P1004
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-A 45 1 MHZ-A
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-B 46 1 MHZ-B
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-C 47 1 MHZ-C
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-D 33 1 MHZ-D
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-E 56 1 MHZ-E
PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-A 37 100 KHZ-A

PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-B 39 100 KHZ-B
PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-C 40 100 KHZ-C
PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-D 42 100 KHZ-D
PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-E 54 100 KHZ-E
PARALLEL DME 50KHZ 43 50 KHZ
DME COMMON 41 DME COMMON
10 MHZ-A
10 MHZ-E
2 X 5 CODE SELECT
N/C SLIP CODE SELECT
N/C BCD CODE SELECT
NOTES
4 REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT.
Figure D-22 GTN 750 - Parallel 2 of 5 DME Tuning Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-38
GTN 750 PARALLEL SLIP
CODE TUNED DME
3
P1004
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-A 45 M0
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-B 46 M1
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-C 47 M2
PARALLEL DME 1MHZ-D 33 M3
PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-A 37 K0

PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-B 39 K1
PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-C 40 K2
PARALLEL DME 100KHZ-D 42 K3
PARALLEL DME 50KHZ 43 K50

DME COMMON 41 DME COMMON
NOTES

THE GTN 750 MUST BE CONFIGURED TO OUTPUT SLIP CODE DME TUNING DATA FOR PROPER
3 OPERATION IN THIS CONFIGURATION. SEE SECTION 6.6 FOR CONFIGURATION SETTINGS.
Figure D-23 GTN 750 - Parallel Slip Code DME Tuning Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-39
GTN 7XX XYZ GYRO
P1005 5
SYNCHRO X 35 HDG SYNCH X
SYNCHRO Y 14 HDG SYNCH Y
SYNCHRO Z 56 HDG SYNCH Z

6 s
HDG VALID IN (ACTIVE LOW) 33 HDG VALID OUT
HDG VALID IN (ACTIVE HI) 54 HDG VALID OUT
SYNCRO REF HI 36 HDG SYNC REF HI
SYNCHRO REF LO 15 HDG SYNC REF LO

s
A/C 26VAC 400 HZ HI
A/C 26VAC 400 HZ LO
NOTES

4 INFORMATION
A DIRECTIONAL GYRO OR HSI BOOTSTRAP OUTPUT MAY BE USED TO PROVIDE SYNCHRO HEADING TO
5 THE GTN 7XX.
EITHER THE HDG VALID IN (ACTIVE HI) OR HDG VALID IN (ACTIVE LO) SHOULD BE CONNECTED. DO NOT
6 CONNECT BOTH OF THESE INPUTS TO THE SYNCHRO.
Figure D-24 Heading Synchro Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-40
7 GTN 7XX
GPS ACU
P1001
VLOC ANNUNCIATE 52 VLOC ANNC

GPS ANNUNCIATE 15 GPS ANNC
WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE 33 WPT ANNC
TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE 34 TERM ANNC
APPROACH ANNUNCIATE 55 APR ANNC
MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE 54 MSG ANNC
OBS ANNUNCIATE 14 OBS ANNC
LOI ANNUNCIATE 53 INTG ANNC
OBS MODE SELECT 16 OBS MODE SELECT
CDI SOURCE SELECT 39 CDI SOURCE SELECT
P1002
6
SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* 3 SUSP ANNC
NOTES
IF A CDI/HSI SOURCE SELECTION ANNUNCIATOR IS REQUIRED, INDICATORS ON THIS PAGE ARE

3 SUITABLE TO MEET THE ANNUNCIATION REQUIREMENT.
4 LEGENDS ARE HIDDEN (BLACK) WHEN NOT ILLUMINATED.
5 THE PREFERRED ANNUNCIATION IS VLOC/GPS ALTHOUGH NAV/GPS IS ACCEPTABLE.
FOR GPS ACUs WITHOUT SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE INPUT, SPLICE THE GTN’S SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* AND
6 OBS ANNUNCIATE* OUTPUTS TOGETHER.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR PINS 3, 14, 16, 33, 34, 39, 52, 53, 54 AND 55 ARE SHOWN. THESE PIN
7 FUNCTIONS ARE CONFIGURABLE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 6.6.14.
Figure D-25 GPS Annunciator Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-41
(WHITE) VLOC
GTN 7XX (GREEN) GPS

P1001 VLOC (W)
2 VLOC ANNUNCIATE 52
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
N/C
DIMMER CIRCUIT
GPS ANNUNCIATE 15
GPS (G)
NAV/GPS INDICATOR
NOTES
1 THE PREFERRED ANNUNCIATION IS VLOC/GPS ALTHOUGH NAV/GPS IS ACCEPTABLE.
Figure D-26 NAV Source Select Annunciator Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-42
GTN 7XX TAWS ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
9
5 P1001 4
TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE ANNUNCIATE 72 TERR N/A ANNC IN
TERRAIN WARNING ANNUNCIATE 71 TERR PULL UP ANNC IN
7 TERRAIN CAUTION ANNUNCIATE 73 TERR CAUTION ANNC IN
TAWS INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE 57 TAWS INHIBIT ANNC IN
TAWS INHIBIT IN 37 TAWS INHIBIT OUT
HTAWS RP MODE ANNUNCIATE n HTAWS RP MODE ANNC IN

8 HTAWS RP MODE IN n HTAWS RP MODE OUT
HTAWS ALERT ACKNOWLEDGE IN n HTAWS MUTE CAUTION OUT
12
GLIDESLOPE CAUTION ANNUNCIATE n GLIDESLOPE CAUTION ANNC IN
GPWS FAIL ANNUNCIATE n GPWS FAIL ANNC IN
GPWS INHIBIT IN n GPWS INHIBIT OUT
GPWS INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE n GPWS INHIBIT ANNC IN
10 FLAP OVERRIDE IN n FLAP OVERRIDE OUT 15
FLAP OVERRIDE ANNUNCIATE n FLAP OVERRIDE INHIBIT ANNC IN
GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT IN n GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT OUT
GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT ANNUNCIATE n GLIDESLOPE INHIBIT ANNC IN
AIRCRAFT GROUND
GTN 7XX VHF Navigation Radio

9
5 P1001 13
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 ARINC 429 OUT A

14 ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 ARINC 429 OUTB
s s
GPS Navigator
13
10

14 ARINC 429 IN 2B 66 ARINC 429 OUT B
s s
FLAP POSITION IN* n 11

LANDING GEAR POSITION IN* n 11
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT 35 6

AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI 4 UNSWITCHED IN HI
AUDIO OUT LO 23 UNSWITCHED IN LO
s

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-43
NOTES

4 INFORMATION.
FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH MULTIPLE GTNs, ONLY ONE GTN SHOULD HAVE TAWS/HTAWS ENABLED TO
5 PREVENT CONFLICTING AUDIO MESSAGES.
CONNECT TO THE AUDIO INHIBIT INPUTS OF OTHER SYSTEMS WITH LOWER PRIORITY AURALS THAN
6 TAWS.
7 THESE PINS ARE USED FOR TAWS AND HTAWS INSTALLATIONS.
THESE PINS ARE USED ONLY FOR HTAWS INSTALLATIONS. THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR
8 THESE DISCRETE INPUTS/OUTPUTS. AN UNUSED DISCRETE MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION.
SEE SECTION 6.6.14 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING DISCRETES.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR PINS 35, 37, 57, 71, 72 AND 73 ARE SHOWN. THESE PIN FUNCTIONS
9 ARE CONFIGURABLE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 6.6.14.
THESE PINS ARE USED ONLY FOR TAWS-A INSTALLATIONS. THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR
10 THESE DISCRETE INPUTS/OUTPUTS. AN UNUSED DISCRETE MUST BE ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION.
SEE SECTION 6.6.14 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING DISCRETES.
THESE DISCRETES MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE LANDING GEAR AND FLAP POSITION SENSORS IN THE
AIRCRAFT TO INDICATE WHEN THE AIRCRAFT IS IN THE LANDING CONFIGURATION. THESE ARE ACTIVE-
11 LOW DISCRETE INPUTS AND CAN BE CONFIGURED FOR “ACTIVE FOR LANDING” OR “ACTIVE FOR NON-
LANDING” BASED ON THE INSTALLED SWITCH TYPE. SEE SECTION 6.6.14 FOR MORE INFORMATION.
IF THE INSTALLED ANNUNCIATOR PANEL DOES NOT PROVIDE A GLIDESLOPE CAUTION ANNUNCIATE
12 LAMP, THIS DISCRETE OUTPUT CAN BE TIED TO THE TAWS CAUTION ANNUNCIATION LAMP.
IN TAWS-A INSTALLATIONS, THE GTN CAN BE INTERFACED WITH OTHER NON-GTN NAVIGATION RADIOS
AND GPS NAVIGATORS THAT OUTPUT COURSE/GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION TO PROVIDE TAWS-A
13 GLIDESLOPE ALERTING WHEN APPROACHES ARE FLOWN USING THOSE APPLIANCES. GTN COURSE/
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION IS AUTOMATICALLY FORWARDED TO THE TAWS GTN, SO THE NON-TAWS GTN
DOES NOT NEED THIS ADDITIONAL ARINC 429 CONNECTION TO THE TAWS GTN.
IF THE ARINC 429 PORTS SHOWN ARE ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ARINC 429 PORT
MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF PORT 1. THIS INTERFACE IS SUPPORTED ON THE TAWS OR NON-TAWS
14 GTNS IN A DUAL GTN INSTALLATION BECAUSE DATA RECEIVED ON THIS INPUT IS FORWARDED TO THE
TAWS GTN.
15 IF A FLAP OVERRIDE SWITCH IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE A GUARDED SWITCH.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-44
GTN 7XX
P1001
TIME MARK OUT A 3
4
TIME MARK OUT B 22
s
9 CDI SOURCE SELECT 39
9 OBS MODE SELECT 16
9 AIR/GROUND 38
P1002
DEMO MODE SELECT 1 5
P1003
COM REMOTE TRANSFER 27
6
COM REMOTE TUNE UP 28
COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN 29 7
P1004
NAV REMOTE TRANSFER 28
8
NOTES
TIME MARK OUT (P1001-3 & -22) OUTPUTS A DIFFERENTIAL 1 MILLISECOND WIDE PULSE ONCE PER
4 SECOND.
DEMO MODE SELECT (P1002-1) MAY BE GROUNDED TO START THE UNIT IN DEMO MODE. DO NOT USE IN
5 AN AIRCRAFT INSTALLATION.

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-45
COM REMOTE TRANSFER MAY BE USED TO TRANSFER THE STANDBY COM FREQUENCY TO THE ACTIVE
6 COM FREQUENCY VIA REMOTE SWITCH.
COM REMOTE TUNE UP AND COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN MAY BE USED TO SCROLL THROUGH A LIST OF
7 USER COM FREQUENCIES.
NAV REMOTE TRANSFER MAY BE USED TO TRANSFER THE STANDBY NAV FREQUENCY TO THE ACTIVE
8 NAV FREQUENCY VIA REMOTE SWITCH.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-46
3
GTN 725/750 TO EXISTING GDL 88/88D
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING P881
S
TIME MARK OUT A 3 22 TIME MARK 1A
TIME MARK OUT B 22 3 TIME MARK 1B

S S
6 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 37 AUDIO INHIBIT #1*
(TAWS UNITS ONLY)
P1002
A 23 53 A
B 24 54 B
4 5
A 25 51 A ETHERNET IN 1
ETHERNET OUT 3
B 26 52 B
S S
NOTES
3 FOR THE CONNECTION TO THE GDL 88.
IF ETHERNET PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE
4 CONNECTED. SEE SECTION 5 FOR PINOUT INFORMATION.
Figure D-29 GDL 88/88D Interconnect - Single GTN

Rev. N Page D-47
3
GTN 725/750 TO EXISTING GDL 88/88D
#1 P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING
P881
S

S S
7 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 37 AUDIO INHIBIT #1*

(GTN 6XX/7XX TAWS UNITS ONLY)
P1002
A 23 53 A
B 24 54 B
4 5 6
A 25 51 A
ETHERNET OUT 3 ETHERNET IN 1
B 26 52 B
S S
A 13
ETHERNET IN 4
B 14
4
A 4
ETHERNET OUT 4
B 5
S
6
GTN 725/750
#2 P1002
B 24
ETHERNET IN 3
A 23
4
B 26
ETHERNET OUT 3
A 25
S
8 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 10
3
TO EXISTING
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING
S

S S
NOTES
3 FOR THE CONNECTION TO THE GDL 88.
4 CONNECTED. SEE SECTION 5 FOR PINOUT INFORMATION.

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. N Page D-48
5 CONNECTION MAY BE MADE TO GTN 725/750 #2 IN LIEU OF GTN 725/750 #1.
6 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. SEE SECTION 4.7.2 FOR PART NUMBERS
SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* IS ONLY USED IN SOFTWARE VERSIONS PRIOR TO V5.00. IN SOFTWARE V5.00 OR
8 LATER, THE SYSTEM ID IS SET VIA CONFIGURATION MODE. SEE SECTION 6.6.10 FOR MORE
INFORMATION.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. N Page D-49
GARMIN GARMIN
GTN 725/750 GSR 56
P561
P1002
6 GSR STATUS IN* 11 31 STATUS DISCRETE* OUT
6 GSR REMOTE PWR* 12 16 IRIDIUM RMT PWR ON*
GSR AUDIO ATTENUATE* n 18 ATTENUATE OUTPUT*

7 8
P1001
RS-232 IN 4 24 12 RS-232 OUT
5 RS-232 OUT 4 5 13 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 4 44 14 SIGNAL GROUND
s s
AUDIO PANEL
4
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT HI 4 GSR 56 AUDIO IN HI
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT LO 5 GSR 56 AUDIO IN LO
(OPTIONAL)
TEL AUDIO IN HI
1 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT HI
TEL AUDIO IN LO 2 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT LO
s
NOTES
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GSR 56 TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GSR 56 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
4 OPTIONAL AUDIO CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED IF THE PHONE FEATURE OF THE GSR 56 IS UTILIZED.
IF THIS RS-232 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE
5 CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THIS PORT. SEE SECTION 6.6.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
6 DESCRIBED IN SECTION 6.6.13
THERE IS NO DEFAULT CONFIGURATION FOR THIS DISCRETE INPUT. AN UNUSED DISCRETE MUST BE
7 ASSIGNED TO THIS FUNCTION. SEE SECTION 6.6.14 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING
DISCRETES.
THE ATTENUATE OUTPUT* DISCRETE INPUT CAN BE USED TO DECREASE THE VOLUME OF THE GSR 56
8 PHONE RINGER. THIS FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE FOR ALL GSR 56 UNITS EXCEPT FOR THE 011-01706-00
UNIT.
Figure D-31 GSR 56 Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-50
METAL AIRCRAFT ONLY
SINGLE GTN INSTALLATIONS
GARMIN WEATHER
RADAR
GTN 7XX P1002
4 7
A 17 A
ETHERNET OUT 2 ETHERNET IN
B 18 B
A 15 A ETHERNET OUT
ETHERNET IN 2 B
B 16
s s
5
RT ON/OFF
SIGNAL GROUND
4 RED CONFIG MODULE POWER
CONFIG 1 BLK CONFIG MODULE GROUND
MODULE 3 YEL CONFIG MODULE DATA
2 WHT CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
6
DUAL GTN INSTALLATIONS
GARMIN WEATHER
RADAR
GTN 7XX #1
P1002
4 7
A 17 A
ETHERNET OUT 2 ETHERNET IN
B 18 B
A 15 A ETHERNET OUT
ETHERNET IN 2 B
B 16
s s
5
RT ON/OFF
SIGNAL GROUND
4 RED CONFIG MODULE POWER
CONFIG 1 BLK CONFIG MODULE GROUND
MODULE 3 YEL CONFIG MODULE DATA
2 WHT CONFIG MODULE CLOCK
6
GTN 7XX #2
P1002 P1002 5
5 4
A 6 8 A ETHERNET OUT 1
ETHERNET IN 1
B 7 9 B
A 8 6 A ETHERNET IN 1
ETHERNET OUT 1
B 9 7 B
s s

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. N Page D-51
ARINC 708 WXR – SINGLE GTN INSTALLATIONS
WEATHER RADAR R/T
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
11
RDS 81 RDS 82 RDR 2000 RDR 2100
RS 811A RS 181A ART 2000 ART 2100 15
GTN 7XX 11
P1005 P1001 P1001 P5001 P5001
10
A 18 8 8 42 42 A ARINC 453 OUT
8 ARINC 453/708 IN 1 B 60 9 9 43 43 B (WEATHER)
s
A 28 19 (18) 19 (18) 2 (4) 2 (4) A ARINC 429 IN #1 (#2)

14 ARINC 429 OUT 3
B 7 20 (5) 20 (5) 3 (5) 3 (5) B (CONTROL)
s
WX RADAR ON* 13 24 (12) 24 (12) 31 (32) 31 (32) RT ON/OFF #1 (#2)

N/C - - 1 1 STRUT SWITCH IN
A 40
ARINC 453/708 IN 1 TERM 12 12
B 19 9 12
ARINC 708 WXR – DUAL GTN INSTALLATIONS

WEATHER RADAR R/T
11
15
GTN 7XX #1 11
P1005
A 40
ARINC 453/708 IN 1 TERM
B 19 9
A 28 A ARINC 429 IN #1
14 ARINC 429 OUT 3
B 7 B (CONTROL)
s
WX RADAR ON* 13 RT ON/OFF #1
A 18
8 ARINC 453/708 IN 1
B 60
s
10
GTN 7XX #2 11
P1005 13
s
A 18 A ARINC 453 OUT

8 ARINC 453/708 IN 1
B 60 B (WEATHER)
s
A 28 A ARINC 429 IN #2
14 ARINC 429 OUT 3
B 7 B (CONTROL)
s
WX RADAR ON* 13 RT ON/OFF #2

N/C STRUT SWITCH IN
A 40 N/C
ARINC 453/708 IN 1 TERM 12
B 19 N/C

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. N Page D-52
NOTES
3 MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GWX 68/70 TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GWX 68/70 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
CONNECTED. SEE SECTION 5 FOR PINOUT INFORMATION. ONLY THE GTN 7XX IS CAPABLE OF
5 DISPLAYING GWX 68/70 DATA. RECOMMEND CONNECTING THE GTN 725 OR GTN 750 DIRECTLY TO THE
GWX 68/70.
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH
P1001.
THE WIRING TO THE HSDB WEATHER RADAR R/T MUST BE OVERBRAIDED IN THE RADOME AREA, PRIOR
7 TO ENTERING THE FUSELAGE.
8 THE WXR ARINC 453/708 INPUT IS UNTERMINATED.
IF THE GTN IS THE ONLY EQUIPMENT ON THE ARINC 453/708 OUTPUT BUS FROM THE WEATHER RADAR,
OR IF IT IS DESIRED TO UTILIZE THE GTN INTERNAL TERMINATION RESISTOR, INSTALL THE TERMINATION
9 JUMPER SHOWN. THIS LENGTH OF THIS JUMPER SHOULD NOT EXCEED 3”. IF MULTIPLE PIECES OF
EQUIPMENT ARE ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS, ONLY ONE TERMINATION RESISTOR SHOULD BE UTILIZED,
AT THE LAST LRU ON THE ARINC 453/708 BUS.
AT WEATHER RADAR UNIT, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A
10 CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
11 THE GTN MAY BE CONNECTED AS INDICATOR #1 OR INDICATOR #2.
IF THE STRUT SWITCH INPUT IS CONNECTED TO THE WXR, DISCONNECT IT. THE GTN WILL
12 AUTOMATICALLY COMMAND THE WXR TO STANDBY UPON LANDING. THIS ALSO ALLOWS THE PILOT TO
TURN THE WXR ON PRIOR TO TAKEOFF.
SPLICE MUST BE MADE WITHIN 6" OF CONNECTOR BACKSHELL (WITHIN CONNECTOR BACKSHELL IS
13 PREFERRED).
14 ARINC 429 OUTPUT PORT 3 MUST BE USED FOR CONTROLLING THE WEATHER RADAR.
THE ART 2100 IS SUPPORTED WHEN CONFIGURED TO EMULATE AN ART 2000. ONLY ART 2000
15 FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. N Page D-53
GARMIN RADAR
GTN 7XX ALTIMETER
P1002

4
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 ARINC 429 OUT B
NOTES
AT GTN 7XX, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0". CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE RADAR ALTIMETER TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH RADAR ALTIMETER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
IF THIS ARINC 429 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ARINC 429 PORT MAY BE
4 CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THIS PORT. SEE SECTION 6.6.1 FOR ARINC 429 SETTINGS.
Figure D-33 Radar Altimeter Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-54
GTN 7XX
GARMIN
P1001 P301 FLIGHT STREAM 210
4
RS-232 IN 1 27 11 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 1 8 12 RS-232 IN 1 3
SIGNAL GROUND 46
s
s
NOTES
ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO FLIGHT STREAM 110/210
3 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. SEE SECTION 6.6.2 FOR RS-232
4 SETTINGS.
Figure D-34 Flight Stream 210 Interconnect

Rev. N Page D-55

GTN7XX安装手册 - 复件

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTN7XX安装手册 - 复件

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTN 725/750

TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 December 2015 Revision N

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

CURRENT REVISION DESCRIPTION

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

1.5 COM Specifications (GTN 750 Only)

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

1.6 VOR Specifications (GTN 750 Only)

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

1.12.3 TSO System Functions and Software Levels

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

1.13.1 Basemap Database

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

Priority Altitude Source

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

Priority Baro-corrected Altitude Source

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

Priority Heading Source

190-01007-02 GTN 725/750 TSO Installation Manual

Priority Indicated Airspeed Source

3.3.5 Multiple True Airspeed Sources

Priority True Airspeed Source

3.3.6 Multiple VOR/LOC Selected Course Sources